2012 Chevrolet Volt

Chevrolet Volt Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (1,1)
2012 Chevrolet Volt Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Battery and Efficiency. . . . . . . . 1-20 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Performance and Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Trademarks and License
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Keys, Doors, and Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 5-4 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-53 Electric Vehicle Operating
Universal Remote System . . . . 5-62 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Electric Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-33
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
2012 Chevrolet Volt Owner Manual M
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-38 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 Special Application Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-58 Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Recommended Fluids, OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14 OnStar Additional
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase or A French language copy of this
due to changes subsequent to the manual can be obtained from your
printing of this owner manual. dealer or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited For vehicles first sold in Canada, suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, substitute the name “General
the CHEVROLET Emblem, VOLT, Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for P.O. Box 07130
and the VOLT logo are trademarks Chevrolet Motor Division wherever
and/or service marks of General Detroit, MI 48207
it appears in this manual.
Motors LLC, its subsidiaries, 1-800-551-4123
affiliates, or licensors. Keep this manual in the vehicle for Numéro de poste 6438 de
quick reference. langue française
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20819515 A First Printing 2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart f: Electric Parking Brake * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Here are some additional symbols d: Electronic Stability : : Oil Pressure
that may be found on the vehicle Control (ESC)
and what they mean. For more O : Power
information on the symbol, refer to B : Engine Coolant Temperature B : Remote Vehicle Start
the Index. O : Exterior Lamps > : Safety Belt Reminders
9 : Airbag Readiness Light y : Fault g : StabiliTrak® Disable
# : Air Conditioning g : First Responder 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) . : Fuel Gauge i : Traction Control System (TCS)
b / g : Audio Steering
®
Wheel + : Fuses Disable
Controls or OnStar
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Q : Vehicle Ready
I: Brake System Warning Changer M : Windshield Washer Fluid
Light
_: High Voltage
A : Charge Port Door j: LATCH System Child
" : Charging System (12‐Volt Restraints
Battery)
[: Leaf
I: Cruise Control
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

In Brief Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Electronic Stability
Instrument Panel
Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Vehicle Features Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-26
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Tire Sealant and
Initial Drive Information Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-18 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Driving for Better Energy
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18 Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Roadside Assistance
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Battery and Efficiency
Head Restraint High Voltage Safety
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Passenger Sensing Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Total Vehicle Range . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . 1-24
Steering Wheel Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑8. H. Light Sensor. See Daytime R. Leaf Button. See Center Stack
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. Running Lamps (DRL) on Display on page 5‑29.
See Turn and Lane-Change page 6‑2. S. DRIVE MODE Button. See
Signals on page 6‑3. I. Instrument Panel Storage on Driver Selected Operating
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 4‑1. Modes on page 9‑22.
page 6‑1. J. Automatic Climate Control T. Power Button on page 9‑16.
Pedestrian Friendly Alert on System on page 8‑1. U. Shift Lever. See Electric Drive
page 5‑7. K. Driver Information Center (DIC) Unit on page 9‑28.
C. Instrument Cluster on Controls. See Driver Information V. Infotainment on page 7‑1.
page 5‑10. Center (DIC) on page 5‑43.
Navigation System. See the
Driver Information Center (DIC) L. Instrument Panel Illumination separate navigation system
Display. See Driver Information Control on page 6‑4. manual.
Center (DIC) on page 5‑43. M. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out W. Electric Parking Brake on
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer on of View). See Malfunction page 9‑30.
page 5‑7. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19.
X. Power Door Locks on
E. Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7 N. Cruise Control on page 9‑36. page 2‑11.
(If Equipped). O. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Y. Hazard Warning Flashers on
F. Center Stack Display on page 5‑6. page 6‑3.
page 5‑29. P. Horn on page 5‑7.
G. Charging Status Indicator. See Q. Steering Wheel Controls on
Charging Status Feedback on page 5‑6 (If Equipped).
page 9‑47.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive 7 : Press and release to locate

the vehicle. Press and hold for
Information three seconds to sound the panic
This section provides a brief alarm. Press again to cancel the
overview about some of the panic alarm.
important features that may or may B: Press Q and then press and
not be on your specific vehicle. hold B within five seconds to
For more detailed information, refer start the vehicle's heating or air
to each of the features which can be conditioning systems and rear
found later in this owner manual. window defogger from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter.
Remote Keyless Entry Press the key release button to
See Remote Start on page 2‑7 for
(RKE) System more information.
extend the key. The key can be
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) used for all locks. A : Press to open the charge port
door. See Plug-In Charging on
transmitter will work up to 60 m K : Press once to unlock the driver page 9‑44 for more information.
(195 ft) away from the vehicle. door. Press a second time within
five seconds to unlock all doors. See Keys on page 2‑1 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Q: Press to lock all doors. Operation on page 2‑2.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑53.
In Brief 1-5
Remote Start After entering the vehicle during a Door Locks

remote start, press the POWER O
Use remote start to heat or cool the Keyless Access
interior when the vehicle is plugged button on the center stack with the
in to maximize electric range by brake pedal applied to operate as The RKE transmitter must be within
utilizing electricity from the wall normal. 1 m (3 ft) of the door being opened.
outlet. The engine may start to Canceling Remote Start
support the climate control
operation. Normal operation of the To cancel a remote start, do any of
system will return after the vehicle the following:
has been turned on. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
Activating the Remote Start vehicle and press and hold B
until the parking lamps turn off.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
2. Press Q on the RKE transmitter;
the doors will lock.
. Press the POWER O button on
the center stack, with the brake
3. Within five seconds, press and pedal applied, then press the
hold B until the turn signal POWER O button again to turn
To unlock the door from the driver
lamps flash, or for approximately door, press the lock/unlock button
the vehicle off. on the door handle. Press again
four seconds. Pressing B again
See Remote Start on page 2‑7. within five seconds to unlock all
during a remote start will turn the passenger doors.
feature off.
1-6 In Brief
To lock the doors, press the lock/ The Keyless Access can be Power Door Locks
unlock button if: programmed to unlock all doors
. More than five seconds have on the first lock/unlock press from
passed. the driver door. See Vehicle
. The lock/unlock button was used
to unlock all doors. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE):
The RKE transmitter must be within
. All doors are closed. 60 m (195 ft) of the vehicle.
To unlock all doors from the K: Press to unlock.
passenger door, press the lock/
unlock button on the door handle. Q: Press to lock.
To lock the doors, press the lock/ See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
unlock button if: System Operation on page 2‑2.
. The lock/unlock button was used Key: To unlock or lock the door,
turn the key left or right. The power door lock switches are
to unlock all doors. on the center stack.
Inside the vehicle: Use the door
. All doors are closed.
lock knob, the door handle, or the K: Press to unlock.
power door switch. See Door Locks Q: Press to lock.
on page 2‑10. See Power Door Locks on
page 2‑11.
In Brief 1-7
Hatch Remote Keyless Entry (RKE): Windows

To open the hatch with the doors
locked, the RKE transmitter must be
within 60 m (195 ft) of the vehicle.
Unlock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, then press the button on
the underside of the hatch and lift
up. Always close the hatch before
driving. Do not press the button
while closing the hatch; it will
unlatch again. See Hatch on
page 2‑13.
The power window switches are

Keyless Access with Remote
on the driver door armrest. Each
Keyless Entry (RKE): To open the
passenger door has a switch that
hatch with the doors locked, the
controls only that window.
RKE transmitter must be within
1 m (3 ft) of the trunk. Press the Press the front of the switch to lower
button on the underside of the hatch the window. Pull the switch up to
and lift up. raise it.
The driver and passenger windows
have an express-down feature and
the driver window has express-up.
See Power Windows on page 2‑18.
1-8 In Brief
Remote Window Operation Seat Adjustment Height Adjustment

Seat Position
Move the lever up or down to raise

or lower the seat.
To adjust the seat position:
See “Seat Height Adjuster” under
The vehicle may have remote 1. Pull the handle at the front of the Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4.
operating windows that will open seat cushion to unlock it.
all the windows from outside the 2. Move the seat forward or
vehicle by pressing and holding K rearward and release the
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) handle.
transmitter. 3. Try to move the seat back and
This feature can be disabled by a forth to be sure it is locked in
dealer technician. place.
See Power Windows on page 2‑18. See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4.
In Brief 1-9
Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright Heated Seats

position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑5.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then If available, the controls are on the
release the lever to lock the center stack. To operate, the vehicle
seatback in place. must be on.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to Press M or L to heat the driver
make sure it is locked. or passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
1-10 In Brief
Press the button once for the Press the touch screen M AUTO Head Restraint
highest setting. With each press of
or L AUTO button. The button color Adjustment
the button, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting, will change to green when this Do not drive until the head restraints
and then the off setting. Three lights feature is on.
for all occupants are installed and
indicate the highest setting and one When the vehicle is on, this feature adjusted properly.
light the lowest. will automatically activate the To achieve a comfortable seating
See Heated Front Seats on heated seats at the level required by
position, change the seatback
page 3‑7 for more information. the vehicle's interior temperature.
recline angle as little as necessary
The active high, medium, low, or off while keeping the seat and the
Auto Heated Seats heated seat level will be indicated head restraint height in the proper
by the manual heated seat button
position.
lights on the center stack. Use the
touch screen buttons or the manual For more information see Head
heated seat buttons on the center Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
stack to turn auto heated seats off. Adjustment on page 3‑4.
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑7 for more information.
The heated seats can also be
programmed to come on during
a remote start. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑53 for
more information.
If available, the controls can be
accessed while the vehicle is on by
pressing the CLIMATE button on the
center stack.
In Brief 1-11
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing No other airbag is affected by the

passenger sensing system. See
System Passenger Sensing System on
The passenger airbag status
indicator lights on the overhead
console when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑18.
United States
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior
Mirrors can be folded inward toward
Refer to the following sections for the vehicle to prevent damage when
important information on how to use going through an automatic car
safety belts properly: Canada wash. Push the mirror outward to
return it to the original position.
. Safety Belts on page 3‑11. The passenger sensing system
will turn off the front outboard See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑16.
. How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑12. passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag under certain conditions.
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑13.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑41.
1-12 In Brief
When the rear window defogger is Steering Wheel

activated, the heated mirriors,
if equipped, will also come on. See
Adjustment
Heated Mirrors on page 2‑16.
Interior
The vehicle has an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature and the indicator light come
on each time the vehicle is started.
Controls for the outside power
Hold the mirror in the center to
mirrors are on the driver door.
adjust it. See Automatic Dimming
To adjust a mirror: Rearview Mirror on page 2‑17.
1. Move the selector switch to To adjust the steering wheel:
L (left) or R (right) to choose the 1. Pull the lever (A) down.
driver or passenger mirror.
2. Move the steering wheel up
2. Press the arrows on the control or down.
pad to move each mirror in the
desired direction. 3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
3. Return the selector switch to the
center position. 4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
In Brief 1-13
Interior Lighting Reading Lamps
Dome Lamps There are front and rear reading

lamps.
The rear reading lamps are in the

headliner.
For more information on interior
lighting, see Instrument Panel
The dome lamp controls are in the
Illumination Control on page 6‑4.
overhead console.
To operate, press the following
buttons:
The front reading lamps are in the
': Press to turn on the dome overhead console.
lamps.
#$: Press to turn each lamp on
H: Press to turn the lamps on or off.
automatically when a door is
opened.
(: Press to turn the lamps off,
even when a door is open.
1-14 In Brief
Exterior Lighting For more information, see:

. Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
. Turn and Lane-Change Signals
on page 6‑3.
. Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2. G: Move the lever up to G for
adjustable interval wipes, then turn
The exterior lamp control is on the
turn signal/lane change lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer the band up for more frequent wipes
or down for less frequent wipes.
O : Turn to operate the exterior 9 : Use to turn the windshield
lamps. wipers off.
O: Turns the exterior lamps off. 3 : For a single wipe, briefly move
AUTO: Turns the exterior lamps on the wiper lever down. For several
and off automatically depending on wipes, hold the wiper lever down.
the exterior light.
The windshield wiper lever is on the Windshield Washer
;: Turns on the parking lamps,
side of the steering column. With
together with the sidemarker lamps, Pull the windshield wiper lever
the vehicle on, move the windshield toward you to spray windshield
taillamps, license plate lamps, and
wiper lever to select the wiper washer fluid and activate the wipers.
instrument panel lights.
speed.
5 : Turns on the headlamps, See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
2: Move the lever up to 2 for fast page 5‑7.
together with the parking lamps,
wipes.
sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, and instrument panel 1: Move the lever up to 1 for slow
lights. wipes.
In Brief 1-15
Climate Controls E. Auto (Automatic Operation)
Heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled by using the climate F. Rear Window Defogger
control buttons and the climate touch screen. G. Manual Fan Control
Climate Control Buttons
A. Temperature Control C. Defrost

B. Driver and Passenger Heated D. Climate
Seats
1-16 In Brief
See Automatic Climate Control

System on page 8‑1.
Auto Heated Seats are selected
using the climate control touch
screen. See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑7.
Climate Touch Screen Controls
A. Driver and Passenger Auto F. Climate Modes: Fan Only, ECO,

Heated Seats Comfort
B. Air Delivery Mode Controls G. Climate Power Gauge
C. Auto Recirculation H. Manual Fan Control
D. Manual Recirculation I. Temperature Setting Display
E. Outside Air Temperature J. Air Conditioning Indicator
Display K. Heat Status Indicator
In Brief 1-17
Vehicle Features Storing a Favorite Station knob or press the Time screen
button to display other options
Stations from all bands can be
within that feature.
Radio(s) stored in the favorite lists in any
order. Up to six stations can be 2. Press + or − to increase or
VOL/ O : Press to turn the system stored in each favorite page and the decrease the Hours and Minutes
on and off. Turn to increase or number of available favorite pages displayed on the clock.
decrease the volume. can be set. 12/24 HR Format: Press the 12 HR
SOURCE: Press to choose To store the station to a position in screen button for standard time;
between FM, AM, or XM™, the list, press the corresponding press the 24 HR screen button for
if equipped. numeric button 1 to 6 until a beep is military time.
TUNE/MENU: Turn to select radio heard. Day + or Day −: Press the Day +
stations. Press to select a menu. See “Storing a Station as a or Day − display buttons to increase
Favorite” in AM-FM Radio on or decrease the day.
r SEEK: Press to seek the
previous station or track. page 7‑7 for more information. Display: Press Display to turn the
Setting the Clock display of the time on the screen on
SEEK [ : Press to seek the next or off.
station or track. Adjusting the Time
See Clock on page 5‑42 for more
INFO: Press to show available The clock is in the center stack information.
information about the current station display.
or track.
To set the time:
See Overview on page 7‑2 for more
information about these and other 1. Press the CONFIG button to
radio features. enter the menu options. Turn the
TUNE/MENU knob to scroll
through the available setup
features. Press the TUNE/MENU
1-18 In Brief
Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices See Bluetooth (Overview) on

page 7‑20 or Bluetooth
Vehicles with an XM™ satellite radio This vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) (Infotainment Controls) on
tuner and a valid XM satellite radio auxiliary input and a USB port page 7‑21 or Bluetooth (Voice
subscription can receive XM located in the center stack. External Recognition) on page 7‑25.
programming. devices such as iPods®, laptop
computers, MP3 players, CD Steering Wheel Controls
XM Satellite Radio Service changers, and USB storage devices
XM is a satellite radio service based may be connected, depending on
in the 48 contiguous United States the audio system.
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM For more information, see Auxiliary
satellite radio has a wide variety of Devices on page 7‑15.
programming and commercial-free
music, coast to coast, and in
digital-quality sound. A fee is
Bluetooth®
required to receive the XM service. The Bluetooth system allows users
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
For more information refer to:
to make and receive hands-free
. www.xmradio.com or call calls using the vehicle audio system
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). and controls.
. www.xmradio.ca or call The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
1-877-438-9677 (Canada). must be paired with the in-vehicle For vehicles with audio steering
Bluetooth system before it can be wheel controls, some audio controls
For more information, see Satellite can be adjusted at the steering
Radio on page 7‑9. used in the vehicle. Not all phones
will support all functions. wheel.
b / g : Press to interact with an
Onstar, Bluetooth, or navigation
system (if equipped).
In Brief 1-19
$ / i : Press to silence the Cruise Control SET/− : Move the thumbwheel

vehicle speakers only. Press again down to set a speed and activate
to turn the sound on. For vehicles cruise control or to make the vehicle
with OnStar or Bluetooth systems, decelerate.
press to reject an incoming call, See Cruise Control on page 9‑36.
or to end a current call.
_ SRC ^ : Turn _ or ^ to select a Navigation System
radio band or audio source. If the vehicle has a navigation
Turn _ or ^ to select the next or system, there is a separate
previous favorite radio station, CD navigation system manual that
track, DVD track/chapter (with includes information on the radio,
navigation), or MP3 track. audio players, and navigation
system.
Press SRC to change between
radio and CD or DVD. The cruise control buttons are on The navigation system provides
the steering wheel. detailed maps of most major
Press and hold SRC to interact with freeways and roads. After a
the navigation system. 1 : Press to turn the cruise control destination has been set, the
system on and off. An indicator light system provides turn-by-turn
+ x −: Press + to increase or − to
will turn on or off in the instrument instructions for reaching the
decrease the volume. cluster. destination. In addition, the system
For more information, see Steering *: Press to disengage cruise can help locate a variety of points
Wheel Controls on page 5‑6. control without erasing the set of interest (POIs), such as banks,
speed from memory. airports, restaurants, and more.
RES/+ : Move the thumbwheel up See the navigation system manual
to resume to a previously set speed for more information.
or to accelerate.
1-20 In Brief
Power Outlets Battery and Efficiency If the vehicle is in a crash, the

sensing system may shut down the
The accessory power outlets can be high voltage system. When this
used to plug in electrical equipment, High Voltage Safety occurs, the high voltage battery is
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. Information disconnected and the vehicle will
There are three accessory power not start. The SERVICE VEHICLE
outlets: { WARNING SOON message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will be
. Inside the front of the center
Exposure to high voltage can displayed. Before the vehicle can be
floor console. operated again, it must be serviced
cause shock, burns, and even
. On the rear of the center floor death. The high voltage at your dealer.
console. components in the vehicle can See Battery on page 10‑23 for
. Inside the instrument panel only be serviced by technicians important safety information. If an
storage area. with special training. airbag has inflated, see What Will
The power outlets supply power High voltage components are You See after an Airbag Inflates? on
while the vehicle is on, or if the page 3‑24.
identified by labels. Do not
vehicle is in Retained Accessory remove, open, take apart, Only a trained service technician
Power (RAP). See Retained or modify these components. with the proper knowledge and tools
Accessory Power (RAP) on High voltage cable or wiring has should inspect, test, or replace the
page 9‑19. orange covering. Do not probe, high voltage battery. See your
Remove the cover to access and tamper with, cut, or modify high dealer if the high voltage battery
replace when not in use. voltage cable or wiring. needs service.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. See Battery on page 10‑23.

This vehicle has a high voltage
battery and a standard 12‐volt
battery.
In Brief 1-21
Charging While the charge cord is plugged one second and release to open
into the vehicle, the vehicle cannot the charge port door. The charge
The high voltage battery can be be driven. port door can also be opened
charged using a household using the RKE transmitter. See
electrical outlet. There are three Charging Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ways to program how the vehicle System Operation on page 2‑2.
Start Charge
is charged. See Charging on
page 5‑31 for more information. In cold weather conditions, ice
may form around the charge port
This section explains the process door. The charge port door may
for charging the high voltage battery. not open on the first attempt.
Do not allow the vehicle to remain in Remove ice from the area and
temperature extremes for long repeat attempting to open the
periods without being driven or charge port door.
plugged in. It is recommended that
the vehicle be plugged in when
temperatures are below 0°C (32°F)
and above 32°C (90°F) to maximize
high voltage battery life.
The charging system may run fans
and pumps that result in sounds 1. The charge port door release
from the vehicle while it is turned button is on the driver door inner
off. Additional unexpected clicking trim panel. With the vehicle in
sounds may be caused by the P (Park), press the button for
electrical devices used while
charging.
1-22 In Brief
indicators are both green. See feature, see “Charge Cord Theft
Charge Cord on page 9‑50 for Alert” in Vehicle Personalization
more information. on page 5‑53.
End Charge
1. Unlock the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter to disarm the charge
cord theft alert.
2. Open the rear hatch, lift the load

support floor covering (A), and
remove the charge cord (D). It is
located near the tire sealant and
compressor kit (C). Pull up on 4. Then plug in the vehicle plug of
the charge cord handle (D) to the charge cord into the charge
release it from the handle port on the vehicle. Verify that 2. Unplug the vehicle plug of the
clip (E). Lift the charge cord up the charging status indicator charge cord from the vehicle by
and rearward to remove it from illuminates on top of the squeezing the vehicle plug lever
the vehicle. The vehicle plug (B) instrument panel and a horn and pull to remove.
is stored as shown. chirp occurs. See Charging 3. Close the charge port door by
3. Plug the charge cord into the Status Feedback on page 9‑47 pressing firmly in the center to
electrical outlet. See Electrical for more information. latch properly.
Requirements for Battery 5. To arm the charge cord theft 4. Unplug the charge cord from the
Charging on page 9‑52. Verify alert, lock the vehicle with the electrical outlet.
that the charge cord status RKE transmitter. To disable this
In Brief 1-23
5. Before storing the charge cord, Fueling

have the charge cord face up
and wrap the charge cable The fuel system on this vehicle
neatly counterclockwise around requires a refueling process to
the body of the charge cord. control evaporative emissions. To
refuel the vehicle:
6. Place the charge cord, face

down, into the storage
compartment with the front
edge (F) of the charge cord
body under the clips (G) located
in the front of the storage
compartment. The vehicle
plug (B) should be on the right 1. Press the fuel door button on
side of the charge cord. the driver door for one second.
A WAIT TO REFUEL message
7. Push the charge cord handle displays on the Driver
down until it locks into the Information Center.
handle clip at the rear of the
storage compartment.
1-24 In Brief
4. After refueling, reinstall the fuel Regenerative Braking

cap by turning it clockwise until it
clicks. Close the fuel door. Regenerative braking takes some of
the energy from the moving vehicle
See Filling the Tank on page 9‑56. and turns it back into electrical
energy. This energy is then stored
Total Vehicle Range back into the high voltage battery
system, contributing to increased
energy efficiency.
2. When the READY TO REFUEL See Regenerative Braking on
message displays, the fuel door page 9‑32.
on the passenger side will
unlock. Push the rearward edge
of the fuel door in and release to
open the door.
3. Turn the fuel cap
counterclockwise to remove.
Total vehicle range is the remaining
While refueling, hang the fuel
distance the vehicle can be driven
cap tether from the hook on the
combining the electric range and
inside of the fuel door. Complete
fuel range.
refueling within 30 minutes of
pushing the fuel door button on See Driving for Better Energy
the driver door. If refueling more Efficiency on page 9‑2.
than 30 minutes, push the fuel
door button again.
In Brief 1-25
Service Performance and Electronic Stability

Maintenance Control (ESC)
{ WARNING The Electronic Stability Control
Never try to do your own service Traction Control system called StabiliTrak assists
with directional control of the vehicle
on high voltage components. You System (TCS) in difficult driving conditions. The
can be injured and the vehicle
The TCS limits wheel spin. The system turns on automatically every
can be damaged if you try to do
system turns on automatically every time the vehicle is on.
your own service work. Service time the vehicle is on.
and repair of these high voltage . To turn off both traction control
components should only be
. To turn off traction control, press and StabiliTrak, press and hold
performed by a trained service and release the TCS/ESC the TCS/ESC button located on
technician with the proper button, located on the overhead the overhead console, until i
knowledge and tools. See Doing console. i illuminates and the and g illuminate in the
Your Own Service Work on appropriate DIC message is instrument cluster and the
page 10‑6. displayed. See Ride Control appropriate DIC message is
System Messages on page 5‑50. displayed. See Ride Control
. Press and release the TCS/ESC System Messages on page 5‑50.
button again to turn on traction . Press and release the TCS/ESC
control. button to turn on both systems.
For more information, see Traction For more information, see Electronic
Control System (TCS) on Stability Control (ESC) on
page 9‑33. page 9‑34.
1-26 In Brief
Tire Pressure Monitor indicator that the tire pressures are Engine Oil Life System
getting low and the tires need to be
This vehicle may have a Tire inflated to the proper pressure. The engine oil life system calculates
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). engine oil life based on vehicle use
The TPMS does not replace normal and displays the CHANGE ENGINE
monthly tire maintenance. It is the OIL SOON message when it is time
driver’s responsibility to maintain to change the engine oil and filter.
correct tire pressures. The oil life system should be reset
See Tire Pressure Monitor System to 100% only following an oil
on page 10‑47. change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
The TPMS warning light alerts you Tire Sealant and
1. Use the SELECT knob to select
to a significant loss in pressure of Compressor Kit OIL LIFE on the DIC menu.
one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as This vehicle may have a tire sealant 2. Press SELECT to start the OIL
soon as possible and inflate the and compressor kit that can be used LIFE reset procedure.
tires to the recommended pressure to seal small punctures in the tread
area of the tire. Significant sidewall 3. The DIC menu will display “Are
shown on the Tire and Loading
damage will require the tire to be you sure that you want to reset?”
Information label. See Vehicle Load
replaced. Use SELECT to choose YES to
Limits on page 9‑11. The warning
reset oil life or NO to exit and
light will remain on until the tire See Tire Sealant and Compressor return to the previous menu.
pressure is corrected. Kit on page 10‑60 for complete
During cooler conditions, the low tire operating information.
pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early
In Brief 1-27
4. If YES is selected, the DIC menu Aggressive braking is indicated Drive Mode and PRNDL Selection
will display RESET OIL LIFE for when the ball turns yellow and Use Normal Mode when possible.
a short time and then 100% OIL travels below the center of the
LIFE will be displayed when OIL gauge. Sport Mode provides more
LIFE is successfully reset. responsive acceleration than
Acceleration/Braking/Coasting Normal Mode but can reduce
See Engine Oil Life System on efficiency.
page 10‑12. Avoid unnecessary rapid
accelerations and decelerations. Use Mountain Mode prior to
Driving for Better Energy Electric range is maximized at climbing long, steep grades in
80 km/h (50 mph) and below. Higher mountainous areas. Be sure to
Efficiency speeds use more energy and can engage Mountain Mode before
Use the following tips to help significantly reduce electric range. starting to climb. Mountain Mode
maximize energy efficiency and reduces electric range and power
Use cruise control when but may be needed to maintain
range. appropriate. speeds above 96 km/h (60 mph)
Driving Style Plan ahead for decelerations and when climbing grades of 5% or
Efficiency Gauge (Instrument coast whenever possible. For greater.
Cluster) example, do not rush to traffic Use L (Low) in heavy stop‐and‐go
signals. traffic or when traveling downhill.
The ball indicator should be kept
green and in the center of the Do not shift to N (Neutral) to coast. L (Low) requires less brake pedal
gauge. The vehicle recovers energy while application and provides a
coasting and braking in D (Drive) controlled, efficient way to slow the
Inefficient acceleration is indicated or L (Low). vehicle down.
when the ball turns yellow and
travels above the center of the
gauge.
1-28 In Brief
Climate Setting Use remote start to heat or cool the Maintenance

interior when the vehicle is plugged Always keep the tires properly
Using the heat and air conditioning
in to maximize the electric range by inflated and the vehicle properly
systems decreases the energy
utilizing electricity from the electrical aligned.
available for electric driving.
outlet.
Optimal energy efficiency is The weight of excess cargo in the
In hot weather, avoid parking in vehicle affects efficiency and range.
achieved with the heat, air
direct sunlight or use sunshades Avoid carrying more than is needed.
conditioning, and fan turned off.
inside the vehicle.
Less energy is used at low fan If fuel is not regularly used, consider
Turn off the front and rear window keeping the fuel tank only one‐third
speeds. When using the fan:
defog/defrost when they are no full. Excess fuel weight impacts
. Fan Only is the most energy longer needed. efficiency and range.
efficient climate setting as long
Avoid driving with the windows open Use premium fuel.
as 0 is not selected. at highway speeds.
. ECO is for moderate air Avoid unnecessary use of electrical
Vehicle Charging/Maintenance accessories. Power used for
conditioning and heater
operation and is the next most Charging functions other than propelling the
energy efficient setting as long vehicle will reduce EV range.
Keep the vehicle plugged in, even
as 0 is not selected when fully charged, to keep the Using a rooftop carrier will reduce
battery temperature ready for the efficiency due to additional weight
. Comfort provides the most and drag.
comfort but is the least energy next drive. This is important when
efficient. outside temperatures are extremely
hot or cold.
Use the auto heated seat feature
instead of climate settings. Heating
the seat uses less energy than
heating the vehicle interior.
In Brief 1-29
Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance and OnStar OnStar®

Program If you have an active OnStar If equipped, this vehicle has a
U.S.: 1-888-811-1926 subscription, press the Q button comprehensive, in-vehicle system
and the current GPS location will that can connect to a live Advisor
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438 be sent to an OnStar advisor who for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Canada: 1-800-268-6800 will assess your problem, contact Connection, and Diagnostic
Roadside Assistance, and relay Services. See OnStar Overview on
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, your exact location to get the help page 14‑1 for more information.
you are automatically enrolled in you need.
the Roadside Assistance program.
This program provides security and Online Owner Center
convenience in the event of an The Online Owner Center is a
on-road failure or emergency complimentary service that includes
situation. Service is provided online service reminders, vehicle
24 hours a day, 365 days a year for maintenance tips, online owner
the 5 year/160 000 km (100,000 mi) manual, special privileges,
coverage period. and more.
See Roadside Assistance Program Sign up today at:
on page 13‑6 for more information. www.chevyownercenter.com
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-30 In Brief
2 NOTES
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Vehicle Security

Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keys and Locks
Windows Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . .
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
2-15 Keys
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-15
Keys and Locks Exterior Mirrors
{ WARNING
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is dangerous for many
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 reasons; children or others could
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Interior Mirrors be badly injured or even killed.
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Automatic Dimming Rearview They could operate the power
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 windows or other controls or even
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 make the vehicle move. The
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-12 Windows windows will function with the
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 RKE transmitter in the vehicle
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 and they could be seriously
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 injured or killed if caught in the
Doors
Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 path of a closing window. Do not
leave the RKE transmitter in a
vehicle with children.
The key that is part of the RKE

transmitter can be used for all locks.
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
If locked out of the vehicle, call the

. Check the transmitter's battery.
Roadside Assistance Center. See See “Battery Replacement” later
Roadside Assistance Program on in this section.
page 13‑6. With an active OnStar . If the transmitter is still not
subscription, an OnStar Advisor working correctly, see your
may remotely unlock the vehicle. dealer or a qualified technician
See OnStar Overview on page 14‑1. for service.
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on The RKE transmitter functions will
page 13‑16 for information work up to 60 m (195 ft) away from
Press the key release button on the regarding Part 15 of the Federal
RKE transmitter to extend the key. the vehicle.
Communications Commission (FCC)
Press the key release button and rules and Industry Canada Keep in mind that other conditions,
fold the key blade to retract the key. Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. such as those previously stated, can
The key has a bar-coded key tag impact the performance of the
If there is a decrease in the RKE transmitter.
that the dealer or qualified locksmith operating range:
can use to make new keys. Store
this information in a safe place, not . Check the distance. The
in the vehicle. transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
See your dealer if a replacement
key or an additional key is needed. . Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
Notice: If the keys get locked in blocking the signal.
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.
Windows on page 2‑18. This feature sounds and the turn signals flash for
can be disabled by a service 30 seconds. Press again to cancel
technician. the panic alarm.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. B (Remote Start): Press Q and
The hazard warning lamps will flash then press and hold B within
once and the anti-theft alarm system five seconds to start the vehicle's
will be armed. See Anti-theft Alarm heating or air conditioning systems
System on page 2‑14. and rear window defogger from
If the driver door is open when Q is outside the vehicle using the RKE
pressed, all doors lock and then transmitter. See Remote Start on
the driver door will unlock if the page 2‑7 for more information.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out The auto heated seats, if equipped,
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock feature is enabled through the can be programmed to come on
the driver door. Press a second time vehicle personalization. See when the vehicle is remotely
within five seconds to unlock all “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out” started. See Vehicle Personalization
doors. under Vehicle Personalization on on page 5‑53 for more information.
page 5‑53 for more information. Also see “Auto Heated Seats” under
The hazard warning lamps will This may vary based on vehicle Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7.
flash twice each time the button is personalization.
pressed and the anti-theft alarm A (Charge Port Door): Press to
system will be disarmed. See 7 (Panic Alarm): Press and open the charge port door. See
Anti-theft Alarm System on release one time to locate the Plug-In Charging on page 9‑44 for
page 2‑14. vehicle. The exterior lamps flash more information.
and the horn chirps three times.
On some models, pressing and Press and hold for three seconds to
holding K will open all of the sound the panic alarm. The horn
vehicle's windows. See Power
Keyless Access Operation

. Two lock/unlock button presses Keyless Hatch Opening
were used to unlock all doors.
With the keyless access system, Press the button on the underside of
. Any vehicle door has opened
you can lock and unlock the doors the hatch and lift up to open if the
and access the hatch without and all doors are now closed. RKE transmitter is within range and
removing the RKE transmitter from The vehicle can be customized to the doors are locked. If the doors
your pocket, purse, briefcase, etc. always unlock all doors on the first are unlocked, the transmitter is not
The RKE transmitter should be lock/unlock button press. required to open the hatch.
within 1 m (3 ft) of the door or hatch
being opened. Keyless Unlocking/Locking from Programming Transmitters to
Passenger Doors the Vehicle
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from
When the doors are locked and the Only RKE transmitters programmed
the Driver Door
RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of to this vehicle will work. If a
When the doors are locked and the the door handle, pressing the lock/ transmitter is lost or stolen, a
RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of unlock button on that door handle replacement can be purchased and
the driver door handle, pressing the will unlock all doors. Pressing the programmed through your dealer.
lock/unlock button on the driver door lock/unlock button will cause all When the replacement transmitter
handle will unlock the driver door. doors to lock if any of the following is programmed to this vehicle, all
If the lock/unlock button is pressed occur: remaining transmitters must also be
again within five seconds, all reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
. After the lock/unlock button was
passenger doors will unlock. transmitters will no longer work
used to unlock all doors.
Pressing the lock/unlock button will once the new transmitter is
cause all doors to lock if any of the . After any vehicle door has programmed. Each vehicle can
following occur: opened and all doors are now have up to five transmitters matched
closed. to it.
. It has been more than
five seconds since the first lock/
unlock button press.
Programming with a Recognized 5. Remove the transmitter from the

Transmitter transmitter slot and press K on
A new transmitter can be the transmitter.
programmed to the vehicle when To program additional
there is one recognized transmitter. transmitters, repeat Steps 3
For vehicles sold in Canada, two through 5.
recognized transmitters are required
to program a new transmitter. To When all additional transmitters
program, the vehicle must be off are programmed, press and
and all of the transmitters, both hold the POWER O button
currently recognized and new, must for 10 seconds to exit
be in the vehicle. programming mode.
1. Place the recognized 3. Remove the rubber mat in the Programming without a
transmitter(s) in the cupholder. instrument panel storage. Recognized Transmitter
Extend the key blade on the new
2. Insert the vehicle key of the new transmitter and insert the key Non-Canadian (U.S.) owners
transmitter into the key lock blade into the transmitter slot. are permitted to program a new
cylinder on the outside of the transmitter to their vehicle when a
driver door and turn the key to 4. Press and hold the POWER O recognized transmitter is not
the unlock position five times button on the center stack available. The Canadian regulations
within 10 seconds. for two seconds. When the require that Canadian owners see
The Driver Information Center transmitter is programmed, the their dealer for programming new
(DIC) displays READY FOR DIC will show that it is ready to transmitters when two recognized
REMOTE #2, 3, 4 OR 5. program the next transmitter. transmitters are not available.
If there are no currently recognized 3. Repeat Step 2 two more times. 5. Press and hold the POWER O
transmitters available, follow this After the third time, all previously button for two seconds. When
procedure to program up to five known transmitters will no longer the transmitter is programmed,
transmitters. This procedure will work with the vehicle. Remaining the DIC will show that it is ready
take approximately 30 minutes to transmitters can be programmed to program the next transmitter.
complete. The vehicle must be off during the next steps.
and all of the transmitters must be in 6. Remove the transmitter from the
The DIC display should now
the vehicle. transmitter slot and press K on
show READY FOR
1. Insert the vehicle key of the REMOTE #1. the transmitter.
transmitter into the key lock To program additional
cylinder on the outside of the transmitters, repeat Steps 4
driver door and turn the key to through 6.
the unlock position five times
When all additional transmitters
within 10 seconds.
are programmed, press and
The Driver Information Center hold the POWER O button
(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN for 10 seconds to exit
PENDING, PLEASE WAIT. programming mode.
2. Wait for 10 minutes until the
DIC displays PRESS START
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
BUTTON TO LEARN and then Transmitter Battery
press the POWER O button on If the transmitter battery is weak,
the center stack. the DIC may display NO REMOTE
4. Remove the rubber mat in DETECTED when you try to start
The DIC display will again show the instrument panel storage. the vehicle. The REPLACE
REMOTE LEARN PENDING, Extend the key blade on the new BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
PLEASE WAIT. transmitter and insert the key message may also be displayed at
blade into the transmitter slot. this time.
To start the vehicle: Replace the transmitter battery as Remote Start

1. Open the instrument panel soon as possible.
This feature starts the heating or
storage and remove the Battery Replacement air conditioning systems and rear
rubber mat. window defogger from outside the
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the vehicle. Use remote start to heat or
circuitry on the transmitter. Static cool the interior when the vehicle is
from your body could damage the plugged in to maximize the electric
transmitter. range by utilizing electricity from the
electrical outlet. Normal operation of
To replace the battery: the system will return after the
1. Extend the key blade and open vehicle has been turned on.
the battery cover on the back of B (Remote Start): This button is
the unit. on the RKE transmitter.
2. Remove the used battery. Avoid During remote start:
touching the circuit board to
other components.
. The climate control system will
typically default to the last
2. Extend the key blade and place 3. Insert the new battery, positive climate settings. If Fan Off or
the blade into the slot. side facing down toward Fan Only were selected, the air
the base. conditioning or heat will turn
3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or
4. Reassemble the battery cover. on as needed. See Automatic
N (Neutral), press the brake
Climate Control System on
pedal and the POWER O button 5. Check the operation of the page 8‑1 for more information.
on the center stack. See Power transmitter with the vehicle.
Button on page 9‑16 for
additional information.

. If the vehicle has heated seats, . The engine may start to provide With the remote start feature, the
and this feature has been energy for heating and cooling, RKE transmitter functions will have
enabled through vehicle independent of the vehicle an increased range of operation.
personalization, the heated being plugged in or completely However, the range may be less
seats will turn on during colder charged. Engine assisted while the vehicle is running.
outside temperatures. See heating operation, if available,
“Remote Start Heated Seats” can be personalized. See Other conditions can affect the
under Heated Front Seats on “Engine Assisted Heating” under performance of the transmitter.
page 3‑7 and “Remote Start Vehicle Personalization on See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Auto Heated Seats” under page 5‑53. System on page 2‑2 for additional
Vehicle Personalization on information.
. Vehicle range may decrease if
page 5‑53 for additional the vehicle is not plugged into Activating the Remote Start
information. an electrical outlet. If the vehicle
.
To heat or cool the passenger
The rear defogger will turn on is plugged in, much of the compartment using remote start:
during colder outside energy needed to support this
temperatures. feature will be provided from the 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
utility, not from the high voltage vehicle.
. Selecting 1 during colder battery.
outside temperatures before 2. Press Q on the RKE transmitter;
shutting the vehicle off will help Laws in some communities may the doors will lock.
windshield clearing. restrict the use of features that
3. Within five seconds, press and
remotely start the engine. For
. Shutting the vehicle off in ECO example, some laws may require hold B until the turn signal
Mode without 1 selected will a person using the remote start lamps flash, or for approximately
minimize the impact to electric feature to have the vehicle in four seconds. Pressing B again
range. Shutting the vehicle off view when doing so. Check local during a remote start will turn the
in other modes will maximize regulations for any requirements on feature off.
heating or air conditioning. remote starting of vehicles.
Remote start will automatically shut Extending the Time Conditions in Which Remote
off after 10 minutes unless a time Start May Not Work
To extend the time of the first
extension is done.
remote start, repeat the steps for Conditions in which a remote start
While the remote start is active, the activating remote start. Remote start may not occur include:
parking lamps will turn on and can only be extended one time
remain on.
. An open hood.
between driving.
After entering the vehicle during a
. Vehicle propulsion system
Canceling Remote Start fault conditions, including an
remote start, press the POWER O emission control system
To cancel a remote start, do any of
button on the center stack with the malfunction.
the following:
brake pedal applied to operate as
normal. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the . High voltage battery fault
vehicle and press and hold B conditions.
The remote start can be initiated
two separate times between until the parking lamps turn off. A second remote start or extension
driving. For each remote start, the . Turn on the hazard warning will not occur if the fuel level is low.
passenger compartment will be flashers. During a remote start, conditions in
heated or cooled for 10 minutes. which a remote start may be
. Press the POWER O button on canceled include:
the center stack, with the brake
pedal applied, then press the
. Vehicle propulsion system or
high voltage battery fault
POWER O button again to turn
conditions.
the vehicle off.
. Low engine oil pressure.
. Engine coolant temperature that
is too high.
Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

{ WARNING . Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
Unlocked doors can be unable to get out. A child can
dangerous. be overcome by extreme heat
. Passengers, especially and can suffer permanent
children, can easily open the injuries or even death from
doors and fall out of a moving heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle. The chance of being vehicle whenever leaving it.
thrown out of the vehicle in a . Outsiders can easily enter
crash is increased if the To unlock the door from the driver
through an unlocked door
doors are not locked. So, all door, press the lock/unlock button
when slowing or stopping the
passengers should wear on the door handle. Press again
vehicle. Lock the doors to
safety belts properly and within five seconds to unlock all
help prevent this from
the doors should be locked passenger doors.
happening.
whenever the vehicle is
driven. To lock the doors, press the lock/
Keyless Access: The RKE unlock button if:
(Continued)
transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft) . More than five seconds have
of the door being opened. passed.
. The lock/unlock button was used
to unlock all doors.
. All doors are closed.
To unlock all doors from the Inside the vehicle: Pull up or push Delayed Locking
passenger door, press the lock/ down on the door lock knob. Pull
unlock button on the door handle. once on the door handle to unlock This vehicle may have a delayed
the door and a second time to open locking feature. If delayed locking is
To lock the doors, press the lock/ enabled, a chime will sound to
unlock button if: the door. Push the power door lock
switch. See Power Door Locks on indicate a door or hatch is open
. The lock/unlock button was used page 2‑11. when the doors are locked with the
to unlock all doors. power door lock switch. The doors
Power Door Locks will automatically lock and the
. All doors are closed. theft-deterrent system will arm
The Keyless Access can be after all doors are closed and
programmed to unlock all doors on five seconds have passed. Press
the first lock/unlock press from the the lock button again to make the
driver door. See Vehicle doors lock immediately. Press the
Personalization on page 5‑53. unlock switch to cancel the delayed
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE): lock operation. To enable this
The RKE transmitter must be within feature, see “Power Door Locks”
60 m (195 ft) of the vehicle. in Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑53. To arm and disarm the
K: Press to unlock. theft-deterrent system, see Anti-theft
Q: Press to lock. Alarm System on page 2‑14.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑2. The power door lock switches are
Key: To unlock or lock the door, on the center stack.
turn the key left or right. K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
Automatic Door Locks Lockout Protection Safety Locks

Automatic Door Lock If the power door lock switch is
pressed when the driver door is
The doors are programmed to open and the vehicle is on, all the
automatically lock when the shift doors will lock and then the driver
lever is moved out of P (Park). door will unlock.
The automatic door lock feature This feature can also be enabled to
cannot be disabled. function when the vehicle is off. To
Automatic Door Unlock enable this feature, see “Unlocked
Door Anti Lock Out” in Vehicle
The doors can be programmed to Personalization on page 5‑53.
automatically unlock when the shift
lever is moved into P (Park). See
“Power Door Locks” in Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑53. The rear door safety locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear
doors from inside the vehicle.
Press o { to activate the rear door
safety locks. The LED light (A)
comes on when activated.
Press o { again to deactivate the
safety locks.
Doors WARNING (Continued)

Hatch . Fully open the air outlets on
the instrument panel.
{ WARNING . Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
Exhaust gases can enter the brings in only outside air and
vehicle if it is driven in Extended set the fan speed to the
Range Mode with the hatch open, highest setting. See
or with any objects that pass Automatic Climate Control
through the seal between the System on page 8‑1.
body and the hatch. Engine For more information about
exhaust contains carbon carbon monoxide, see Engine Keyless Access with Remote
monoxide (CO) which cannot be Exhaust on page 9‑26. Keyless Entry (RKE): To open the
seen or smelled. It can cause hatch with the doors locked, the
unconsciousness and even death. RKE transmitter must be within
If the vehicle must be driven in 1 m (3 ft) of the trunk. Press the
button on the underside of the hatch
Extended Range Mode with the
and lift up.
hatch open:
. Do not operate in Mountain
Mode if driving with the
hatch open.
. Close all of the windows.
(Continued)
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE): Vehicle Security Pressing Q on the RKE transmitter
The RKE transmitter must be within a second time will bypass the
60 m (195 ft) of the vehicle. Unlock This vehicle has theft-deterrent 30-second delay and immediately
the doors with the RKE transmitter, features; however, they do not make arm the system.
then press the button on the it impossible to steal.
underside of the hatch and lift up. Disarming the System
Anti-theft Alarm System To disarm the system, press K on
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm the RKE transmitter, or if the vehicle
system. has the keyless access system,
approach the vehicle with the RKE
Arming the System transmitter.
To arm the system, close all of the
windows and doors and then: Turning off the System Alarm
If there is an attempt to open the
. Press Q on the RKE transmitter. doors, hatch, or hood without first
. Or, lock the vehicle using the pressing K on the RKE transmitter,
power door lock switch in the the system alarm will be activated.
center stack if Unlocked Door The exterior lamps will flash and
Anti Lock Out is turned off. See the horn will sound for about
Use the inside pull handle to lower
“Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out” 30 seconds.
and close the hatch.
under Vehicle Personalization on
Always close the hatch before page 5‑53 for more information.
driving. Do not press the button
The alarm automatically arms after
while closing the hatch; it will
about 30 seconds.
unlatch again.
To turn off the system alarm: Immobilizer the system. Only a correct
transmitter can be used to turn
. Press K on the RKE transmitter. See Radio Frequency Statement on the vehicle on.
. Or, start the vehicle by pressing page 13‑16 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
POWER O on the center stack Communications Commission (FCC)
with the brake pedal applied rules and Industry Canada
and the RKE transmitter in the Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
vehicle.
Charge Cord Theft Alert Immobilizer Operation
To arm or disarm the charge cord This vehicle has a passive The security light in the instrument
theft alert, lock or unlock the vehicle theft-deterrent system. The system cluster comes on if there is a
with the RKE transmitter. does not have to be manually problem with arming or disarming
armed or disarmed. the theft-deterrent system.
If there is an attempt to remove the
charge cord while the vehicle is The vehicle is automatically When trying to start the vehicle, the
locked, the system alarm will be immobilized when the vehicle is security light comes on briefly when
activated. To turn off the system turned off. the vehicle is turned on.
alarm, press K on the RKE The system is automatically If the vehicle does not start and the
transmitter. disarmed when the vehicle is security light stays on, there is a
started with a valid RKE transmitter problem with the system. Attempt to
This feature may be disabled
in the vehicle. The RKE transmitter turn the vehicle off and try it again.
through the vehicle personalization.
uses electronic coding that matches Do not leave the RKE transmitter in
See “Charge Cord Theft Alert”
an immobilizer control unit in the the vehicle.
under Vehicle Personalization on
vehicle and automatically disarms
page 5‑53.
Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors

Manual Foldaway Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
The mirrors can be folded inward
toward the vehicle to prevent
{ WARNING damage when going through an
A convex mirror can make things, automatic car wash. Push the mirror
outward to return it to the original
like other vehicles, look farther
position.
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
Heated Mirrors
right. Check the inside mirror or The vehicle may have heated
glance over your shoulder before mirrors.
changing lanes. = (Rear Window Defogger):
Controls for the outside power
Press to heat the outside rearview
mirrors are on the driver door.
The passenger side mirror is convex mirrors. See “Rear Window
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is To adjust a mirror: Defogger” under Automatic Climate
curved so more can be seen from 1. Move the selector switch to Control System on page 8‑1 for
the driver seat. L (left) or R (right) to choose the more information.
driver or passenger mirror.
2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move each mirror in the
desired direction.
3. Return the selector switch to the
center position.
Interior Mirrors Windows

Automatic Dimming { WARNING
Rearview Mirror
Leaving children, helpless adults,
The vehicle has an automatic or pets in a vehicle with the
dimming inside rearview mirror. windows closed is dangerous.
Automatic dimming reduces the They can be overcome by
glare from the headlamps of the the extreme heat and suffer
vehicle behind you. The dimming permanent injuries or even death
feature and the indicator light come from heat stroke. Never leave a
on each time the vehicle is started.
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
Hold the mirror in the center to The vehicle aerodynamics are
alone in a vehicle, especially with
adjust it. designed to improve fuel economy
the windows closed in warm or
performance. This may result in a
Cleaning the Mirror hot weather.
pulsing sound when either rear
Do not spray glass cleaner directly window is down and the front
on the mirror. Use a soft towel windows are up. To reduce the
dampened with water. sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof (if equipped).
Power Windows Express‐Down/Up Windows

Windows with an express-down or
{ WARNING up feature allow the window to be
lowered or raised without holding
Leaving children in a vehicle with the switch. The driver window
the RKE transmitter is dangerous has express-down and up; the
for many reasons; children or passenger and rear windows have
others could be badly injured or only express-down.
even killed. They could operate Pull a window switch up or push
the power windows or other it down all the way, release it,
controls or even make the vehicle and the window goes up or down
move. The windows will function automatically. Stop the window by
with the RKE transmitter in The window switches on the driver pushing or pulling the switch.
the vehicle and they could be door control all windows in the
seriously injured or killed if caught vehicle. Each passenger door has Express Window Anti-Pinch
in the path of a closing window. a switch that controls only that Feature
Do not leave the RKE transmitter window.
If any object is in the path of the
in a vehicle with children. Press the front of the switch to open window when the express-up is
the window. Pull the switch up to active, the window will stop at the
When there are children in the
close it. obstruction and auto-reverse to a
rear seat, use the window lockout
The power windows work when the preset factory position. Weather
switch to prevent unintentional
vehicle is on, or when Retained conditions such as severe icing
operation of the windows.
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. may also cause the window to
See Retained Accessory Power auto-reverse. The window will
(RAP) on page 9‑19. return to normal operation once the
obstruction or condition is removed.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Programming the Power Remote Window Operation

Override Windows
In an emergency, the anti-pinch Programming the power windows
feature can be overridden in a may be necessary if the 12-volt
supervised mode. Hold the window battery has been disconnected or
switch all the way up to the second discharged.
position. The window will rise for as To program the window:
long as the switch is held. Once
the switch is released, the express 1. Close all doors with the vehicle
mode is re-activated. on, or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See
In this mode, the window can still Retained Accessory Power
close on an object in its path. Use (RAP) on page 9‑19.
care when using the override mode.
2. Pull the window switch to
completely close the window. The vehicle may have remote
Continue to hold the window operating windows that will open
switch two seconds after the all the windows from outside the
window is closed. vehicle by pressing and holding K
3. Repeat for each window. on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
This feature can be disabled by a
dealer technician.
Window Lockout Sun Visors
The rear window lockout switch is Pull the sun visor down to block
on the driver door. This feature glare. Detach the sun visor from the
prevents the rear passenger center mount to pivot to the side
windows from operating, except window, or to extend along the rod,
from the driver position. if available.
Press o { to activate the rear
window lockout switch. The LED
light (A) comes on when activated.
Press o { again to deactivate the
lockout switch.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-17

Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-37
Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-39
Head Restraints Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-21 for Children (LATCH
Front Seats When Should an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Replacing LATCH System
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Securing Child Restraints
How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Rear Seats Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 What Will You See after an (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-50
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Adding Equipment to the
Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-31
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-31
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the To raise or lower the head restraint,
top of the restraint is at the same press the button located on the side
Front Seats height as the top of the occupant's of the head restraint and pull up or
The vehicle's front seats have head. This position reduces the push the head restraint down and
adjustable head restraints in the chance of a neck injury in a crash. release the button.
outboard seating positions.
Pull and push on the head restraint To lower the head restraint, press
after the button is released to make the button, located on the top of
sure that it is locked in place. the seatback, and push the head
The front seat outboard head restraint down. Try to move the
restraints are not designed to be head restraint after the button is
removed. released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
Rear Seats If you are installing a child restraint
The vehicle's rear seats have in the rear seat, see “Securing a
adjustable head restraints in the Child Restraint Designed for the
outboard seating positions. LATCH System” under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
The height of the head restraint can (LATCH System) on page 3‑41.
be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
Front Seats Seat Height Adjuster
Seat Adjustment
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the To adjust the seat position:
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and 1. Pull the handle at the front of the
seat cushion to unlock it. Move the lever up or down to raise
confuse you, or make you push a or lower the seat.
pedal when you do not want to. 2. Move the seat forward or
Adjust the driver seat only when rearward and release the
the vehicle is not moving. handle.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
Reclining Seatbacks To recline the seatback:

{ WARNING
{ WARNING If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
You can lose control of the stop or crash. That could cause
vehicle if you try to adjust a injury to the person sitting there.
manual driver seat while the Always push and pull on the
vehicle is moving. The sudden seatbacks to be sure they are
movement could startle and locked.
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
1. Lift the lever.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. 2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright

position: WARNING (Continued)
1. Lift the lever fully without The lap belt cannot do its job
applying pressure to the either. In a crash, the belt could
seatback, and the seatback go up over your abdomen. The
returns to the upright position. belt forces would be there, not at
2. Push and pull on the seatback to your pelvic bones. This could
make sure it is locked. cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
{ WARNING vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
Sitting in a reclined position when
back in the seat and wear the Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is in motion can be
safety belt properly. the vehicle is moving.
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
(Continued)
Heated Front Seats Auto Heated Seats
{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on Navigation System Shown, Base
the seat that insulates against System Similar
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, If available, the controls are on the If available, the controls can be
cover, or similar item. This center stack. To operate, the vehicle accessed while the vehicle is on by
may cause the seat heater to must be on. pressing the CLIMATE button on the
overheat. An overheated seat center stack.
Press M or L to heat the driver
heater may cause a burn or may Press the touch screen M AUTO
or passenger seat cushion and
damage the seat.
seatback. or L AUTO button. The button color
Press the button once for the will change to green when this
highest setting. With each press feature is on.
of the button, the heated seat will When the vehicle is on, this feature
change to the next lower setting, will automatically activate the
and then the off setting. Three lights heated seats at the level required by
indicate the highest setting and one the vehicle's interior temperature.
light the lowest.
The active high, medium, low, or off and enabled, the heated seats will Rear Seats
heated seat level will be indicated be canceled when the vehicle is
by the manual heated seat button turned on. If the vehicle has auto Folding the Seatback
lights on the center stack. Use the heated seats and the feature is
touch screen buttons or the manual
heated seat buttons on the center
enabled, the seat heating level will
automatically change to the level
{ WARNING
stack to turn auto heated seats off. required by the vehicle's interior If either seatback is not locked, it
If the passenger seat is unoccupied, temperature when the vehicle is could move forward in a sudden
the auto heated seats feature will turned on. stop or crash. That could cause
not activate that seat. The indicator lights on the heated injury to the person sitting there.
The auto heated seats feature seat buttons do not turn on during a Always push and pull on the
can be programmed to always be remote start. seatbacks to be sure they are
enabled when the vehicle is on. The temperature performance of an locked.
See Vehicle Personalization on unoccupied seat may be reduced.
page 5‑53 for more information. This is normal.
Remote Start Heated Seats The heated seats will not turn on
during a remote start unless the
When it is cold outside, the heated heated seats feature is enabled in
seats can be programmed to turn the vehicle personalization menu.
on automatically during a remote See Vehicle Personalization on
vehicle start. Unless the auto page 5‑53 for more information.
heated seats feature is available
The safety belt should remain

{ WARNING in the storage clip while the
seatback is in the folded
A safety belt that is improperly position.
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the 2. Pull the seatback release lever
protection needed in a crash. The to unlock the seatback.
person wearing the belt could be A tab near the lever raises when
seriously injured. After raising the the seatback is unlocked.
rear seatback, always check to 3. Fold the seatback forward.
be sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted. A. Safety Belt Guide
B. Safety Belt Storage Clip
To fold the seatback down:
1. Remove the safety belt from the
Notice: Folding a rear seat with safety belt guide (A) and place it
the safety belts still fastened may in the storage clip (B).
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Raising the Seatback To raise the seatback: The safety belt should not
cross the seatback locking
Notice: Damage to the safety belt
mechanism (A) when raising the
or seatback locking mechanism
seatback.
can occur if the safety belt is
caught between the rear seatback 2. Raise the seatback and push it
and the seatback locking rearward to lock it into place.
mechanism. The safety belt must A tab near the seatback release
be out of the way when the rear lever retracts when the seatback
seat is raised to the upright, is locked.
locked position. If the safety belt
is damaged, see your dealer and 3. Push and pull the top of the
have it replaced. seatback to be sure it is locked
into position.
4. Return the safety belt to the
A. Seatback Locking Mechanism safety belt guide after raising the
B. Safety Belt Storage Clip seatback.
1. Make sure the safety belt is in Keep the seat in the upright, locked
the storage clip (B) before position when not in use.
raising the seatback.
Safety Belts Why Safety Belts Work

WARNING (Continued)
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside
things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
{ WARNING are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow
Do not let anyone ride where passengers to ride in any area of
a safety belt cannot be worn the vehicle that is not equipped
properly. In a crash, if you or your with seats and safety belts.
passenger(s) are not wearing Always wear a safety belt, and
safety belts, injuries can be much check that all passenger(s) are
worse than if you are wearing restrained properly too. When riding in a vehicle, you travel
safety belts. You can be seriously as fast as the vehicle does. If the
injured or killed by hitting things vehicle stops suddenly, you keep
inside the vehicle harder or by This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts. going until something stops you.
being ejected from the vehicle. It could be the windshield, the
In addition, anyone who is not See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑16 for additional information. instrument panel, or the safety belts!
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
(Continued)
When you wear a safety belt, you Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why It is very important for all occupants
and the vehicle slow down together. should I have to wear safety to buckle up. Statistics show that
There is more time to stop because belts? unbelted people are hurt more often
you stop over a longer distance and, A: Airbags are supplemental in crashes than those who are
when worn properly, your strongest systems only; so they work with wearing safety belts.
bones take the forces from the safety belts — not instead of There are important things to know
safety belts. That is why wearing them. Whether or not an airbag about wearing a safety belt properly.
safety belts makes such good is provided, all occupants still
sense. have to buckle up to get the
Questions and Answers About most protection.
Safety Belts Also, in nearly all states and in
all Canadian provinces, the law
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
requires wearing safety belts.
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt? How to Wear Safety Belts
A: You could be — whether you Properly
are wearing a safety belt or not.
Your chance of being conscious This section is only for people of
during and after a crash, so you adult size.
can unbuckle and get out, is There are special things to know
much greater if you are belted.
. Sit up straight and always keep
about safety belts and children. And your feet on the floor in front
there are different rules for smaller of you.
children and infants. If a child will
. Always use the correct buckle
be riding in the vehicle, see Older
Children on page 3‑32 or Infants for your seating position.
and Young Children on page 3‑35.
Follow those rules for everyone's
protection.

. Wear the lap part of the belt 2. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
low and snug on the hips, just WARNING (Continued) adjustable, so you can sit up
touching the thighs. In a crash, straight. To see how, see “Seats”
this applies force to the strong . Never wear the shoulder belt in the Index.
pelvic bones and you would be under both arms or behind
less likely to slide under the lap your back. 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull
belt. If you slid under it, the belt the belt across you. Do not let it
. Never route the lap or get twisted.
would apply force on your shoulder belt over an
abdomen. This could cause armrest. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
serious or even fatal injuries. you pull the belt across you very
. Wear the shoulder belt over the quickly. If this happens, let the
shoulder and across the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt belt go back slightly to unlock it.
These parts of the body are best All seating positions in the vehicle Then pull the belt across you
able to take belt restraining have a lap-shoulder belt. more slowly.
forces. The shoulder belt locks if If the shoulder portion of a
The following instructions explain
there is a sudden stop or crash. passenger belt is pulled out all
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly. the way, the child restraint
{ WARNING 1. If the seat has a safety belt
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
You can be seriously injured, guide, and the safety belt is not back all the way and start again.
or even killed, by not wearing routed through the guide, slide
your safety belt properly. the edge of the belt webbing
through the opening on the
. Never allow the lap or guide. Be sure the belt is not
shoulder belt to become twisted.
loose or twisted.
(Continued)
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. To make the lap part tight, pull To unlatch the belt, push the button
buckle until it clicks. up on the shoulder belt. on the buckle. The belt should
Pull up on the latch plate to It may be necessary to pull return to its stowed position.
make sure it is secure. If the belt stitching on the safety belt Before a door is closed, be sure the
is not long enough, see Safety through the latch plate to fully safety belt is out of the way. If a
Belt Extender on page 3‑17. tighten the lap belt on smaller door is slammed against a safety
Position the release button on occupants. belt, damage can occur to both the
the buckle so that the safety belt safety belt and the vehicle.
could be quickly unbuckled if Safety Belt Pretensioners
necessary.
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety properly adjusted, the comfort guide
belts during the early stages of a positions the belt away from the
moderate to severe frontal, near neck and head.
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold There is one guide, if equipped, for
conditions for pretensioner each outside passenger position in
activation are met. the rear seat. When using a comfort
And, if the vehicle has side impact guide, remove the safety belt from
airbags, safety belt pretensioners the seat‐mounted guide before
can help tighten the safety belts in a using the comfort guide. To install a
side crash or a rollover event. comfort guide to the safety belt:
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
they need to be replaced, and other 2. Place the guide over the belt,
new parts for the vehicle's safety and insert the two edges of the
belt system may be required. See belt into the slots of the guide.
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
after a Crash on page 3‑18.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear safety
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety 1. Remove the guide from its
belt comfort for older children who storage clip on the interior body
have outgrown booster seats and trim next to the rear seat.
for some adults. When installed and
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. The belt should not be twisted 4. Buckle and position the safety
and it should lie flat. The elastic belt as described previously in
cord must be under the belt and this section. Make sure that
the guide on top. the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide back into its storage clip
located on the interior body trim
next to the side of the seatback.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts,
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors,
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety and anchorages are all working
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them properly. Look for any other loose or
wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑16 for more
long enough for you. To help avoid information.
personal injury, do not let someone
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
else use it, and use it only for the
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑18.
seat it is made to fit. The extender
A pregnant woman should wear a has been designed for adults. Never
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To
portion should be worn as low as wear it, attach it to the regular safety
possible, below the rounding, belt. For more information, see the
throughout the pregnancy. instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that
Crash were used during any crash may
{ WARNING have been stressed or damaged.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety replaced.
a crash, they might not be able belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
to provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑17.
possible.
Airbag System All of the airbags in the vehicle will

have the word AIRBAG embossed
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached label
airbags: near the deployment opening. { WARNING
. A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG is on the center of the You can be severely injured or
. A frontal airbag for the front killed in a crash if you are not
outboard passenger. steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the front wearing your safety belt, even
. A knee airbag for the driver. outboard passenger. with airbags. Airbags are
. A knee airbag for the front designed to work with safety
For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG
outboard passenger. belts, not replace them. Also,
is on the lower part of the
airbags are not designed to inflate
. A seat-mounted side impact instrument panel.
in every crash. In some crashes
airbag for the driver. For seat-mounted side impact safety belts are the only restraint.
. A seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG is on See When Should an Airbag
airbag for the front outboard the side of the seatback closest to Inflate? on page 3‑22.
passenger. the door.
Wearing your safety belt during a
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver For roof-rail airbags, the word crash helps reduce the chance of
and the passenger seated AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
hitting things inside the vehicle or
directly behind the driver. Airbags are designed to supplement being ejected from it. Airbags are
. A roof-rail airbag for the front the protection provided by safety “supplemental restraints” to the
outboard passenger and the belts. Even though today's airbags safety belts. Everyone in the
passenger seated directly are also designed to help reduce vehicle should wear a safety belt
behind the front outboard the risk of injury from the force of an properly, whether or not there is
passenger. inflating bag, all airbags must inflate an airbag for that person.
very quickly to do their job.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Because airbags inflate with great Children who are up against,
force and faster than the blink or very close to, any airbag
of an eye, anyone who is up when it inflates can be seriously
against, or very close to any injured or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
airbag when it inflates can be lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument cluster, which
seriously injured or killed. Do not for adults and older children, but
shows the airbag symbol. The
sit unnecessarily close to any not for young children and infants. system checks the airbag electrical
airbag, as you would be if sitting Neither the vehicle's safety belt system for malfunctions. The light
on the edge of the seat or leaning system nor its airbag system tells you if there is an electrical
forward. Safety belts help keep is designed for them. Young problem. See Airbag Readiness
you in position before and during children and infants need the Light on page 5‑17 for more
a crash. Always wear a safety protection that a child restraint information.
belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
the vehicle. Children on page 3‑32 or Infants
Occupants should not lean on or and Young Children on
sleep against the door or side page 3‑35.
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver knee airbag is below the Driver Side Shown, Passenger
steering column. The front outboard Side Similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the passenger knee airbag is below the The driver and front outboard
center of the steering wheel. glove box. passenger seat-mounted side
impact airbags are in the side of the
The front outboard passenger
seatbacks closest to the door.
frontal airbag is in the passenger
side instrument panel.
When Should an Airbag

{ WARNING Inflate?
If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to
occupant and an airbag, the inflate in moderate to severe frontal
airbag might not inflate properly or near frontal crashes to help
or it might force the object into reduce the potential for severe
that person causing severe injury injuries, mainly to the driver's or
or even death. The path of an front outboard passenger's head
inflating airbag must be kept and chest. However, they are only
clear. Do not put anything designed to inflate if the impact
between an occupant and an exceeds a predetermined
Driver Side Shown, Passenger airbag, and do not attach or put deployment threshold. Deployment
Side Similar anything on the steering wheel thresholds are used to predict how
hub or on or near any other severe a crash is likely to be in time
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbag covering. for the airbags to inflate and help
front outboard passenger, and restrain the occupants.
second row outboard passengers Do not use seat accessories that
are in the ceiling above the side block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will or
windows. seat-mounted side impact airbag. should inflate is not based primarily
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
Never secure anything to the roof It depends on what you hit, the
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags direction of the impact, and how
by routing a rope or tie‐down quickly the vehicle slows down.
through any door or window
Frontal airbags may inflate at
opening. If you do, the path of an different crash speeds depending on
inflating roof-rail airbag will be whether the vehicle hits an object
blocked. straight on or at an angle, and
whether the object is fixed or frontal or near frontal impacts of the vehicle is struck or the
moving, rigid or deformable, narrow that exceed a predetermined sensing system predicts that the
or wide. deployment threshold. vehicle is about to roll over on its
Thresholds can also vary with The vehicle has seat-mounted side side, or in a severe frontal impact.
specific vehicle design. impact airbags and roof-rail airbags. In any particular crash, no one can
Frontal airbags are not intended to See Airbag System on page 3‑19. say whether an airbag should have
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear Seat-mounted side impact and inflated simply because of the
impacts, or in many side impacts. roof-rail airbags are intended to vehicle damage or repair costs.
inflate in moderate to severe side
In addition the vehicle has crashes. In addition, these roof‐rail What Makes an Airbag
dual‐stage frontal airbags. airbags are intended to inflate
Dual‐stage airbags adjust the during a rollover or in a severe
Inflate?
restraint according to crash severity. frontal impact. Seat-mounted side In a deployment event, the sensing
The vehicle has electronic frontal impact and roof-rail airbags will system sends an electrical signal
sensors, which help the sensing inflate if the crash severity is above triggering a release of gas from the
system distinguish between a the system's designed threshold inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
moderate frontal impact and a more level. The threshold level can vary airbag causing the bag to break out
severe frontal impact. For moderate with specific vehicle design. of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags and related hardware are all part of
Roof-rail airbags are not intended
inflate at a level less than full the airbag module.
to inflate in rear impacts. A
deployment. For more severe frontal seat‐mounted side impact airbag is For airbag location, see Where Are
impacts, full deployment occurs. intended to inflate on the side of the the Airbags? on page 3‑21.
Frontal knee airbags are vehicle that is struck. Both roof‐rail
single‐stage airbags and designed airbags will inflate when either side
to inflate in moderate to severe
How Does an Airbag But airbags would not help in The parts of the airbag that come
many types of collisions, primarily into contact with you may be warm,
Restrain? because the occupant's motion is but not too hot to touch. There may
In moderate to severe frontal or not toward those airbags. See When be some smoke and dust coming
near frontal collisions, even belted Should an Airbag Inflate? on from the vents in the deflated
occupants can contact the steering page 3‑22 for more information. airbags. Airbag inflation does not
wheel or the instrument panel. In Airbags should never be regarded prevent the driver from seeing out of
moderate to severe side collisions, as anything more than a supplement the windshield or being able to steer
even belted occupants can contact to safety belts. the vehicle, nor does it prevent
the inside of the vehicle. people from leaving the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection What Will You See after
provided by safety belts by an Airbag Inflates? { WARNING
distributing the force of the
impact more evenly over the After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates, there
occupant's body. seat-mounted side impact airbags may be dust in the air. This dust
inflate, they quickly deflate, so could cause breathing problems
Rollover capable roof‐rail airbags for people with a history of
quickly that some people may not
are designed to help contain the asthma or other breathing trouble.
even realize an airbag inflated.
head and chest of occupants in the To avoid this, everyone in the
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
outboard seating positions in the
partially inflated for some time after vehicle should get out as soon as
first and second rows. The rollover
they inflate. Some components of it is safe to do so. If you have
capable roof‐rail airbags are
the airbag module may be hot for breathing problems but cannot
designed to help reduce the risk of
several minutes. For location of the get out of the vehicle after an
full or partial ejection in rollover
airbags, see Where Are the airbag inflates, then get fresh air
events, although no system can
Airbags? on page 3‑21. by opening a window or a door.
prevent all such ejections.
If you experience breathing
(Continued)
If you do not get them, the

WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
problems following an airbag moderate crash, there may be crash. A new system will include
deployment, you should seek concealed damage that could airbag modules and possibly
medical attention. make it difficult to safely operate other parts. The service manual
the vehicle. for the vehicle covers the need
The vehicle has a feature that may Use caution if attempting to to replace other parts.
automatically unlock the doors, turn restart the vehicle after a crash . The vehicle has a crash sensing
on the interior lamps and hazard has occurred. and diagnostic module which
warning flashers, and shut off the records information after a
fuel system after the airbags inflate. crash. See Vehicle Data
You can lock the doors, and turn In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are Recording and Privacy on
off the interior lamps and hazard page 13‑15 and Event Data
warning flashers by using the broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may Recorders on page 13‑15.
controls for those features.
also occur from the front outboard . Let only qualified technicians
passenger airbag. work on the airbag systems.
{ WARNING . Airbags are designed to inflate Improper service can mean that
A crash severe enough to inflate only once. After an airbag an airbag system will not work
inflates, you will need some new properly. See your dealer for
the airbags may have also
parts for the airbag system. service.
damaged important functions in
the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
(Continued)
Passenger Sensing word ON or OFF, or the symbol for We recommend that children be
on and off will be visible. See secured in a rear seat, including:
System Passenger Airbag Status Indicator an infant or a child riding in a
The vehicle has a passenger on page 5‑18. rear-facing child restraint; a child
sensing system for the front The passenger sensing system riding in a forward-facing child seat;
outboard passenger position. The turns off the front outboard an older child riding in a booster
passenger airbag status indicator passenger frontal airbag and knee seat; and children, who are large
will light on the overhead console airbag, under certain conditions. enough, using safety belts.
when the vehicle is started. No other airbag is affected by the Never put a rear-facing child seat in
passenger sensing system. the front. This is because the risk
The passenger sensing system to the rear-facing child is so great,
works with sensors that are part of if the airbag inflates.
the front outboard passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect { WARNING
the presence of a properly seated
United States occupant and determine if the front A child in a rear-facing child
outboard passenger frontal airbag restraint can be seriously injured
and knee airbag should be allowed or killed if the passenger frontal
to inflate or not. airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child
According to accident statistics,
restraint would be very close to
children are safer when properly
the inflating airbag. A child in a
secured in a rear seat in a correct
child restraint for their weight forward-facing child restraint can
Canada be seriously injured or killed if the
and size.
The words ON and OFF or the (Continued)
symbol for on and off will be visible
during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the
The passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system

WARNING (Continued) is designed to turn off the front is designed to turn on the front
outboard passenger airbag and outboard passenger frontal airbag
passenger frontal airbag inflates knee airbag if: and knee airbag anytime the system
and the passenger seat is in a senses that a person of adult size is
. The front outboard passenger
forward position. sitting properly in the front outboard
seat is unoccupied.
Even if the passenger sensing passenger seat.
system has turned off the front
. The system determines that
an infant is present in a child When the passenger sensing
outboard passenger airbag(s), no system has allowed the airbags to
restraint.
system is fail-safe. No one can be enabled, the on indicator will light
guarantee that an airbag will not . A front outboard passenger and stay lit as a reminder that the
inflate under some unusual takes his/her weight off of the airbags are active.
circumstance, even though the seat for a period of time.
For some children, including
airbag(s) are off. . Or, if there is a critical problem children in child restraints, and for
Secure rear-facing child restraints with the airbag system or the very small adults, the passenger
in a rear seat, even if the passenger sensing system. sensing system may or may not turn
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a When the passenger sensing off the front outboard passenger
forward-facing child restraint in system has turned off the front frontal airbag and knee airbag,
the front outboard passenger outboard passenger frontal airbag depending upon the person’s
seat, always move the seat as far and knee airbag, the off indicator seating posture and body build.
back as it will go. It is better to will light and stay lit to remind you
secure the child restraint in a that the airbags are off. See
rear seat. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑18.
Everyone in the vehicle who If the On Indicator Is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child
has outgrown child restraints Child Restraint restraint and restarting the
should wear a safety belt vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
properly — whether or not there is If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
an airbag for that person. and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback
1. Turn the vehicle off. and adjust the seat cushion,
{ WARNING 2. Remove the child restraint from
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
the vehicle.
If the airbag readiness light ever pushing the child restraint into
comes on and stays on, it means 3. Remove any additional items the seat cushion.
that something may be wrong from the seat such as blankets,
Also make sure the child
with the airbag system. To help cushions, seat covers, seat
restraint is not trapped under
avoid injury to yourself or others, heaters, or seat massagers.
the vehicle head restraint. If this
have the vehicle serviced right 4. Reinstall the child restraint happens, adjust the head
away. See Airbag Readiness following the directions restraint. See Head Restraints
Light on page 5‑17 for more provided by the child restraint on page 3‑2.
information, including important manufacturer and refer to
6. Restart the vehicle.
safety information. Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat) on page 3‑48 or Securing The passenger sensing system
Child Restraints (Front may or may not turn off the
Passenger Seat) on page 3‑50. airbags for a child in a child
restraint depending upon the
child's seating posture and body
build. It is better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an Use the following steps to allow the Additional Factors Affecting
Adult-Size Occupant system to detect that person and System Operation
enable the front outboard passenger
frontal airbag and knee airbag: Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
1. Turn the vehicle off. during vehicle maneuvers and
2. Remove any additional material braking, which helps the passenger
from the seat, such as blankets, sensing system maintain the
cushions, seat covers, seat passenger airbag status. See
heaters, or seat massagers. “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional
3. Place the seatback in the fully information about the importance of
upright position. proper restraint use.
4. Have the person sit upright in A thick layer of additional material,
the seat, centered on the seat such as a blanket or cushion,
cushion, with legs comfortably or aftermarket equipment such
If a person of adult size is sitting extended. as seat covers, seat heaters, and
in the front outboard passenger 5. Restart the vehicle and have the seat massagers can affect how well
seat, but the off indicator is lit, it person remain in this position for the passenger sensing system
could be because that person two to three minutes after the on operates. We recommend that
is not sitting properly in the seat. indicator is lit. you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑31 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
A wet seat can affect the occupy the seat. See Airbag dealer and the service manual have
performance of the passenger Readiness Light on page 5‑17 for information about servicing the
sensing system. Here is how: important safety information. vehicle and the airbag system. To
. The passenger sensing system The on indicator may be lit if an purchase a service manual, see
may turn off the passenger object, such as a briefcase, Service Publications Ordering
frontal airbag and passenger handbag, grocery bag, laptop, Information on page 13‑12.
knee airbag when liquid is or other electronic device, is put on
soaked into the seat. If this an unoccupied seat. If this is not { WARNING
happens, the off indicator will be desired, remove the object from
lit, and the airbag readiness light the seat. For up to 10 seconds after the
on the instrument panel will also vehicle is turned off and the
12‐volt battery is disconnected,
be lit. { WARNING an airbag can still inflate during
. Liquid pooled on the seat that improper service. You can be
has not soaked in may make it Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the injured if you are close to an
more likely that the passenger
passenger seat cushion and airbag when it inflates. Avoid
sensing system will turn on the
passenger frontal airbag and seatback may interfere with the yellow connectors. They are
passenger knee airbag while a proper operation of the passenger probably part of the airbag
child restraint or child occupant sensing system. system. Be sure to follow proper
is on the seat. If the passenger service procedures, and make
frontal airbag and passenger sure the person performing work
knee airbag are turned on, the Servicing the for you is qualified to do so.
on indicator will be lit. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry Airbags affect how the vehicle
the seat immediately. If the airbag should be serviced. There are parts
readiness light is lit, do not install a of the airbag system in several
child restraint or allow anyone to places around the vehicle. Your
Adding Equipment to the outboard passenger seat. The vehicle's airbag system, or if you
passenger sensing system may have questions about whether the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle not operate properly if the original airbag system will be affected if the
Adding accessories that change the seat trim is replaced with non-GM vehicle is modified for any other
vehicle's frame, bumper system, covers, upholstery, or trim; or with reason, call Customer Assistance.
height, front end, or side sheet GM covers, upholstery, or trim See Customer Assistance Offices
metal may keep the airbag system designed for a different vehicle. on page 13‑3.
from working properly. Any object, such as an aftermarket
The operation of the airbag system
seat heater or a comfort-enhancing Airbag System Check
pad or device, installed under or on
can also be affected by changing or The airbag system does not need
top of the seat fabric, could also
moving any parts of the front seats, regularly scheduled maintenance or
interfere with the operation of the
safety belts, airbag sensing and replacement. Make sure the airbag
passenger sensing system. This
diagnostic module, steering wheel, readiness light is working. See
could either prevent proper
instrument panel, roof-rail airbag Airbag Readiness Light on
deployment of the passenger
modules, ceiling or pillar garnish page 5‑17 for more information.
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
trim, overhead console, front
sensing system from properly Notice: If an airbag covering is
sensors, side impact sensors,
turning off the passenger airbag(s). damaged, opened, or broken, the
rollover sensor module, or airbag
See Passenger Sensing System on airbag may not work properly.
wiring.
page 3‑26. Do not open or break the airbag
Your dealer and the service manual coverings. If there are any
If the vehicle has rollover roof‐rail
have information about the location opened or broken airbag covers,
airbags, see Different Size Tires
of the airbag sensors, sensing and have the airbag covering and/or
and Wheels on page 10‑55 for
diagnostic module, and airbag airbag module replaced. For the
additional important information.
wiring. location of the airbags, see
If your vehicle needs to be modified Where Are the Airbags? on
In addition, the vehicle has a
because you have a disability and page 3‑21. See your dealer for
passenger sensing system that
you have questions about whether service.
includes sensors as part of the front
the modifications will affect the
Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates or the vehicle Child Restraints

has been in a crash, the sensing
Parts after a Crash system may shut down the
high voltage system. When this Older Children
{ WARNING occurs, the high voltage battery is
disconnected and the vehicle will
A crash can damage the not start. The SERVICE VEHICLE
airbag systems in the vehicle. SOON message in the Driver
A damaged airbag system Information Center (DIC) will be
may not work properly and displayed. Before the vehicle can be
may not protect you and your operated again, it must be serviced
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting at your dealer.
in serious injury or even death. If an airbag inflates, you will need to
To help make sure the airbag replace airbag system parts. See
systems are working properly your dealer for service.
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary If the airbag readiness light stays on
replacements made as soon as after the vehicle is started or comes
Older children who have outgrown
on when you are driving, the airbag
possible. booster seats should wear the
system may not work properly. Have
vehicle safety belts.
the vehicle serviced right away.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
The manufacturer's instructions that

. Does the lap belt fit low and This applies belt force to the
come with the booster seat state the snug on the hips, touching the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
weight and height limitations for that thighs? If yes, continue. If no, It should never be worn over the
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat. abdomen, which could cause
lap-shoulder belt until the child . Can proper safety belt fit be severe or even fatal internal
passes the fit test below: maintained for the length of the injuries in a crash.
. Sit all the way back on the seat. trip? If yes, continue. If no, Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Do the knees bend at the seat return to the booster seat. Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
edge? If yes, continue. If no, Q: What is the proper way to page 3‑13.
return to the booster seat. wear safety belts? According to accident statistics,
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. A: An older child should wear a children and infants are safer when
Does the shoulder belt rest on lap-shoulder belt and get the properly restrained in a child
the shoulder? If yes, continue. additional restraint a shoulder restraint system or infant restraint
If no, try using the rear safety belt can provide. The shoulder system secured in a rear seating
belt comfort guide. See “Rear belt should not cross the face position.
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” or neck. The lap belt should fit
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on snugly below the hips, just
page 3‑13 for more information. touching the top of the thighs.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not

buckled up can strike other people WARNING (Continued)
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older might also slide under the lap
children need to use safety belts belt. The belt force would then be
properly. applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
{ WARNING go over the shoulder and across
Never do this. the chest.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt cannot properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
{ WARNING
children can be crushed together Never do this.
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one Never allow a child to wear the
person at a time. safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag arms. An infant should be
and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every secured in an appropriate
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride restraint.
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to
the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child
tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the For example, in a crash at only
safety belts. 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
(Continued)
sure it is designed to be used

{ WARNING in a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
Never do this. that it meets federal motor
Children who are up against, vehicle safety standards.
or very close to, any airbag when The restraint manufacturer's
it inflates can be seriously injured instructions that come with the
or killed. Never put a rear-facing restraint state the weight and
child restraint in the right front height limitations for a particular
seat. Secure a rear-facing child child restraint. In addition, there
restraint in a rear seat. It is also are many kinds of restraints
better to secure a forward-facing available for children with
child restraint in a rear seat. If you Q: What are the different types of special needs.
must secure a forward-facing add-on child restraints?
child restraint in the right front A: Add-on child restraints, which { WARNING
seat, always move the front are purchased by the vehicle
passenger seat as far back as it owner, are available in four basic To reduce the risk of neck and
will go. types. Selection of a particular head injury during a crash, infants
restraint should take into need complete support. This is
consideration not only the child's because an infant's neck is not
weight, height, and age but also fully developed and its head
whether or not the restraint will weighs so much compared with
be compatible with the motor the rest of its body. In a crash,
vehicle in which it will be used. an infant in a rear-facing child
For most basic types of child restraint settles into the restraint,
restraints, there are many so the crash forces can be
different models available. When (Continued)
purchasing a child restraint, be
WARNING (Continued)
Child Restraint Systems
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
so small that the vehicle's regular A forward-facing child seat (B)
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
safety belt may not remain low provides restraint for the child's
on the hip bones, as it should. A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness.
Instead, it may settle up around provides restraint with the seating
the child's abdomen. In a crash, surface against the back of the
the belt would apply force on a infant.
body area that is unprotected by The harness system holds the infant
any bony structure. This alone in place and, in a crash, acts to
could cause serious or fatal keep the infant positioned in the
injuries. To reduce the risk of restraint.
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
Securing an Add-On Child by the LATCH system. See Lower

Restraint in the Vehicle Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑41 for
more information. Children can be
{ WARNING endangered in a crash if the child
A child can be seriously injured restraint is not properly secured in
or killed in a crash if the child the vehicle.
restraint is not properly secured in When securing an add-on child
the vehicle. Secure the child restraint, refer to the instructions
restraint properly in the vehicle that come with the restraint which
using the vehicle safety belt or may be on the restraint itself or in a
LATCH system, following the booklet, or both, and to this manual.
(C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that The child restraint instructions
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions are important, so if they are not
designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. available, obtain a replacement
vehicle's safety belt system. copy from the manufacturer.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, Keep in mind that an unsecured
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured child restraint can move around in a
in the vehicle. Child restraint collision or sudden stop and injure
systems must be secured in vehicle people in the vehicle. Be sure to
seats by lap belts or the lap belt properly secure any child restraint in
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
In some areas, Certified Child Securing the Child within the Where to Put the
Passenger Safety Technicians Child Restraint
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
Restraint
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints.
{ WARNING According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
In the U.S., refer to the A child can be seriously injured or properly restrained in a child
National Highway Traffic Safety killed in a crash if the child is not restraint system or infant restraint
Administration (NHTSA) website to properly secured in the child system secured in a rear seating
locate the nearest child safety restraint. Secure the child position.
seat inspection station. For CPST
properly following the instructions We recommend that children and
availability in Canada, check with
that came with that child restraint. child restraints be secured in a rear
Transport Canada or the Provincial
seat, including: an infant or a child
Ministry of Transportation office.
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, Child restraints and booster seats
“Never put a rear-facing child WARNING (Continued) vary considerably in size, and some
restraint in the front.” This is may fit in certain seating positions
because the risk to the rear-facing guarantee that an airbag will not better than others. Always make
child is so great, if the airbag deploy under some unusual sure the child restraint is properly
deploys. circumstance, even though the secured.
airbag(s) are turned off.
Depending on where you place the
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child restraints child restraint and the size of the
in a rear seat, even if the child restraint, you may not be able
A child in a rear-facing child airbag(s) are off. If you secure a to access adjacent safety belt
restraint can be seriously forward-facing child restraint in assemblies or LATCH anchors for
injured or killed if the right front the right front seat, always move additional passengers or child
passenger airbag inflates. the front passenger seat as far restraints. Adjacent seating
This is because the back of the back as it will go. It is better to positions should not be used if the
rear-facing child restraint would secure the child restraint in a child restraint prevents access to or
be very close to the inflating rear seat. interferes with the routing of the
airbag. A child in a forward-facing safety belt.
child restraint can be seriously See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑26 for additional Wherever a child restraint is
injured or killed if the right front installed, be sure to secure the
passenger airbag inflates and the information.
child restraint properly.
passenger seat is in a forward
position. When securing a child restraint in a Keep in mind that an unsecured
rear seating position, study the child restraint can move around in a
Even if the passenger sensing collision or sudden stop and injure
instructions that came with the
system has turned off the right people in the vehicle. Be sure to
child restraint to make sure it is
front passenger airbag(s), no compatible with this vehicle. properly secure any child restraint in
system is fail-safe. No one can the vehicle — even when no child is
(Continued) in it.
Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors
a top tether, you must also use
Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the
(LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the
The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must
restraint during driving or in a crash. never be attached using only the top
This system is designed to make tether and anchor.
installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system
The LATCH system uses anchors in in your vehicle, you need a
the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that has LATCH
child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint
with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
instructions on how to use the child built into the vehicle. There are
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
restraint and its attachments. The two lower anchors for each
child restraint is properly installed
following explains how to attach LATCH seating position that will
using the anchors, or use the
a child restraint with these accommodate a child restraint with
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
attachments in the vehicle. lower attachments (B).
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or
also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have Lower Anchor and Top Tether
a single tether (A) or a dual Anchor Locations
tether (C). Either will have a
single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use
with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
Be sure to read and follow the
A top tether (A, C) anchors the instructions for the child restraint.
top of the child restraint to the In Canada, the law requires that
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built forward-facing child restraints have
into the vehicle. The top tether a top tether, and that the tether be
attachment (B) on the child restraint Rear Seat
attached. Be sure to read and follow
connects to the top tether anchor in the instructions for your child I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
the vehicle in order to reduce the restraint. positions with top tether anchors.
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
a crash.
restraint system or infant restraint

system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3‑39 for
additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint
To assist in locating the lower Designed for the LATCH
anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
System
the crease between the seatback Top Tether Anchors
and the seat cushion. The top tether anchors for outboard { WARNING
rear seating positions are on the
back of the rear seatback. Be sure If a LATCH-type child restraint is
to use an anchor on the same not attached to anchors, the child
side of the vehicle as the seating restraint will not be able to protect
position where the child restraint will the child correctly. In a crash, the
be placed. child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
Do not secure a child restraint in a
To assist in locating the top tether restraint properly using the
position without a top tether anchor
anchors, the top tether anchor anchors, or use the vehicle safety
if a national or local law requires
symbol is near the top tether that the top tether be attached, or if belts to secure the restraint,
anchor. the instructions that come with the following the instructions that
child restraint say that the top tether came with the child restraint and
must be attached. the instructions in this manual.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
Instead use the vehicle's anchors

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) and child restraint attachments
to secure the restraints. Some
Do not attach more than one child of the retractor to set the lock, restraints also use another vehicle
restraint to a single anchor. if the vehicle has one, after the anchor to secure a top tether.
Attaching more than one child child restraint has been installed.
restraint to a single anchor could 1. Attach and tighten the lower
cause the anchor or attachment attachments to the lower
Notice: Do not let the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint
to come loose or even break attachments rub against the does not have lower
during a crash. A child or others vehicle’s safety belts. This may attachments or the desired
could be injured. To reduce the damage these parts. If necessary, seating position does not have
risk of serious or fatal injuries move buckled safety belts to lower anchors, secure the child
during a crash, attach only one avoid rubbing the LATCH restraint with the top tether and
child restraint per anchor. attachments. the safety belts. Refer to your
Do not fold the empty rear seat child restraint manufacturer
with a safety belt buckled. This instructions and the instructions
{ WARNING could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors
Children can be seriously injured safety belt to its stowed position, for the desired seating
or strangled if a shoulder belt is before folding the seat. position.
wrapped around their neck and Make sure to attach the child 1.2. Put the child restraint on
the safety belt continues to restraint at the proper anchor the seat.
tighten. Buckle any unused safety location.
belts behind the child restraint so If the head restraint
This system is designed to make interferes with the proper
children cannot reach them. Pull
installation of child restraints easier. installation of the child
the shoulder belt all the way out When using lower anchors, do not restraint, the head
(Continued) use the vehicle's safety belts. restraint may be removed.
See “Head Restraint 2.2. Route, attach, and tighten

Removal and the top tether according
Reinstallation” at to your child restraint
the end of this section. instructions and the
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower following instructions:
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer If the position you are using
recommends that the top tether does not have a headrest
be attached, attach and tighten or head restraint, or the
the top tether to the top tether headrest or head restraint
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the has been removed, and you
child restraint instructions and are using a dual tether,
the following steps: If the position you are using route the tether over the
2.1. Find the top tether anchor does not have a headrest seatback.
on the back of the rear or head restraint, or the
seatback. headrest or head restraint
has been removed, and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
and you are using a single

tether, raise the head
restraint and route the
tether under the head
restraint and in between the
head restraint posts.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
If the rear outboard seating grasp the child restraint at the
position you are using has LATCH path and attempt to
an adjustable head restraint move it side to side and back
and you are using a dual and forth. There should be no 2. Press both buttons on the head
tether, route the tether more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of restraint posts at the same
around the head restraint. movement for proper installation. time, and pull up on the head
restraint.
Head Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation 3. Store the head restraint in the
cargo area of the vehicle.
The rear outboard head restraints
can be removed if they interfere with 4. When the child restraint is
the proper installation of the child removed, reinstall the head
restraint. restraint before the seating
position is used.
To remove the head restraint:
1. Partially fold the seatback
If the rear outboard seating forward. See Rear Seats on
position you are using has page 3‑8 for additional
an adjustable head restraint information.
To reinstall the head restraint: 3. Try to move the head restraint to

{ WARNING make sure that it is locked in
place.
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
Replacing LATCH System
occupants will suffer a neck/ Parts After a Crash
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for { WARNING
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly. A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
1. Insert the head restraint posts death in a crash. To help make
into the holes in the top of the sure the LATCH system is
seatback. The notches (A) on working properly after a crash,
the posts must face the driver see your dealer to have the
side of the vehicle.
system inspected and any
2. Push the head restraint down. necessary replacements made as
If necessary, press the height soon as possible.
adjustment release button to
further lower the head restraint. If the vehicle has the LATCH system
See Head Restraints on and it was being used during a
page 3‑2. crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be Do not secure a child seat in a may be removed. See “Head
necessary even if the LATCH position without a top tether anchor Restraint Removal and
system was not being used at the if a national or local law requires Reinstallation” under Lower
time of the crash. that the top tether be anchored, or if Anchors and Tethers for
the instructions that come with the Children (LATCH System) on
Securing Child Restraints child restraint say that the top strap page 3‑41.
must be anchored.
(Rear Seat) 2. Remove the safety belt from the
If the child restraint does not have guide on the seatback by sliding
When securing a child restraint in a
the LATCH system, you will be the webbing through the opening
rear seating position, study the
using the safety belt to secure the on the guide. Do not secure the
instructions that came with the
child restraint in this position. Be child restraint with the safety belt
child restraint to make sure it is
sure to follow the instructions that routed through the guide.
compatible with this vehicle.
came with the child restraint. Secure 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
If the child restraint has the LATCH the child in the child restraint when the lap and shoulder portions of
system, see Lower Anchors and and as the instructions say. the vehicle's safety belt through
Tethers for Children (LATCH
If more than one child restraint or around the restraint. The child
System) on page 3‑41 for how and
needs to be installed in the rear restraint instructions will show
where to install the child restraint
seat, be sure to read Where to Put you how.
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
the Restraint on page 3‑39.
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, 1. Put the child restraint on
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for the seat.
Children (LATCH System) on If the head restraint interferes
page 3‑41 for top tether anchor with the proper installation of the
locations. child restraint, the head restraint
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
7. If the child restraint has a top and Tethers for Children (LATCH on page 5‑18 for more information,
tether, follow the child restraint System) on page 3‑41 for additional including important safety
manufacturer's instructions information on installing the head information.
regarding the use of the top restraint properly. A label on the sun visor says,
tether. See Lower Anchors and If the seat has a safety belt guide, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
Tethers for Children (LATCH return the safety belt into the guide in the front.” This is because the risk
System) on page 3‑41 for more on the seatback by sliding the to the rear-facing child is so great,
information. webbing through the opening on the if the airbag deploys.
8. Before placing a child in the guide.
child restraint, make sure it is { WARNING
securely held in place. To check, Securing Child Restraints
grasp the child restraint at the A child in a rear-facing child
safety belt path and attempt to
(Front Passenger Seat)
restraint can be seriously
move it side to side and back This vehicle has airbags. A rear injured or killed if the right
and forth. When the child seat is a safer place to secure a front passenger airbag inflates.
restraint is properly installed, forward-facing child restraint. See This is because the back of the
there should be no more than Where to Put the Restraint on rear-facing child restraint would
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. page 3‑39. be very close to the inflating
To remove the child restraint, In addition, the vehicle has a airbag. A child in a forward-facing
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt passenger sensing system which is child restraint can be seriously
and let it return to the stowed designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right front
position. If the top tether is passenger frontal airbag and passenger airbag inflates and the
attached to a top tether anchor, passenger knee airbag under passenger seat is in a forward
disconnect it. If the head restraint certain conditions. See Passenger position.
was removed, reinstall it before Sensing System on page 3‑26 and
the seating position is used. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator (Continued)
“Head Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation” under Lower Anchors
If the child restraint has the LATCH You will be using the lap-shoulder
WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and belt to secure the child restraint in
Tethers for Children (LATCH this position. Follow the instructions
Even if the passenger sensing System) on page 3‑41 for how and that came with the child restraint.
system has turned off the right where to install the child restraint
front passenger airbag(s), no 1. Move the seat as far back as it
using LATCH. If a child restraint is will go before securing the
system is fail-safe. No one can secured using a safety belt and it
guarantee that an airbag will not forward-facing child restraint.
uses a top tether, see Lower
deploy under some unusual Anchors and Tethers for Children When the passenger sensing
circumstance, even though the (LATCH System) on page 3‑41 for system has turned off the right
airbag(s) are turned off. top tether anchor locations. front passenger frontal airbag
and passenger knee airbag, the
Secure rear-facing child restraints Do not secure a child seat in a off indicator on the passenger
in a rear seat, even if the position without a top tether anchor airbag status indicator should
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a if a national or local law requires light and stay lit when you start
forward-facing child restraint in that the top tether be anchored, or if the vehicle. See Passenger
the right front seat, always move the instructions that come with the Airbag Status Indicator on
the front passenger seat as far child restraint say that the top strap page 5‑18.
back as it will go. It is better to must be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on
secure the child restraint in a In Canada, the law requires that the seat.
rear seat. forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
See Passenger Sensing System the lap and shoulder portions of
attached.
on page 3‑26 for additional the vehicle's safety belt through
information. or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the airbags are off, the off
retractor to make sure the indicator in the passenger airbag
retractor is locked. If the status indicator will come on and
retractor is not locked, repeat stay on when the vehicle is started.
Steps 5 and 6. If a child restraint has been installed
7. Before placing a child in the and the on indicator is lit, see “If
child restraint, make sure it is the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
securely held in place. To check, Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
grasp the child restraint at the System on page 3‑26 for more
safety belt path and attempt to information.
move it side to side and back To remove the child restraint,
and forth. When the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
restraint is properly installed, let it return to the stowed position.
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Floor Console Storage

Compartments
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-1
Umbrella Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Inside the front of the floor console

There is a storage compartment on is an auxiliary power outlet (C)
top of the instrument panel that
and a jack for auxiliary input
includes an auxiliary power outlet.
devices (B). Cords can be routed in
Inside is a transmitter slot for the the pass‐thru (A). See Auxiliary
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Devices on page 7‑15.
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
The console has cupholders and a
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
storage area.
page 2‑2.
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on
the lever.
4-2 Storage
Umbrella Storage Additional Storage

Features
Cargo Cover
The rear console has open storage

with an auxiliary power outlet (A)
and cupholders. Slide an umbrella into the
opening on either the driver or
passenger door.
There is a cover for the rear cargo

area. Use the four cargo cover
loops to hook the cover to the side
panels.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-24

Instruments and Battery Gauge (High
Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Traction Control System
Controls Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Driver Efficiency Gauge . . . . . . 5-16
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-24
Engine Coolant Temperature
Total Vehicle Range . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Instrument Panel Overview Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 5-4 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-26
Passenger Airbag Status Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-26
Controls Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-6 Charging System Light Vehicle Ready Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-6 (12-Volt Battery) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Malfunction Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Pedestrian Friendly Alert . . . . . . 5-7 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-7 Brake System Warning Door, Hood, or Hatch Open
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Electric Parking Brake
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Information Displays
Indicators Service Electric Parking Brake Center Stack Display . . . . . . . . 5-29
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Power Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Energy Information . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Sport Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Mountain Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-23 Driver Information
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Messages Propulsion Power Vehicle Personalization

Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-53
Battery and Charging Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 Universal Remote System
Brake System Messages . . . . 5-46 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-51 Universal Remote System . . . 5-62
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-46 Anti-theft Alarm System Universal Remote System
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Drive Mode Messages . . . . . . . 5-46 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-51 Universal Remote System
Electric Drive Unit Starting the Vehicle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Engine Cooling System Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 Vehicle Reminder
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-47 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-48 Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-53
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-48 Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-53
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
2 NOTES
Instrument Panel Overview

A. Air Vents on page 8‑8. H. Light Sensor. See Daytime R. Leaf Button. See Center Stack
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. Running Lamps (DRL) on Display on page 5‑29.
See Turn and Lane-Change page 6‑2. S. DRIVE MODE Button. See
Signals on page 6‑3. I. Instrument Panel Storage on Driver Selected Operating
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 4‑1. Modes on page 9‑22.
page 6‑1. J. Automatic Climate Control T. Power Button on page 9‑16.
Pedestrian Friendly Alert on System on page 8‑1. U. Shift Lever. See Electric Drive
page 5‑7. K. Driver Information Center (DIC) Unit on page 9‑28.
C. Instrument Cluster on Controls. See Driver Information V. Infotainment on page 7‑1.
page 5‑10. Center (DIC) on page 5‑43.
Navigation System. See the
Driver Information Center (DIC) L. Instrument Panel Illumination separate navigation system
Display. See Driver Information Control on page 6‑4. manual.
Center (DIC) on page 5‑43. M. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out W. Electric Parking Brake on
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer on of View). See Malfunction page 9‑30.
page 5‑7. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19.
X. Power Door Locks on
E. Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7 N. Cruise Control on page 9‑36. page 2‑11.
(If Equipped). O. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Y. Hazard Warning Flashers on
F. Center Stack Display on page 5‑6. page 6‑3.
page 5‑29. P. Horn on page 5‑7.
G. Charging Status Indicator. See Q. Steering Wheel Controls on
Charging Status Feedback on page 5‑6 (If Equipped).
page 9‑47.
Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving.
(Infotainment Controls) on
page 7‑25 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 7‑25 and
Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Controls OnStar Overview on page 14‑1 for
Adjustment more information.
$ / i (End Call/Mute): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound
on. For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or to end a
current call.
_ SRC ^ (Rotary Control): Turn _
or ^ to select a radio band or audio
source.
Turn _ or ^ to select the next or
For vehicles with audio steering previous favorite radio station, CD
To adjust the steering wheel: wheel controls, some audio controls track, DVD track/chapter, or MP3
1. Pull the lever (A) down. can be adjusted at the steering track.
wheel.
2. Move the steering wheel up Press SRC to change between
or down. b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles radio and CD or DVD.
with OnStar or Bluetooth, or
3. Pull or push the steering wheel Press and hold SRC to interact with
navigation system, if equipped,
closer or away from you. the navigation system.
press to interact with those
4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the systems. See Bluetooth (Overview)
steering wheel in place. on page 7‑20 or Bluetooth
+ x − (Volume): Press + to Windshield Wiper/Washer

increase the volume; press − to
decrease the volume.
Horn
Press near the horn symbols to
sound the horn.
The pedestrian friendly alert
provides momentary soft‐note horn To use the pedestrian friendly alert: The windshield wiper lever is on the
sound. See Pedestrian Friendly side of the steering column. With
Momentarily push the P button on the vehicle on, move the windshield
Alert on page 5‑7 for more
the end of the turn signal/lane wiper lever to select the wiper
information.
change lever, and a soft‐note alert speed.
will momentarily sound.
Pedestrian Friendly Alert 2: Move the lever up to 2 for fast
Repeat for additional activations of wipes.
Use this feature to alert people who the pedestrian friendly alert.
may not hear your vehicle 1: Move the lever up to 1 for slow
approaching. wipes.
The pedestrian friendly alert is only
available when the vehicle is
moving or is stopped and is not in
P (Park).
Heavy snow or ice can overload the The washer and wipers will continue
wipers. If the wiper motor overheats, until the lever is released or the
the windshield wipers will stop until maximum wash time is reached.
the motor cools and the wiper When the windshield wiper lever is
control is turned off. See Electrical released, additional wipes may
System Overload on page 10‑30. occur depending on how long the
Wipe Parking windshield washer had been
G (Adjustable Interval Wipes): activated. See Washer Fluid on
If the vehicle is turned off while the
Move the lever up to G for page 10‑19 for information on filling
adjustable interval wipes, then turn wipers are on 1, 2, or G, they will the windshield washer fluid
the band up for more frequent wipes stop immediately. reservoir.
or down for less frequent wipes. If the windshield wiper lever is then
9 (Off): Use to turn the windshield moved to off before the driver door { WARNING
wipers off. is opened or within 10 minutes, the
wipers will restart and move to the In freezing weather, do not use
3 (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly base of the windshield. the washer until the windshield is
move the wiper lever down. For warmed. Otherwise the washer
several wipes, hold the wiper If the vehicle is turned off during a
fluid can form ice on the
lever down. windshield wash, the wipers will
stop when they reach the base of windshield, blocking your vision.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper the windshield.
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or Windshield Washer
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades Pull the windshield wiper lever
should be replaced. See Wiper toward you to spray windshield
Blade Replacement on page 10‑25. washer fluid and activate the wipers.
Power Outlets Certain accessory plugs may not Warning Lights,

be compatible with the accessory
The accessory power outlets can be power outlet and could overload Gauges, and
used to plug in electrical equipment, vehicle or adapter fuses. If a
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. problem is experienced, see your
Indicators
There are three accessory power dealer. Warning lights and gauges can
outlets: When adding electrical equipment, signal that something is wrong
. be sure to follow the installation before it becomes serious enough
Inside the front of the center to cause an expensive repair or
floor console. instructions included with the
equipment. See Add-On Electrical replacement. Paying attention to the
. On the rear of the center floor Equipment on page 9‑58. warning lights and gauges could
console. prevent injury.
.
Notice: Hanging heavy
Inside the instrument panel equipment from the power outlet Warning lights come on when there
storage area. can cause damage not covered could be a problem with a vehicle
The power outlets supply power by the vehicle warranty. The function. Some warning lights come
while the vehicle is on, or if the power outlets are designed for on briefly when the propulsion
vehicle is in Retained Accessory accessory power plugs only, such system is started to indicate they
Power (RAP). See Retained as cell phone charge cords. are working.
Accessory Power (RAP) on Gauges can indicate when there
page 9‑19. could be a problem with a vehicle
Remove the cover to access and function. Often gauges and warning
replace when not in use. lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights A CHARGING OVERRIDE/

comes on and stays on while INTERRUPTION OCCURRED
driving, or when one of the gauges message may display on the lower
shows there may be a problem, left of the screen to indicate that a
check the section that explains what charging override or interruption has
to do. Waiting to do repairs can be occurred due to one or more of the
costly and even dangerous. following events:
. Override of the charge settings
Instrument Cluster by the owner using OnStar.
This screen indicates that the
The instrument cluster displays a . Unintended interruption of AC charge cord is not connected. Plug
preview of information that includes power at the vehicle's the charge cord in to charge the
electric range, charging, odometer, charge port. vehicle.
and battery status. This happens
upon entry when the driver door is
. Interruption of charging by the
opened, and following the welcome utility company using OnStar as
animation, before starting the authorized by vehicle owner.
vehicle. The following screens may appear,
depending on the status.
This screen indicates that the

charge cord is connected and
charging is complete.
This screen indicates that charging This screen indicates that the This screen indicates that the
is active and the estimated charge vehicle is fully charged and the charge cord is connected, but the
completion time is 10:00 a.m. charge cord is not connected. vehicle cannot be charged.
This screen indicates that charging

is programmed to be delayed with
an estimated completion time of
7:00 a.m.
Complete Cluster with Enhanced Configuration in Electric Mode, Canada Similar

A. Battery Gauge (High Voltage) M. Cruise Control Light on W. Total Vehicle Range on
on page 5‑15. page 5‑27. page 5‑16.
B. Fuel Gauge on page 5‑15. N. Electric Parking Brake Light on X. Vehicle Ready Light on
C. Service Electric Parking Brake page 5‑22. page 5‑27.
Light on page 5‑22. O. Door, Hood, or Hatch Open Y. StabiliTrak® OFF Light on
D. Security Light on page 5‑27. Light on page 5‑28. page 5‑24.
E. Engine Coolant Temperature P. Low Fuel Warning Light on Z. Driver Information Center (DIC)
Warning Light on page 5‑25. page 5‑26. on page 5‑43.
F. Charging System Light (12-Volt Q. Antilock Brake System (ABS) AA. Traction Off Light on page 5‑24.
Battery) on page 5‑19. Warning Light on page 5‑23. AB. Sport Mode Light on page 5‑23
G. Engine Oil Pressure Light on R. Electric Drive Unit Positions. and Mountain Mode Light on
page 5‑26. See Electric Drive Unit on page 5‑23.
page 9‑28. AC. Lamps On Reminder on
H. High-Beam On Light on
page 5‑27. S. Driver Efficiency Gauge on page 5‑27.
page 5‑16. AD. Odometer on page 5‑14.
I. Second Row Passenger Safety
Belt Reminder Light. See Safety T. Brake System Warning Light on AE. Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
Belt Reminders on page 5‑16. page 5‑22. page 5‑19.
J. Turn and Lane-Change Signals U. Driver Safety Belt Reminder AF. Traction Control System (TCS)/
on page 6‑3. Light. See Safety Belt StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑24.
Reminders on page 5‑16.
K. Compass on page 5‑15. AG. Tire Pressure Light on
V. Airbag Readiness Light on page 5‑25.
L. Speedometer on page 5‑14. page 5‑17.
Instrument Cluster Display

Configurations
There are two instrument cluster
display configurations to choose
from. Press CONFIG to the left
of the steering wheel to change
the configuration. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑43 for more information. Simple Configuration in Extended Enhanced Configuration
Choose either the Simple or Range Mode in Extended Range Mode
Enhanced Configuration display. The Enhanced Configuration
displays the Driver Efficiency Speedometer
Gauge. The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed in both kilometers per hour
(km/h) and miles per hour (mph).
The DIC menu can be used to
change the units.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑43.
Simple Configuration
in Electric Mode Odometer
Enhanced Configuration The odometer shows how far the
in Electric Mode vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
Trip Odometer of turn before needing a signal from displays an estimate of how far
the GPS satellites. The compass the vehicle can be driven while in
The trip odometer is within the system will automatically determine this mode.
Driver Information Center. See when a GPS signal is restored and
Driver Information Center (DIC) on See Electric Mode on page 9‑21.
provide a heading.
Battery Gauge (High Fuel Gauge
Compass Voltage)
The vehicle has a compass display
in the instrument cluster above
the speedometer. The compass
receives its heading and other
information from the Global
Positioning System (GPS) antenna
and vehicle speed information.
The compass system has automatic
calibration and zone adjustment This indicator displays the fuel
features. level. When this indicator is in the
This indicator displays the high foreground, the vehicle is operating
Avoid covering the GPS antenna for
voltage battery charge level. in Extended Range Mode.
long periods of time with objects
that may interfere with the antenna's When this indicator is displayed The number next to the indicator
ability to receive a satellite signal. in the foreground, the vehicle is displays an estimate of how far the
See Multi-Band Antenna on operating in Electric Mode. The vehicle can be driven while in
page 7‑12 for the location of the number next to the indicator this mode.
vehicle's antenna. The compass
See Extended Range Mode on
system is designed to operate for a
page 9‑22.
certain number of miles or degrees
Driver Efficiency Gauge brake: If the ball turns yellow and Safety Belt Reminders
travels below the center of the
gauge, braking is too aggressive to Driver Safety Belt Reminder
optimize efficiency. Light
Total Vehicle Range
This gauge is a guide to driving in When the vehicle is started, this

an efficient manner by keeping the light flashes and a chime may come
ball green and in the center of the on to remind the driver to fasten
gauge. The leaves stop spinning their safety belt. The light stays on
when the vehicle stops or when the solid until the belt is buckled.
ball travels away from the center of Total vehicle range is the remaining This cycle may continue several
the gauge. distance the vehicle can be driven times if the driver remains or
combining the electric range and becomes unbuckled during driving
See Driving for Better Energy
fuel range. while the vehicle is moving.
Efficiency on page 9‑2.
See Driving for Better Energy If the driver safety belt is already
accel: If the ball turns yellow and
Efficiency on page 9‑2. buckled, neither the light nor the
travels above the center of the
gauge, acceleration is too chime comes on.
aggressive to optimize efficiency.
Passenger Safety Belt grocery bag, laptop, or other the corresponding safety belt
Reminder Light electronic device. To turn off the symbol in the instrument cluster
reminder light and/or chime, remove turns green. If a safety belt is not
the object from the seat or buckle initially buckled, the instrument
the safety belt. cluster displays a gray safety belt
symbol. While the vehicle is moving,
Second Row Passenger Safety if a second row passenger who
Belt Reminder Light was previously buckled becomes
unbuckled, the corresponding safety
belt symbol will change to flashing
When the vehicle is started, this red for several seconds and a chime
light flashes and a chime may come may sound.
on to remind the front passenger to
fasten their safety belt. The light
stays on solid until the belt is Airbag Readiness Light
buckled. This light shows if there is an
Second row seating positions
This cycle may continue several electrical problem. The system
monitored for safety belt use are
times if the front passenger remains check includes the airbag sensor,
represented by a colored symbol
or becomes unbuckled while the passenger sensing system, the
indicating safety belt status. When
vehicle is moving. pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the vehicle is started, two safety belt
the wiring, and the crash sensing
If the front passenger safety belt is symbols come on and stay on for
and diagnostic module. For more
buckled, neither the chime nor the several seconds in the instrument
information on the airbag system,
light comes on. cluster to alert the driver that
see Airbag System on page 3‑19.
passengers may need to fasten
The front passenger safety belt their safety belts. After the
reminder light and chime may turn passenger safety belt is buckled,
on if an object is put on the seat
such as a briefcase, handbag,
WARNING (Continued)
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
The airbag readiness light comes on United States
and stays on for several seconds Passenger Airbag Status
when the vehicle is started. Then Indicator
the light goes out.
The vehicle has a passenger
A message may also display in the
sensing system. See Passenger
Driver Information Center (DIC).
Sensing System on page 3‑26 for
See Airbag System Messages on important safety information. The
page 5‑51 for more information. passenger airbag status indicator is Canada
in the overhead console. When the vehicle is started, the
{ WARNING passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
If the airbag readiness light stays for on and off for several seconds
on after the vehicle is started or as a system check. Then, after
comes on while driving, it means several more seconds, the status
the airbag system might not be indicator will light either ON or
working properly. The airbags in OFF, or the on or off symbol to let
the vehicle might not inflate in a you know the status of the front
crash, or they could even inflate outboard passenger frontal airbag
(Continued) and knee airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is system. Have it checked by your

lit on the passenger airbag status WARNING (Continued) dealer. Driving while this light is on
indicator, it means that the front could drain the 12‐volt battery.
outboard passenger frontal airbag have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness If a short distance must be driven
and knee airbag are allowed to with the light on, be sure to turn off
inflate. Light on page 5‑17 for more
information, including important all accessories, such as the radio.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is safety information.
lit on the airbag status indicator, it Malfunction
means that the passenger sensing
Indicator Lamp
system has turned off the front Charging System Light
outboard passenger frontal airbag A computer system called OBD II
and knee airbag.
(12-Volt Battery) (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
If, after several seconds, both status
the fuel, ignition, and emission
indicator lights remain on, or if there
control systems. It ensures that
are no lights at all, there may be a
emissions are at acceptable levels
problem with the lights or the
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
passenger sensing system. See
produce a cleaner environment.
your dealer for service.
This light comes on when the
The charging system light comes on vehicle is placed in Service Only
{ WARNING briefly when the vehicle is in ON/ Mode, as a check to show it is
RUN, as a check to show the light is working. If it does not, have the
If the airbag readiness light ever working. vehicle serviced by your dealer. See
comes on and stays on, it means Power Button on page 9‑16 for more
that something may be wrong If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving, there could be a information.
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, problem with the electrical charging
(Continued)
Notice: Modifications made to The following can prevent more

the engine, electric drive unit, serious damage to the vehicle:
exhaust, intake, or fuel system of . Reduce vehicle speed.
the vehicle or the replacement
of the original tires with other . Avoid hard accelerations.
than those of the same Tire . Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the malfunction indicator lamp Performance Criteria (TPC)
can affect the vehicle emission If the light continues to flash, when
comes on and stays on, while the it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
vehicle is in ON/RUN, this indicates controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to Find a safe place to park the
that there is an OBD II problem and vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
service is required. these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by least 10 seconds, and restart the
Malfunctions often are indicated by the vehicle warranty. This vehicle. If the light is still flashing,
the system before any problem is could also result in a failure follow the previous steps and see
apparent. Being aware of the light to pass a required Emission your dealer for service as soon as
can prevent more serious damage Inspection/Maintenance test. See possible.
to the vehicle. This system assists Accessories and Modifications on Light On Steady: An emission
the dealer technician in correctly page 10‑3. control system malfunction has
diagnosing any malfunction. been detected on the vehicle.
This light comes on during a
Notice: If the vehicle is malfunction in one of two ways: Diagnosis and service might be
continually driven with this light required.
on, the emission controls might Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire The following may correct an
not work as well, the vehicle fuel emission system malfunction:
economy might not be as good, increases vehicle emissions and
and the engine might not run as could damage the emission control . Check that the fuel cap is fully
smoothly. This could lead to system on the vehicle. Diagnosis installed. The diagnostic system
costly repairs that might not be and service might be required. can determine if the fuel cap
covered by the vehicle warranty. has been left off or improperly
installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap allows fuel to evaporate into Emissions Inspection and Mode and the malfunction
the atmosphere. A few driving Maintenance Programs indicator lamp does not
trips with the cap properly come on. See your dealer for
installed should turn the light off. assistance in verifying proper
. Check that good quality fuel is operation of the malfunction
used. Poor fuel quality causes indicator lamp.
the engine not to run as . The vehicle may not pass
efficiently as designed and may this inspection if the OBD II
cause stalling after start-up or (On-Board Diagnostics) system
misfiring. These conditions might Some state and local governments determines that critical emission
go away once the engine is have or might begin programs control systems have not been
warmed up. to inspect the emission control completely diagnosed by the
If one or more of these equipment on the vehicle. Failure to system. The vehicle would
conditions occurs, change the pass this inspection could prevent be considered not ready for
fuel brand used. It will require at getting a vehicle registration. inspection. This can happen if
least one full tank of the proper the 12‐volt battery has recently
The DLC is under the instrument been replaced or if the 12‐volt
fuel to turn the light off. panel to the left of the steering battery has run down. The
If none of the above have made wheel. See your dealer if assistance diagnostic system is designed to
the light turn off, your dealer can is needed. evaluate critical emission control
check the vehicle. The dealer The vehicle may not pass systems during normal driving.
has the proper test equipment inspection if: This can take several days of
and diagnostic tools to fix any routine driving. If this has been
. The vehicle may not pass this
mechanical or electrical problems done and the vehicle still does
that might have developed. inspection if the malfunction not pass the inspection for lack
indicator lamp is on while the of OBD II system readiness, your
vehicle is in ON/RUN, or if the dealer can prepare the vehicle
vehicle is placed in Service Only for inspection.
Brake System Warning parking brake is released, or while

Light
{ WARNING driving, there is a problem with the
electric parking brake system.
The vehicle brake system consists The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake If the light does not come on,
of two hydraulic circuits. If one or remains flashing, see your dealer.
circuit is not working, the remaining system warning light is on.
circuit can still work to stop the Driving with the brake system See Electric Parking Brake on
vehicle. For normal braking warning light on can lead to a page 9‑30 for more information.
performance, both circuits need to crash. If the light is still on after
be working. the vehicle has been pulled off Service Electric Parking
the road and carefully stopped, Brake Light
If the warning light comes on, there
have the vehicle towed for
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away. service.
Electric Parking Brake

Light
The Service Electric Parking Brake

Metric English light should come on briefly when
the vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it does
This light comes on briefly when the not come on, have it fixed so it
vehicle is turned on. If it does not will be ready to warn if there is a
come on then, have it fixed so it problem.
will be ready to warn if there is a This status light comes on when the
problem. parking brake is applied. If the light If this light stays on, there is a
flashes and stays on after the problem with a system on the
If the light comes on and stays on, vehicle that is causing the parking
there is a base brake problem.
brake system to work at a reduced and stays on while driving, try Sport Mode Light
level. The vehicle can still be driven, resetting the system. To reset the
but should be taken to a dealer as system:
soon as possible. See Electric 1. While driving, pull over when it is
Parking Brake on page 9‑30 for safe to do so.
more information. If a message
displays in the Driver Information 2. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
Center (DIC), see Brake System 3. Turn the vehicle off.
Messages on page 5‑46 for more
information. 4. Restart the vehicle. This light comes on when Sport
Mode is selected. See “Sport Mode”
If the ABS warning light remains on
in Driver Selected Operating Modes
Antilock Brake System after resetting the system or comes
on page 9‑22 for more information.
(ABS) Warning Light on again while driving, the vehicle
needs service. If the ABS warning
light is on, but the regular brake Mountain Mode Light
system warning light is not on, the
antilock brakes are not working
properly, but the regular brakes are
still functioning. Have the vehicle
serviced right away. If both brake
lights are on, the vehicle does not
This light should come on briefly have antilock brakes, and there is a
when the vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it problem with the regular brakes as This light comes on when Mountain
does not come on, have the vehicle well. Have the vehicle towed for Mode is selected. See “Mountain
serviced by your dealer. service. See Towing the Vehicle on Mode” in Driver Selected Operating
If the ABS warning light stays on page 10‑73. Modes on page 9‑22 for more
longer than a few seconds after the information.
vehicle is in ON/RUN, or comes on
Traction Off Light StabiliTrak® OFF Light Traction Control System

(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
This light comes on briefly while This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not, starting the engine. If it does not, This light comes on briefly while
have the vehicle serviced by your have the vehicle serviced by your starting the vehicle.
dealer. If the system is working dealer.
normally, the indicator light then If it does not, have the vehicle
This light comes on when the serviced by your dealer. If the
turns off. StabiliTrak system is turned off. system is working normally the
The traction off light comes on when If StabiliTrak is off, TCS is also off. indicator light then goes off.
the Traction Control System (TCS) If the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and If the light comes on and stays on
is off, the system does not assist in while driving, there could be a
releasing the TCS/ESC button. controlling the vehicle. Turn on the problem with the TCS/StabiliTrak
This light and the StabiliTrak Off TCS and the StabiliTrak systems system and the vehicle might need
light come on when StabiliTrak is and the warning light turns off. service. When this warning light is
turned off. on, the TCS/StabiliTrak system is off
If the TCS is off, wheelspin is not and does not limit wheel spin.
limited. Adjust driving accordingly. The light flashes if the system is
active and is working to assist the
driver with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
Engine Coolant Tire Pressure Light A message in the Driver Information

Center (DIC) may also display. See
Temperature Warning Tire Messages on page 5‑52 for
Light more information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the Tire
and Loading Information Label. See
Tires on page 10‑40 for more
information.
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light When the Light Flashes First and
comes on briefly when the vehicle is Then is On Steady
The engine coolant temperature in ON/RUN. It provides information
warning light comes on briefly when This indicates that there may be a
about tire pressures and the TPMS. problem with the Tire Pressure
the vehicle is started.
When the Light is On Steady Monitor System. The light flashes
If it does not, have the vehicle for about one minute and stays on
serviced by your dealer. If the This indicates that one or more of steady until the vehicle is in OFF.
system is working normally, the the tires are significantly This sequence repeats each time
indicator light then goes off. underinflated. the vehicle is in ON/RUN. See Tire
If the light comes on and stays on Pressure Monitor System on
while driving, the vehicle may have page 10‑47 for more information.
a problem with the cooling system.
Stop and turn off the vehicle to
avoid damage to the engine.
A warning chime sounds when this
light is on.
See Engine Overheating on
Engine Oil Pressure Light Low Fuel Warning Light
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire. The oil pressure light should come
Someone could be burned. Check on briefly as the vehicle is started.
the oil as soon as possible and If it does not come on have the The low fuel warning light comes on
have the vehicle serviced. vehicle serviced by your dealer. briefly when the vehicle is started.
If the light comes on and stays on, it This light also comes on when the
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil means that oil is not flowing through fuel level is low. When fuel is added,
maintenance can damage the the engine properly. The vehicle the light should go off. If it does not,
engine. The repairs would not be could be low on oil and might have have the vehicle serviced.
covered by the vehicle warranty. some other system problem. See
Always follow the maintenance your dealer.
schedule for changing engine oil.
Security Light Vehicle Ready Light Lamps On Reminder
The immobilizer light should come The vehicle ready light comes on This light comes on when the
on briefly as the engine is started. whenever the vehicle is ready to be parking lamps, headlamps,
If it does not come on, have the driven. or taillamps are on.
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally, High-Beam On Light Cruise Control Light
the indicator light turns off.
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. See Immobilizer Operation
on page 2‑15 for more information.
The high-beam on light comes on The cruise control light comes on

when the high-beam headlamps are when the cruise control is turned on
in use. and turns green when cruise control
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam is engaged.
Changer on page 6‑2 for more See Cruise Control on page 9‑36 for
information. more information.
Door, Hood, or Hatch

Open Light
If a door, hood, or hatch is not
completely closed, a light comes on
together with a graphic in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Hood Open Hatch Open

The DIC indicates when a door, the
hood, or the hatch is open. The light
displays the open area as shaded.
The DIC and the light both display
when the vehicle is moving. Only
the light displays if the vehicle is
Door(s) Open
stopped.
Information Displays finger tip to minimize response time.

If the controls are not responding,
screen. The Power Flow screens
indicate the current system
remove the gloves. operating condition. The screens
Center Stack Display show the energy flow between the
The center stack screen displays engine, electric drive unit, and high
Charging, Power Flow, and Energy voltage battery. These components
Information. See the information that will be highlighted when they are
follows. active.
Climate Control, Infotainment, and
Vehicle Personalization information
also displays in this screen. For
more information on these
systems, see:
. Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1.
. The navigation system manual To view the Power Flow, Charging,
and Infotainment on page 7‑1. and Energy Information, press
Battery Power ‐ Battery is active
. Vehicle Personalization on the [ button on the center stack. with energy flowing to the wheels.
page 5‑53.
The center stack controls only need Power Flows
a light touch to operate and work To view the Power Flow screens,
best with bare hands. The controls
press the [ button on the center
will work with most gloves although
they may take longer to respond. stack and then press the Power
Use the finger pad rather than the Flow button at the top of the touch
Battery Power ‐ Vehicle is stationary Engine Power ‐ Vehicle is stationary

in electric mode and no power is in extended range mode and no
flowing to the wheels. power is flowing to the wheels.
Regen Power Recovery ‐ Power

from the wheels returns to the
battery during regenerative braking
or coasting.
Engine Power ‐ Engine is active Engine and Battery Power ‐ Both
with energy flowing to the wheels. the engine and battery are active
with energy flowing to the wheels.
The current charge mode status Charge Mode Status

can also be viewed in a temporary
pop-up in the center stack display
by pressing the charge port door
release button on the driver door.
The Charge Start and Charge
Complete time estimations are also
displayed on the screen. These
estimations are most accurate when
Power Off ‐ No power is flowing to the vehicle is plugged in and in
the wheels. moderate temperature conditions.
Also, to get an accurate time
Charging estimate, the vehicle uses an
internal clock for programmable
Programmable Charging charging, not the clock in the center
This vehicle has three stack.
programmable charge modes.
To view the current charge mode
status in the center stack display,
press the [ button on the center
stack and then press the Charging Immediately: The vehicle starts
button at the top of the touch charging as soon as it is connected
screen. to an electrical outlet. See Plug-In
Charging on page 9‑44.
charge by the departure time.

Electrical rate information from the
utility company for the charging
location is required for this mode.
Also, if the selected electric rate
settings result in a very long charge
completion time, the vehicle will
start charging immediately upon
plug-in. For example, if the electric
rate table is setup with all “Peak”
rates and the rate preference is to
charge during “Off-Peak” rates only,
then the vehicle will start charging
immediately upon plug-in.
Charge Level Selection
This feature is available on some
models. The Charge Level
Preference setting allows the
Delayed Departure Time: The Delayed Rate and Departure customer to select their vehicle’s
vehicle estimates the charging start Time: The vehicle estimates the charge level so it matches the
time considering the programmed charging start time based on the capability of their charging location.
departure time for the current day of utility rate schedule, utility rate If the vehicle consistently stops
the week. Charging begins at the preference, and the programmed charging after plugging in, or if a
start time and is complete by the departure time for the current day of circuit breaker continues to trip,
departure time only if sufficient time the week. The vehicle will charge reducing to a lower Charge Level
is allowed after the charge cord is during the least expensive rate Preference may resolve the issue.
plugged in. periods to achieve a full battery
The Charge Level Preference

settings are not directly related to
the Charge Level Button on the
charge cord. The vehicle will adhere
to the setting that minimizes the AC
current used to charge the vehicle.
The Charge Level Preference
setting will return to Maximum
each time the cord has been
The Charge Level Preference Select one option:
disconnected from the vehicle
should be configured to match the . Immediately upon plug in.
for an extended period of time.
electrical current rating for the AC
outlet that the charge cord is The Charge Level Preference . Delayed based on
connected to. The Charge Level setting can be changed at any time departure time.
Preference settings are: while the center stack display is . Delayed based on electric rates
operable. & departure time.
. Maximum: Limits AC current to
12 Amps Charge Mode Selection
. Reduced: Limits AC current to From the Charge Mode Status
8 Amps screen, press Change
Charge Mode.
Departure Time Entry Charge Rate Selection

From the Delayed Charge Mode From the Delayed Rate and
Status screen, press Edit to change Departure Time Charge Mode
the departure time for each day of Status screen, press Edit.
the week to match your personal
schedule.
Press one of the following options to

select the Charge Rate Preference:
. Charge during Peak, Mid‐Peak,
and Off‐Peak Rates: The vehicle
can charge during any rate
Select one of the following: period to satisfy the next
. Edit Electric Rate Schedule. planned departure time.
1. Press the day to change. However, it will select when to
. Edit Departure Time Schedule. charge to minimize the total cost
2. Press + or − to change the hours See “Departure Time Entry.” of the charge.
and minutes.
. Select Charge Rate Preference. . Charge during Mid‐Peak and
3. Press + or − to change AM
or PM. Charge Rate Preference Selection Off‐Peak Rates: The vehicle will
charge during Off-Peak and/or
4. Press Back to store changes From the Departure Time & Rate Mid-Peak rate periods only and
and return to the previous Information screen, press Select will select when to charge to
screen. Charge Rate Preference. minimize the total cost of the
charge.

. Charge during Off‐Peak Rates: Electric Rate Plan Selection
The vehicle will only charge
during Off-Peak rate periods. Electric rates, or cost per unit, may
vary based on time, weekday/
Charging begins at the start time weekend, and season. During the
and is complete by the departure day when the demand for electricity
time only if sufficient time is allowed is high, the rates are usually higher
after the charge cord is plugged and called Peak rates. At night
in. For example, if the vehicle is when the demand for electricity is
plugged in for only one hour prior to low, the rates are usually lower and
the departure time, and the battery To edit the Summer/Winter
called Off-Peak rates. In some
is completely discharged, the Schedule:
areas, a Mid-Peak rate is offered.
vehicle will not be fully charged by 1. Press Summer/Winter Schedule.
the departure time regardless of the Contact the utility company to obtain
rate selection. the rate schedule for your area. The 2. Press Edit.
summer and winter start dates must
Also, if the selected electric rate be established to use a summer/
settings result in a very long charge winter schedule.
completion time, the vehicle will
start charging immediately upon From the Departure Time & Rate
plug-in. For example, if the electric Information screen, press Edit
rate table is setup with all “Peak” Electric Rate Schedule.
rates and the rate preference is to
charge during “Off-Peak” rates only,
then the vehicle will start charging
immediately upon plug-in. To edit the Yearly Schedule:
1. Press Yearly Schedule.
2. Press Edit.
Summer/Winter Schedule Start Electric Rate Schedule Editing

Date Entering From the Enter Summer/Winter
From the Select Electric Rate Plan Start Dates screen, press Edit
screen, press Summer/Winter Summer Schedule or Edit Winter
Schedule then press Edit. Schedule.
From the Select Electric Rate Plan
screen, press Yearly Schedule and
then press Edit.
1. Press Weekday or Weekend.
2. Press Edit next to the row to be
changed.
. Weekdays are Monday
through Friday and use the
same rate schedule.
1. Press Summer Start.
. Weekends are Saturday
2. Press + or − to set the month and Sunday and use the
and day for the start of summer. same rate schedule.
3. Press Winter Start. Both weekday and weekend
4. Press + or − to set the month schedules must be set. The rate
and day for the start of winter. schedule only applies for a 24-hour
5. Press Edit Summer Schedule or period, starting at 12:00 AM and
Edit Winter Schedule to edit the ending at 12:00 AM. There can be
daily electric rate schedule. five rate changes for each day; not
all must be used.
The finish times must be Electric Rate Schedule Viewing

consecutive. If a finish time does From the Select Electric Rate Plan
not follow a start time, the error screen, press View (Summer,
message displays “An invalid entry Winter, or Yearly) Schedule.
was found in the data entered.
Please re‐enter data.”
Electric Rate Finish Time Editing
From the Edit (Summer, Winter,
or Yearly) Electric Rate Schedule
screen, press Edit next to the row to
change.
1. Press + or − to adjust the time.

2. Press Peak, Mid-Peak,
or Off-Peak to select the
electric rate.
3. Press the Back button to store
changes.
Only the finish time can be edited.
The start time is automatically
populated in the rate table.
Temporary Override of a Delayed

Charge Mode
To temporarily override a Delayed
Charge Mode to Immediate Charge
Mode from inside the vehicle:
1. Press the charge port door
release button on the driver door
to view the Charge Mode Status
Temporary Charge Mode pop-up in the center stack 3. Press Charge Immediately Upon
Override and Cancel display. Plug-In to temporarily override
an Immediate Charge Mode.
Programmed Delayed Charge
Modes can be temporarily The Temporary Charge Mode Status
overridden to an Immediate Charge screen will automatically display the
Mode for one charge cycle. Also, revised charge complete time.
the next planned departure time can
be temporarily overridden for one
charge cycle. In addition to the
in-vehicle overrides via the center
stack, there are also other ways to
temporarily override a Delayed 2. Press Temporary Override.
Charge Mode. See Plug-In Charging
on page 9‑44.
To cancel the temporary override to 3. Press the + or – button to

Immediate, from the Temporary change the Next
Charge Mode Status screen or Departure Time.
pop-up, press Cancel Temporary 4. Press Confirm Departure Time to
Charge Mode on the bottom of the temporarily override the Next
touch screen. Planned Departure Time.
Temporary Override of the Next The Temporary Charge Mode Status
Planned Departure Time screen will automatically display the
To temporarily override the Next revised charge complete time.
To cancel the temporary override of
Planned Departure Time from inside The Temporary Departure time can the Next Planned Departure Time,
the vehicle: only be updated for the same day from the Temporary Charge Mode
1. Press the charge port door as the original Next Planned Status screen or pop-up, press
release button on the driver door Departure Time. Also, the vehicle Cancel Temporary Departure Time
to view the Charge Mode Status will not accept a Temporary on the bottom of the touch screen.
pop-up in the center stack Departure Time that is before the
display. present time of day.
2. Press Temporary Override.
Charging Override/Interruption
. There was an unintended loss
Pop-Up of AC power during the plug-in
charge event. For example,
there was a power outage or the
charge cord was unplugged from
the wall.
. The charge process was
interrupted by the utility
company via OnStar as
authorized by the vehicle owner When the Programmable Charging
(available in select regions). system is disabled, the Default
For more information see Utility Charge Mode Status screen and the
The Charging Override/Interruption Interruption of Charging on pop-up will display “- -:- -” for the
pop-up will appear if any of the page 9‑52. Charge Complete Time. The
following conditions occur: Programmable Charging system will
Programmable Charging be disabled if the Charge Complete
. The charging settings have been Time cannot be confidently
modified via OnStar through the
Disabled
estimated. If the Programmable
website or the Mobile App. For Charging system is consistently
example, the Departure Time disabled, see your dealer for details.
Tables, the Rate Tables, or the
Charge Mode were updated
using the customer website
(available in select regions).
Energy Information charged. This includes distance

traveled in Electric Mode, distance
To view the Energy Usage, Energy traveled in Extended Range Mode,
Efficiency, and Efficiency Tips, press total distance traveled, electric
the [ button on the center stack energy used from the battery,
and then press the Energy Info total fuel used, and average fuel
button at the top of the touch economy. There are maximum limits
screen. to some of the values that can be
displayed. When these values are
Energy Usage replaced with dashes, the value The Energy Usage information will
limits have been reached. To reset also appear automatically on power
these values, the high voltage off when Retained Accessory Power
battery will need to be fully is active. This automatic pop-up can
recharged. The circle graph also be disabled through the vehicle
represents the percentage of personalization. See “Energy
distance traveled using Electric Summary Exit Pop-up” under
Mode versus Extended Range Vehicle Personalization on
Mode. The Lifetime Fuel Economy page 5‑53.
is a total over the life of the vehicle
and can only be reset by the dealer.
The Energy Usage screen displays
information for the total of all the
drive cycles since the last time the
high voltage battery was fully
Energy Efficiency Efficiency Tips Clock

The clock is in the center stack
display.
To set the time:
Press the TP (Time Program) button
to go directly to the time setting
page, or press the CONFIG button
and select Time from the list.
1. Press the CONFIG button to
The Energy Efficiency screen is The Efficiency Tips screen is enter the menu options. Turn
accessed by pressing Energy accessed by pressing Efficiency the TUNE/MENU knob to scroll
Efficiency on the Energy Usage Tips from the Energy Usage or through the available setup
screen. This screen displays the Energy Efficiency screen. This features. Press the TUNE/MENU
energy efficiency over the drive screen provides a guide on how to knob or press the Time screen
cycle based on driving style and improve energy usage to increase button to display other options
climate settings. Driving in a more fuel economy and range. within that feature.
efficient manner will result in a 2. Press + or − to increase or
higher percentage displayed for decrease the Hours and Minutes
driving style. Minimizing the use of displayed on the clock.
the climate control system will result
in a higher percentage displayed for 12/24 HR Format: Press the 12 HR
climate setting. screen button for standard time;
press the 24 HR screen button for
military time.
Day + or Day −: Press the Day +
or Day − display buttons to increase
or decrease the day.
Display: Press Display to turn the displays trip, fuel, and warning SELECT: Press the center of the
display of the time on the screen on messages if a system problem is knob to select the highlighted item.
or off. detected. Turn the knob to scroll through the
menu items.
DIC Controls
Driver Information DIC Menu Items
Center (DIC)
At the main DIC menu:
1. Turn the SELECT knob to scroll
through the possible DIC menus.
2. Press the center of the SELECT
knob when a menu item is
highlighted to enter that menu.
3. Continue to turn and press the
SELECT knob to scroll through
and select the available menu
The Driver Information Center (DIC) items:
display is in the instrument cluster. CONFIG: Press to select either the } : Trip A
The DIC displays information about Simple or Enhanced instrument
the vehicle. It also displays warning
x : Trip B
cluster configuration display.
messages if a system problem is : : Oil Life
detected. See Vehicle Messages on } BACK: Press to return to the
previous screen, exit a screen, v : Tire Pressure
or return to the main menu. { : Vehicle Messages
DIC Operation and Displays Press } BACK to minimize the z : Units
View the DIC displays by pressing DIC menu display.
the DIC buttons located to the left
y : Tutorial Mode
of the steering wheel. The DIC u : Turn-by-Turn
Trip A and Trip B To reset the Engine Oil Life System, Units
The trip displays show fuel used, see Engine Oil Life System on Turn the SELECT knob to change
average fuel economy, and distance page 10‑12. The system is reset the unit display to METRIC or US
traveled since the last trip reset. when 100% displays. when the display is active. Press
Reset the trip data by pressing and Tire Pressure SELECT to confirm the setting. This
holding the SELECT button when will change the displays on the
The display will show a vehicle with cluster and DIC to either metric or
either Trip A or Trip B is displayed. the approximate pressures of all English (US) measurements.
Oil Life four tires. Tire pressure is displayed
in either kilopascals (kPa) or in Tutorial Mode
This displays the percentage of pounds per square inch (psi).
remaining oil life. The lower Select this menu item to view a
the percentage, the closer the If a low or high tire pressure is screen that explains some of the
vehicle is to needing an oil change. detected, a message is displayed unique features of the cluster.
advising to check the tire pressure Tutorial mode is only available when
When the oil life is depleted, the in the specified tire. See Tire
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON the vehicle is in P (Park).
Pressure on page 10‑46 and Tire
message displays. Change the oil Messages on page 5‑52 for more Turn-by-Turn
as soon as possible. Additional information.
maintenance is also recommended Select this menu item to view the
in the Maintenance Schedule. If the tire pressure display shows OnStar or Navigation System
See Maintenance Schedule on dashes instead of a value, there Turn-by-Turn guidance. See OnStar
page 11‑3 and Engine Oil on may be a problem with the vehicle. Overview on page 14‑1 or the
page 10‑9. See your dealer for service. navigation manual, if the vehicle has
navigation, for more information.
The oil life must be reset after Vehicle Messages
each oil change. Avoid accidental Turn the SELECT knob to scroll
resetting of the Engine Oil Life through any active warning
System. It cannot be reset messages. Press SELECT to
accurately until the next oil change. review the messages.
Vehicle Messages The 12-volt battery saver system CHARGE DOOR OPEN
starts reducing certain features
Messages displayed in the DIC This message displays when the
trying to save the charge of the
indicate the status of the vehicle or charge door is open and the vehicle
12-volt battery. Turn off unnecessary
some action that may be needed is shifted out of P (Park).
features to allow the battery to
to correct a condition. Multiple recharge. LOW BATTERY
messages may display one after the
other. BATTERY TOO COLD, PLUG IN This message displays when the
TO WARM 12-volt battery voltage is low. See
Messages that do not require Battery on page 10‑23 for more
immediate action can be This message displays during information.
acknowledged and cleared by extremely cold temperatures, when
pressing the SELECT knob. The the vehicle will not start until the SERVICE BATTERY
messages requiring immediate high voltage battery is warm CHARGING SYSTEM
action cannot be cleared until that enough.
This message displays when there
action is performed. All messages Plug the vehicle in to allow the is a fault in the 12-volt battery
should be taken seriously. Clearing charging system to warm the high charging system. Take the vehicle
the messages does not correct the voltage battery, then the vehicle can to your dealer for service.
problem. be started.
SERVICE HIGH VOLTAGE
Battery and Charging CHARGE CORD CONNECTED CHARGING SYSTEM
Messages This message displays when the This message displays when there
charge cord is connected to the is a problem with the high voltage
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE vehicle. The vehicle cannot be charging system. See your dealer
This message displays when the shifted out of P (Park) with the for service.
vehicle has detected that the 12-volt charge cord connected.
battery voltage has dropped and
vehicle features are being disabled.
Brake System Messages SERVICE PARKING BRAKE CRUISE SET TO XXX

BRAKE FLUID LOW This message displays when there This message displays when the
is a problem with the parking brake. cruise control is set and shows the
This message displays when the Take the vehicle to your dealer for speed it was set to. See Cruise
brake fluid level is low. See Brake service. Control on page 9‑36 for more
Fluid on page 10‑21. information.
STEP ON BRAKE TO
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE PARK BRAKE Door Ajar Messages
This message displays if the electric This message displays when
parking brake is on while the vehicle attempting to release the electric DOOR(S) OPEN, HOOD OPEN,
is in motion. Release it before parking brake without the brake HATCH OPEN
attempting to drive. See Electric pedal applied. See Electric Parking A symbol will appear on the display
Parking Brake on page 9‑30 for Brake on page 9‑30 for more showing the area that is open. See
more information. information. Door, Hood, or Hatch Open Light on
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST page 5‑28.
Cruise Control Messages
is a problem with the brake boost APPLY BRAKE BEFORE
Drive Mode Messages
assist system. When this message CRUISE MOUNTAIN MODE NOT
displays, the brake boost assist AVAILABLE
If this message displays when
motor might be heard operating and
attempting to activate cruise control, This message displays when in
a pulsation may be felt in the brake
apply the brake pedal and try again. Mountain Mode and the mode
pedal. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service. becomes unavailable. See
“Mountain Mode” under Driver
Selected Operating Modes on
page 9‑22.
SPORT MODE NOT Engine Cooling System ENGINE RUNNING DUE TO

AVAILABLE Messages TEMPERATURE
This message displays when in This message displays when the
Sport Mode and the mode becomes ENGINE high voltage battery is charged but
unavailable. See “Sport Mode” OVERHEATED — REDUCE the engine has to come on because
under Driver Selected Operating SPEED of the outside temperature or high
Modes on page 9‑22. This message displays when the voltage battery temperature.
engine coolant temperature or
Electric Drive Unit engine oil is too hot. Reduce speed Engine Oil Messages
Messages and allow the vehicle to cool down.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
SHIFT TO PARK ENGINE This message displays when the
OVERHEATED — TURN engine oil needs to be changed.
This message displays when the
vehicle should be shifted to
VEHICLE OFF After changing the engine oil, the
P (Park). This may appear when This message displays and a Engine Oil Life System must be
attempting to turn off the vehicle continuous chime sounds if the reset. See Engine Oil Life System
when it is not in P (Park). engine cooling system reaches on page 10‑12 and Driver
unsafe temperatures for operation. Information Center (DIC) on
Stop and turn off the vehicle as page 5‑43 for information on how
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid to reset the system. See Engine Oil
severe damage. This message on page 10‑9 and Maintenance
clears when the engine has cooled Schedule on page 11‑3 for more
to a safe operating temperature. information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW — TURN When this message is displayed, Key and Lock Messages
VEHICLE OFF refuel the vehicle. See Out of Fuel/
Engine Unavailable on page 9‑24. When programming new Remote
This message displays if low oil Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters,
pressure levels occur. Stop the FUEL LEVEL LOW DIC messages display. See Remote
vehicle as soon as safely possible Keyless Entry (RKE) System
and do not operate it until the cause Operation on page 2‑2 for more
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
of the low oil pressure has been information.
soon as possible.
corrected. Check the oil as soon as
possible and have the vehicle READY TO REFUEL NO REMOTE DETECTED
serviced by your dealer. This message displays when the
fuel system is depressurized and RKE transmitter is not detected
Fuel System Messages the vehicle can be refueled. while attempting to start the vehicle.
The transmitter battery may be
CLOSE FUEL DOOR TIGHTEN GAS CAP weak. See “Starting the Vehicle with
This message displays when the a Low Transmitter Battery” under
fuel door is open and the vehicle is Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
moving. System Operation on page 2‑2 for
fuel cap.
more information.
ENGINE NOT AVAILABLE WAIT TO REFUEL
ADD FUEL
This message displays when the fuel system is pressurized and you
engine is not available due to must to wait to refuel the vehicle.
running out of fuel. The vehicle can
continue to be driven in Electric
Mode until the battery is depleted,
but will have reduced acceleration.
NO REMOTE DETECTED, SERVICE KEYLESS START Object Detection System

PRESS BRAKE TO RESTART SYSTEM Messages
This message displays if the RKE This message displays when the
transmitter is no longer detected in keyless start system needs service. PARK ASSIST OFF
the vehicle. Press the brake pedal Take the vehicle to your dealer. This message displays when the
and the POWER O button to park assist system has been turned
restart the vehicle, or press the Lamp Messages off or when there is a temporary
POWER O button without pressing condition causing the system to be
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL disabled. See Ultrasonic Parking
the brake pedal to turn the vehicle ON OR OFF Assist on page 9‑38.
off. If the vehicle is turned off and a
valid transmitter is not available, the A message will display when the SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
vehicle will not restart. automatic light control has been
turned on or off. This message displays if there is a
REMINDER: KEY LEFT IN problem with the Ultrasonic Front
VEHICLE CHECK LAMP or LAMP and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA)
FAILURE system. Do not use this system to
This message displays when help you park. See Ultrasonic
leaving the vehicle with the RKE Depending on the lamp, one of
these messages may display. See Parking Assist on page 9‑38 for
transmitter still inside. more information. See your dealer
Bulb Replacement on page 10‑26.
REPLACE BATTERY IN for service.
REMOTE KEY TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays when the This message displays if the turn
battery in the RKE transmitter needs signal has been left on. Turn off the
to be replaced. turn signal.
Propulsion Power steep grades. This is normal SERVICE STABILITRAK

operation to protect the high
Messages voltage battery. Only if both the
is a problem detected with the
PROPULSION POWER IS PROPULSION POWER IS
StabiliTrak system. The vehicle is
REDUCED REDUCED message and the
safe to drive, but the StabiliTrak
malfunction indicator lamp are on
This message displays when the system is not operational. See
should the vehicle be taken to the
propulsion power is reduced and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
dealer for service.
can affect the ability to accelerate. page 9‑34 for information on
If this message is on, but there While climbing the grade with this resetting the system.
is no reduction in performance, message displayed, the vehicle
speed may be reduced until the SERVICE TRACTION
proceed to your destination. The CONTROL
performance may be reduced the engine can recover the battery state
next time the vehicle is driven. The of charge to a normal level. See This message displays when there
vehicle may be driven at a reduced “Mountain Mode” under Driver is a problem detected with the
speed while this message is on, but Selected Operating Modes on Traction Control System (TCS). The
maximum acceleration and speed page 9‑22. vehicle is safe to drive, but the TCS
may be reduced. If this message is not operational. See Traction
stays on when the malfunction Ride Control System Control System (TCS) on page 9‑33
indicator lamp is on, the vehicle Messages for information on resetting the
should be taken to your dealer for system.
service as soon as possible. LOW TRACTION
STABILITRAK OFF
This message can display when This message displays when the
driving in mountainous terrain Antilock Brake System (ABS) is This message displays when
without using Mountain Mode or by active and is working to assist the StabiliTrak is turned off. Adjust your
not entering Mountain Mode soon driver with control of the vehicle in driving accordingly.
enough to build a sufficient battery difficult driving conditions.
charge reserve before climbing
TRACTION CONTROL OFF SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT When this message is displayed,
SYSTEM the vehicle should be taken to your
dealer for service as soon as
Traction Control System (TCS) is This message displays if there is a possible. See Out of Fuel/Engine
turned off. Adjust your driving problem with the theft-deterrent Unavailable on page 9‑24.
accordingly. system. See your dealer for service.
SERVICE AC SYSTEM
TRACTION CONTROL ON
Service Vehicle Messages This message displays if there is a
ENGINE MAINTENANCE problem with the air conditioning
Traction Control System (TCS) is
system. Take the vehicle to your
turned on. XXX% COMPLETE
dealer for service.
Airbag System Messages Engine Maintenance Mode is SERVICE HEATER SOON
SERVICE AIRBAG running. See “Engine Maintenance This message displays if there is a
Mode” under Maintenance Modes problem with the heater system.
This message displays if there is a on page 9‑24. Take the vehicle to your dealer for
problem with the airbag system. service.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for ENGINE NOT AVAILABLE
service. SERVICE SOON SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message displays when the This message displays if there is a
Anti-theft Alarm System engine is not available due to a problem with the power steering
Messages malfunction that will not allow the system. Take the vehicle to your
engine to start. The vehicle can dealer for service.
SERVICE THEFT ALARM continue to be driven in Electric
This message displays if there is a Mode until the battery is depleted,
problem with the alarm. See your but will have reduced acceleration.
dealer for service.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON PRESS BUTTON AGAIN TO TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
This message displays if there is a TURN OFF This message displays when the
problem with the vehicle. Take the This message displays as pressure in one or more of the tires
vehicle to your dealer for service. a reminder to press the is low.
Depending on the severity of a POWER O button to turn the This message also displays LEFT
crash, this message may come on vehicle off when an attempt is FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
along with the airbag readiness made to turn off the vehicle while REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
light. it is in motion. the location of the low tire.
Starting the Vehicle The low tire pressure warning
Tire Messages light will also come on. See Tire
Messages Pressure Light on page 5‑25.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
PRESS BRAKE TO START SYSTEM If a tire pressure message appears
VEHICLE on the DIC, stop as soon as you
This message displays if there is a
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
This message displays when problem with the Tire Pressure
until the tire pressure is equal to
attempting to start the vehicle Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
the values shown on the Tire and
without first pressing the brake Pressure Monitor Operation on
Loading Information label. See Tires
pedal. page 10‑48 for more information.
on page 10‑40, Vehicle Load Limits
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE on page 9‑11, and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑46.
system is learning new tires. See You can receive more than one tire
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on pressure message at a time. The
page 10‑48 for more information. DIC also shows the tire pressure
values. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑43.
Vehicle Reminder Vehicle TUNE/MENU Knob

Messages Personalization
. Press to enter, select, or activate
a highlighted menu option.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE The Vehicle Personalization . Turn to highlight a menu option.
WITH CARE features can be accessed by using
either the infotainment controls or . Press to turn a system setting on
This message is displayed when ice
the touch screen in the center stack or off.
conditions are possible.
display. See Overview on page 7‑2
under “Infotainment System” for } BACK
Vehicle Speed Messages more information. . Press to exit a menu.
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX Using the Infotainment . Press to return to a previous
This message displays when the Controls screen.
vehicle speed is limited. Submenus
Use the CONFIG, TUNE/MENU
Washer Fluid Messages knob, and } BACK buttons An arrow on the right‐hand edge of
on the center stack to select the menu indicates that it has a
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD personalization features. submenu with other options.
FLUID CONFIG (Configure): Press to Selecting a Menu Option
This message displays when the scroll through the available menus
across the top of the touch screen 1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to
washer fluid level is low. For highlight the function.
information on filling the washer display.
fluid, see Washer Fluid on 2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob to
page 10‑19. select the highlighted option.
A checkmark next to the option
indicates the selected option.
Turning a Function On or Off Submenus Entering the

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to An arrow on the right‐hand edge of Personalization Menu
highlight the function. the menu indicates that it has a
2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob submenu with other options.
to turn the function on or off. Selecting a Menu Option
A checkmark next to the function
indicates that the function is on. Touch any one of the available
menu options on the touch screen
Using the Touch Screen to select the option. A checkmark
next to the option indicates the
Use the touch screen icons and
selected option.
menus on the center stack display
to select personalization features. Turning a Function On or Off Press the Vehicle Settings menu on
w: Touch to scroll up. Touch the screen where the the touch screen.
x: Touch to scroll down. available function is listed to turn it The Vehicle Settings menu features
on or off. A checkmark next to the may include:
Back: Touch Back in the upper function indicates that the function
right corner of the display to return is on. . Climate and Air Quality
to the previous menu. . Comfort and Convenience
. Languages
. Lighting
. Power Door Locks
. Remote Locking, Unlocking,
Starting
. Return to Factory Settings
Climate and Air Quality To select the auto fan speed: To turn the auto heated seats on
1. Press the Vehicle or off:
Select the Climate and Air Quality
menu to display: Settings menu. 1. Press the Vehicle
2. Select Climate and Air Quality. Settings menu.
. Auto Fan Speed
3. Select Auto Fan Speed. 2. Select Climate and Air Quality.
. Auto Heated Seats
4. Select the fan speed. 3. Turn the auto heated seats
. Remote Start Auto Heated Seats
feature on or off.
. Auto Defog 5. Press Back to return to the
previous menu. 4. Press Back to return to the
. Engine Assisted Heating previous menu.
. Engine Assisted Heating Auto Heated Seats
Remote Start Auto Heated Seats
(Plugged‐In) When enabled, the auto heated seat
buttons on the touch screen will When on, this feature will turn the
Auto Fan Speed heated seats on when using remote
be highlighted. This feature will
This feature sets the automatic fan automatically activate heated seats start.
speed to maintain the desired at the level required by the interior To turn the remote start auto heated
interior temperature. This selection temperature. The auto heated seats seats on or off:
is available on vehicles with the can be turned off by using the 1. Press the Vehicle
automatic climate control system. heated seat buttons on the center Settings menu.
Choose a blower setting: stack.
2. Select Climate and Air Quality.
High: Increased speed.
3. Turn the remote start auto
Medium: Moderate speed.
heated seats feature on or off.
Low: Reduced speed.
4. Press Back to return to the
previous menu.
Auto Defog The Engine Assisted Heating The Engine Assisted Heating
When on and high humidity is options are: options are:
detected, the climate control system . At Cold Outside Temperatures . At Cold Outside Temperatures
will adjust the outside air, air . At Very Cold Outside . At Very Cold Outside
conditioner, or heat to decrease Temperatures Temperatures
fogging. The fan speed may
increase. When high humidity is no To select the outside temperature To turn the Engine Assisted Heating
longer detected, the system will level: (Plugged‐In) on or off:
return to previous operation. 1. Press the Vehicle menu. 1. Press the Vehicle menu.
To turn the auto defog on or off: 2. Select Climate and Air Quality. 2. Select Climate and Air Quality.
1. Press the Vehicle 3. Select the temperature level. 3. Turn the Engine Assisted
Settings menu. Heating (Plugged‐In) feature on
2. Select Climate and Air Quality. previous menu. or off.
3. Turn the auto defog feature on 4. Press Back to return to the
Engine Assisted Heating previous menu.
or off. (Plugged‐In)
4. Press Back to return to the If equipped, this feature will enable Comfort and Convenience
previous menu. or disable Engine Assisted Heating Select the Comfort and
Engine Assisted Heating whenever the vehicle is plugged in. Convenience menu and the
A change in setting will not take following will be displayed:
If equipped, this feature selects affect until after the vehicle is first
the outside temperature level at . Chime Volume
powered down.
which the engine may run to assist . Button Chime
heating in Electric Mode. A change
in selection will not take affect . Energy Summary Exit Pop‐up
until after the vehicle is first
powered down.

. Charge Cord Theft Alert To turn the button chime on or off: Charge Cord Theft Alert
. Charge Power Loss Alert 1. Press the Vehicle This allows the charge cord theft
Chime Volume Settings menu. alert to be turned on or off:
This allows the selection of the 2. Select Comfort and 1. Press the Vehicle
chime volume level to be either Convenience. Settings menu.
normal or high. 3. Turn the button chime feature on 2. Select Comfort and
To select the chime volume level: or off. Convenience.
1. Press the Vehicle 4. Press Back to return to the 3. Turn the Charge Cord Theft Alert
Settings menu. previous menu. feature on or off.
2. Select Comfort and Energy Summary Exit Pop‐up 4. Press Back to return to the
Convenience. previous menu.
This allows the energy summary
3. Select Chime Volume. exit pop‐up to be turned on or off: Charge Power Loss Alert
4. Select the volume level. 1. Press the Vehicle This allows the charge power loss
Settings menu. alert to be turned on or off:
previous menu. 2. Select Comfort and 1. Press the Vehicle
Convenience. Settings menu.
Button Chime
3. Turn the energy summary exit 2. Select Comfort and
This allows a tone to be heard when pop‐up feature on or off. Convenience.
a selection is made using the
infotainment system. 4. Press Back to return to the 3. Turn the Charge Power Loss
previous menu. Alert feature on or off.
previous menu.
Languages The available options are: To turn the vehicle locator lights on
. OFF or off:
This allows the selection of a
language: . 30 seconds 1. Press the Vehicle
Settings menu.
1. Press the Vehicle . 1 minute
Settings menu. 2. Select Lighting.
. 2 minutes
2. Select Languages. 3. Select Vehicle Locator Lights.
To select the length of time the
3. Select English, French, exterior lamps will remain on: 4. Turn the vehicle locator lights on
or Spanish. or off.
1. Press the Vehicle
4. Press Back to return to the Settings menu. 5. Press Back to return to the
previous menu. previous menu.
2. Select Lighting.
Lighting Power Door Locks
3. Select Exit Lighting.
Select the Lighting menu and the Select Power Door Locks and the
4. Select the length of time the following will be displayed:
following will be displayed:
exterior lamps will remain on.
. Exit Lighting . Auto Door Unlock
. Vehicle Locator Lights previous menu. . Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
Exit Lighting Vehicle Locator Lights
. Delayed Door Lock
This allows the selection of how This allows the vehicle locator Auto Door Unlock
long the exterior lamps stay on lights to be turned on or off. When This allows selection of which doors
when leaving the vehicle and it is on, the headlamps, parking lamps, will automatically unlock when the
dark outside. taillamps, license plate lamps, vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
and back-up lamps will illuminate
when K is pressed on the RKE
transmitter.
The available options are: To turn the unlocked door anti lock 3. Select Delayed Door Lock.
. All Doors out feature on or off: 4. Turn the delayed door lock
. Driver Door 1. Press the Vehicle feature on or off.
Settings menu. 5. Press Back to return to the
. OFF
2. Select Power Door Locks. previous menu.
To select how the doors will
automatically unlock: 3. Select Unlocked Door Anti Remote Locking, Unlocking,
Lock Out. Starting
Settings menu. 4. Turn the unlocked door anti lock Select Remote Locking, Unlocking,
out feature on or off. Starting and the following will be
2. Select Power Door Locks.
5. Press Back to return to the displayed:
3. Select Auto Door Unlock. previous menu. . Remote Lock Feedback
4. Select how the doors will Delayed Door Lock . Remote Unlock Light Feedback
automatically unlock.
When on, this feature will delay the . Door Unlock or Remote Door
5. Press Back to return to the locking of the doors. To override the Unlock
previous menu. delay, press the power door lock
switch on the center stack.
. Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
To turn the delayed door lock
. Passive Unlocking Door Options
When on, this feature will keep the
driver door from locking until the feature on or off: . Passive Locking Options
door is closed. If this feature is 1. Press the Vehicle
turned on, the Delayed Door Lock Settings menu.
menu will not be available.
2. Select Power Door Locks.
Remote Lock Feedback Remote Unlock Light Feedback The available options are:
This allows selection of what When on, the exterior lamps will . All Doors
feedback is provided when flash when unlocking the vehicle . Driver Door
unlocking the vehicle with the with the RKE transmitter.
RKE transmitter. If All Doors is selected, all doors will
To turn the remote unlock light be unlocked.
The available options are: feedback feature on or off:
.
If Driver Door is selected, only
Lights and Horn 1. Press the Vehicle the driver door will be unlocked
. Lights Only Settings menu.
on the first press of K. All doors
. Horn Only 2. Select Remote Locking, will be unlocked on the second
Unlocking, Starting.
. OFF press of K within five seconds of
3. Select Remote Unlock Light the prior press.
To select the remote lock feedback: Feedback.
To select how the doors will unlock
1. Press the Vehicle 4. Turn the remote unlock light with the RKE transmitter:
Settings menu. feedback feature on or off.
2. Select Remote Locking, 5. Press Back to return to the Settings menu.
Unlocking, Starting. previous menu.
2. Select Remote Locking,
3. Select Remote Lock Feedback. Door Unlock or Remote Door Unlocking, Starting.
4. Select the remote feedback. Unlock
3. Select Door Unlock or Remote
5. Press Back to return to the This allows selection of which doors Door Unlock.
previous menu. will unlock when pressing K on the 4. Select how the doors will unlock.
RKE transmitter.
previous menu.
Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder To select how the doors will unlock: To select doors locking feedback:
When on, the horn will chirp rapidly 1. Press the Vehicle 1. Press the Vehicle
three times if an RKE transmitter is Settings menu. Settings menu.
left in the vehicle. 2. Select Remote Locking, 2. Select Remote Locking,
To turn the remote left in vehicle Unlocking, Starting. Unlocking, Starting.
reminder feature on or off: 3. Select Passive Door Unlock. 3. Select Passive Door Lock.
1. Press the Vehicle 4. Select which doors to unlock. 4. Select On, Off, or On with Active
Settings menu. Horn Chirp.
2. Select Remote Locking, previous menu. 5. Press Back to return to the
Unlocking, Starting. previous menu.
3. Select Remote Left in Vehicle Passive Door Lock
Reminder. This allows passive locking to be Return to Factory Settings
4. Turn the remote left in vehicle turned on or off and select what This returns all of the vehicle
reminder feature on or off. type of feedback. personalization settings to the
The available options are: factory settings.
previous menu. . Off 1. Press the Vehicle
Settings menu.
Passive Door Unlock . On
2. Select Return to Factory
. On with Active Horn Chirp
This allows selection of which doors Settings.
are unlocked by pressing the button
3. Select Yes or No.
on the outside door handle.
The available options are:
previous menu.
. All Doors
. Driver Door
Universal Remote devices such as garage door When programming a garage door,
openers, security systems, and park outside of the garage. Park
System home automation devices. directly in line with and facing the
Do not use the Universal Remote garage door opener motor-head or
See Radio Frequency Statement on
system with any garage door opener gate motor-head. Be sure that
page 13‑16 for information
that does not have the stop and people and objects are clear of
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
reverse feature. This includes any the garage door or gate being
Communications Commission (FCC)
garage door opener model programmed.
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. manufactured before April 1,1982. It is recommended that a new
Read the instructions completely battery be installed in the hand-held
Universal Remote System before attempting to program the transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the
Programming Universal Remote system. Because
radio-frequency signal.
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person Programming the Universal
available to assist with programming Remote System
the Universal Remote system.
For questions or help programming
Keep the original hand-held the Universal Remote system,
transmitter for use in other vehicles call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go to
as well as for future Universal www.homelink.com.
If the vehicle has this feature, you Remote system programming. It is
also recommended that upon the Programming a garage door opener
will see these buttons with one involves time-sensitive actions, so
LED indicator next to them in the sale of the vehicle, the programmed
Universal Remote system buttons read the entire procedure before
overhead console. starting. Otherwise, the device will
be erased for security purposes.
This system provides a way to See “Erasing Universal Remote time out and the procedure will have
replace up to three remote control System Buttons” later in this to be repeated.
transmitters used to activate section.
To program up to three devices: procedure noted in “Gate does not move, continue
1. Hold the end of the hand-held Operator and Canadian with programming Steps 4
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm Programming” later in this through 6.
(1 to 3 in) away from the section. It may be helpful to have
Universal Remote system 3. Press and hold for five seconds another person assist with
buttons while keeping the the newly trained Universal the remaining Steps 4
indicator light in view. The Remote system button (the through 6.
hand-held transmitter was button selected in Step 2) while
supplied by the manufacturer observing the indicator light and
of the garage door opener garage door activation.
receiver (motor-head unit). . If the indicator light stays on
2. At the same time, press and continuously or the garage
hold both the hand-held door starts to move when
transmitter button and one of the the Universal Remote
three Universal Remote system system button is pressed
buttons to be used to operate and released, then the
the garage door. Do not release programming is complete. “Learn” or “Smart” Button
the Universal Remote system There is no need to 4. After Steps 1 through 3 have
button or the hand-held continue programming been completed, locate the
transmitter button until the Steps 4 through 6. “Learn” or “Smart” button inside
indicator light changes from a . If the Universal Remote the garage on the garage door
slowly to a rapidly flashing light. system indicator light blinks opener receiver (motor-head
You now may release both rapidly for two seconds, unit). The name and color
buttons. then turns to a constant of the button may vary by
Some entry gates and garage light and the garage door manufacturer.
door openers may require
substitution of Step 2 with the
5. Firmly press and release the The Universal Remote system If you live in Canada, or you are
“Learn” or “Smart” button. After should now activate the having difficulty programming a gate
pressing this button, you will garage door. operator or garage door opener
have 30 seconds to complete To program the remaining two by using the “Programming the
Step 6. Universal Remote system buttons, Universal Remote System”
6. Immediately return to the begin with Step 1 of “Programming procedures, regardless of where
vehicle. Firmly press and hold the Universal Remote System.” you live, replace Step 2 under
for two seconds the Universal “Programming the Universal Remote
Remote system button, selected Gate Operator and Canadian System” with the following:
in Step 2 to control the garage Programming Continue to press and hold the
door, and then release it. If the If you have questions or need help Universal Remote system button
garage door does not move or programming the Universal Remote while you press and release every
the lamp on the garage door system, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go two seconds (cycle) the hand-held
opener receiver (motor-head to www.homelink.com. transmitter button until the
unit) does not flash, press and frequency signal has been
hold the same button a second Canadian radio-frequency laws successfully accepted by the
time for two seconds, and then require transmitter signals to time Universal Remote system. The
release it. Again, if the door out or quit after several seconds of Universal Remote system indicator
does not move or the garage transmission. This may not be long light will flash slowly at first and then
door lamp does not flash, press enough for the Universal Remote rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
and hold the same button a third system to pick up the signal during “Programming the Universal Remote
time for two seconds, and then programming. Similarly, some U.S. System” to complete.
release. gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
Universal Remote System To erase all programmed buttons 2. The indicator light will begin to
on the Universal Remote system flash after 20 seconds. Without
Operation device: releasing the button, proceed
Using the Universal Remote 1. Press and hold down the with Step 1 of the section
System two outside buttons until the “Programming the Universal
indicator light begins to flash. Remote System.”
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Remote system button This should take about If you have questions or need help
for at least half of a second. The 10 seconds. programming the Universal Remote
indicator light will come on while the 2. Release both buttons. system, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go
signal is being transmitted. to www.homelink.com. You may
Reprogramming a Single also call the customer assistance
Erasing Universal Remote Universal Remote System phone number under Customer
System Buttons Button Assistance Offices on page 13‑3.
All programmed buttons should be To reprogram any of the three
erased when the vehicle is sold or Universal Remote system buttons:
the lease ends.
1. Press and hold the desired
Universal Remote system
button. Do not release the
button.
2 NOTES
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting AUTO (Automatic Headlamps):

Turns the exterior lamps on and off
automatically depending on the
Exterior Lamp Controls exterior light.
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on
Headlamp High/Low-Beam the parking lamps together with the
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 following:
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 . Sidemarker Lamps
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 . Taillamps
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 . License Plate Lamps
Turn and Lane-Change The exterior lamp control is on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 turn signal/lane change lever.
. Instrument Panel Lights
Interior Lighting O (Exterior Lamp Control): 5 (Headlamps): Turns on the

Operates the exterior lamps. Turn to headlamps, together with the
Instrument Panel Illumination
one of the following positions: previously listed lamps and lights.
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 O (Off): Turns the exterior
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 lamps off.
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6
6-2 Lighting
Headlamp High/ Flash-to-Pass

Low-Beam Changer The flash‐to‐pass feature works with
2 3 Headlamp High/Low‐Beam the low beams or Daytime Running
Changer: Push the turn signal/lane Lamps (DRL) on or off.
change lever away from you and To flash the high beams, pull the
release, to turn the high beams on. turn signal/lane change lever toward
To return to low beams, push the you momentarily and then release it.
lever again or pull it toward you and
release. Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
The Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
A light sensor on top of the
system comes on in daylight when
instrument panel makes the DRL
the following conditions are met:
work, so be sure it is not covered.
. The vehicle is on.
Fully functional DRL are required on
This indicator light turns on in
. The exterior lamp control is in all vehicles first sold in Canada.
the instrument cluster when the the automatic position.
When the DRL are on, the taillamps,
high‐beam headlamps are on. . The electric drive unit is not in sidemarker lamps, instrument panel
P (Park). lights, and other lamps will not be
. The light sensor determines it is on. The instrument cluster will be lit.
daytime.
Lighting 6-3
When the exterior lamp control band Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change
is turned to the headlamp position,
the low-beam headlamps come on.
Signals
The other lamps that come on with
the headlamps will also come on.
When the vehicle is on and you are
stopped, the DRL can be turned off
by moving the shift lever to P (Park).
The DRL will stay off until the shift
lever is moved out of the P (Park)
position. An arrow on the instrument cluster
will flash in the direction of the turn
The regular headlamp system or lane change.
should be turned on when needed.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher):
Press this button, on the center
stack, to make the front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on and off.
This warns others that you are
having trouble.
Press | again to turn the
flashers off.
6-4 Lighting
Raise or lower the lever until the Interior Lighting Dome Lamps
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete. If the lever is Instrument Panel
moved momentarily to the lane Illumination Control
change position, the arrow will flash
three times.
The lever returns to its starting
position when it is released.
If a turn signal arrow flashes rapidly
or does not come on, a signal bulb
may need to be replaced. See Bulb The dome lamp controls are in the
Replacement on page 10‑26. overhead console.
To operate, press the following
The brightness of the instrument buttons:
panel cluster display, infotainment ' (On): Press to turn on the
display and controls, steering wheel dome lamps.
controls, and all other illuminated
controls, as well as feature status
H (Door): Press to turn the lamps
on automatically when a door is
indicators can be adjusted.
opened.
The thumbwheel is on the
instrument panel beside the steering
( (Off): Press to turn the lamps
off, even when a door is open.
column.
Move the thumbwheel up or down to
brighten or dim the lights.
Lighting 6-5
Reading Lamps Lighting Features

There are front and rear reading
lamps. Entry Lighting
The headlamps, parking lamps,
taillamps, back‐up lamps, and the
interior lights turn on briefly when
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter K is pressed. The lights
The rear reading lamps are in the turn off immediately when the
headliner.
POWER O button is pressed or
automatically after a brief period.
The front reading lamps are in the

overhead console.
#$: Press to turn each lamp on
or off.
6-6 Lighting
Exit Lighting Battery Power Protection

The headlamps, parking lamps, The battery saver feature is
taillamps, back‐up lamps, and designed to protect the vehicle's
license plate lamps come on when 12‐volt battery.
the vehicle is turned off. Some If the exterior lamps or any interior
interior lights also come on when lamp is left on and the vehicle is
the vehicle is turned off. The turned off, the battery rundown
exterior lamps and interior lights protection system automatically
remain on after the door is closed turns the lamps off after about
for a brief period and then turn off. 10 minutes.
The exit lighting feature can
be changed. See Vehicle
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-20
Introduction
System Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Infotainment
Bluetooth (Voice Read the following pages to
Introduction Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 become familiar with the audio
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 system's features.
Trademarks and License
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Agreements
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Trademarks and License { WARNING
Radio Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Taking your eyes off the road
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 for extended periods could
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 cause a crash resulting in injury
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
or death to you or others. Do
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
not give extended attention to
Audio Players entertainment tasks while driving.
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
This system provides access
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
to many audio and non‐audio
listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
. Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speaker . Set up phone numbers in
adjustments, and preset radio
Overview advance so they can be called
stations. Keeping your eyes on the road and easily by pressing a single
your mind on the drive is important button or a single voice
For more information, see Defensive
for safe driving. The infotainment command for vehicles equipped
Driving on page 9‑5.
system has built-in features with phone capability.
The vehicle has Retained intended to help with this by
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
disabling some features when
driving. A grayed-out function is
{ WARNING
even after the ignition is turned off. not available when the vehicle is Taking your eyes off the road too
See Retained Accessory Power moving. long or too often while using the
(RAP) on page 9‑19 for more navigation system could cause a
All functions are available when the
information. crash and you or others could be
vehicle is parked. Do the following
Navigation/Radio System before driving: injured or killed. Focus your
attention on driving and limit
For vehicles with a navigation radio . Become familiar with the
infotainment system operation, glances at the moving map on the
system, see the separate navigation
buttons on the faceplate, and navigation screen. Use voice
manual.
touch-sensitive screen buttons. guidance whenever possible.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . Set up the audio by presetting
favorite stations, setting the Infotainment System Overview
The theft-deterrent feature works by
learning a portion of the Vehicle tone, and adjusting the The infotainment system is
Identification Number (VIN) to speakers. controlled by using the buttons on
the infotainment system. The the faceplate and the touch screen.
infotainment system does not See “Infotainment Control Buttons”
operate if it is stolen or moved to a in this section for more information.
different vehicle.
A. F (Home Page)
B. SOURCE
C. V
D. TUNE/MENU
E. } BACK
F. TONE
G. CONFIG
H. X (Eject)
I. FAV (Favories)
J. AS 1–2
K. INFO (Information)
L. VOL/ O (Volume/Power)
M. k (Play/Pause)
N. TP (Time Program)
O. ? (Mute)
P. r SEEK and SEEK [
Infotainment Control Buttons CONFIG (Configure): Press to preset buttons at the bottom of
adjust features for radio, display, the screen. The number of preset
The buttons on the faceplate are
phone, vehicle, and time. FAV lists can be changed in the
used to start primary functions while
F (Home Page): See “Home Configuration Menu.
using the infotainment system.
Page” following in this section. r SEEK (Seek Down):
VOL/O (Volume/Power):
TUNE/MENU: Turn to highlight 1. Press to seek to the beginning
1. Press to turn the system on a feature. Press to activate the of the current or previous track.
and off. highlighted feature. Turn to If the track has been playing for
2. Turn to adjust the volume. manually select a radio station. less than five seconds, it seeks
5 (Phone Menu): See Bluetooth the previous track. If longer than
k (Play/Pause): Press k to start, five seconds, the current track
pause, and resume playback. See (Overview) on page 7‑20 or
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on starts from the beginning.
CD Player on page 7‑12 and MP3
on page 7‑14 for more information. page 7‑21 or Bluetooth (Voice 2. Press and hold to quickly
Recognition) on page 7‑25 for more reverse through a track. Release
SOURCE: Press to change the information. the button to return to playing
audio sources such as AM-FM speed. See CD Player on
Radio, XM™ (if equipped), CD, } BACK: Press to return to the
page 7‑12 and MP3 on
and AUX. previous screen in a menu.
TONE: Press to access the If on a page accessed directly by a
faceplate button or Home Page 3. For AM, FM, or XM (if equipped),
sound menu screen to adjust bass, press to seek to the previous
midrange, and treble. See AM-FM screen button, pressing } BACK will strong station.
Radio on page 7‑7 for more go to previous menu.
information.
FAV (Favorite Pages 1-6): Press
SEEK [ (Seek Up):
INFO (Information): Press to to display the current page number 1. Press to seek the next track.
toggle through an audio information above the preset buttons. The 2. Press and hold to fast forward
screen. stored stations for each list through a track.
display on the touch-sensitive
3. Release the button to return to Home Page Out of all available Home Page
playing speed. See CD Player icons, up to eight icons can be
The infotainment system displays a
on page 7‑12 and MP3 on selected and sorted for the first
home page that makes accessing
page 7‑14 for more information. Home Page screen.
many of the features an easy
4. For AM, FM, or XM (if equipped), process. Home Page Features
press to seek to the next strong
Back: If on page two of the Home Various functions are disabled when
station.
Page, touch Back to return to page the vehicle is moving.
Preset Buttons (1-6): The preset one of the Home Page. If on page
buttons numbered one through six one, Back serves no function. Press the Now Playing screen
can be used to select stored AM, button to display the active source
Home: While navigating through page. The sources available are
FM, and XM (if equipped) stations.
other menus, press to go back to AM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD,
TP (Time Program): Press to set the Home Page to start a different USB/iPod, and AUX.
the time. feature.
See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7,
X (Eject): Press to eject a disc FAV: Press to display a page of Satellite Radio on page 7‑9, and CD
from the CD player. See CD Player stored (favorite) AM, FM, or XM (if Player on page 7‑12
on page 7‑12. equipped) stations. Keep pressing
FAV to scroll through the favorite Press the Phone screen button to
Touch Screen Buttons pages. display the Phone main page. See
Touch screen buttons are on the Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑20
Info: Press to toggle through an or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
screen and highlighted when a audio information screen.
feature is available. Some toggle on page 7‑21 or Bluetooth (Voice
screen buttons highlight when active The Home Page Menu lists the Recognition) on page 7‑25.
and gray out when inactive. options Customize Home Page and
Restore Home Page Defaults.
Press the FM screen button to Press the AUX screen button to

display the FM main page and play access any connected auxiliary
the current or last tuned FM station. device. See Auxiliary Devices on
See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7. page 7‑15.
Press the AM screen button to Languages
display the AM main page and play
the current or last tuned AM station. The vehicle supports English,
See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7. French (Canadian), and Spanish.
The default language is English.
Press the Config screen button to Press the XM screen button (if
equipped) to display the XM main To change the display language,
display the Config main page. From see Vehicle Personalization on
this display, you can adjust features page and play the current or last
tuned XM channel. See AM-FM page 5‑53 for more information.
such as time and date, radio,
phone, vehicle, and display. Radio on page 7‑7 and Satellite English and Metric Unit
Radio on page 7‑9. Conversion
Press the Tone screen button to
display the Tone main page. Adjust Press the CD screen button to To change the display units between
the tone and speakers by pressing display the CD main page and English and metric units, see Driver
the screen buttons to change the play the current or last CD track Information Center (DIC) on
levels of sound for treble, midrange, selected. See CD Player on page 5‑43 for more information.
bass, fade, and balance. See page 7‑12.
AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7. Press the USB screen button to
display the USB main page and play
the current or last track selected.
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑15.
Radio While on the audio main page, Adjusting the Speakers

press the Source button repeatedly To adjust the speaker balance:
to display and cycle through the
AM-FM Radio available sources (AM, FM, and XM . Press the left arrow on the
(if equipped), CD, USB/iPod, bottom for more sound from the
Playing the Radio left speakers or the right arrow
and AUX).
Audio Source on the bottom for more sound
Infotainment System Settings from the right speakers. The
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): middle position balances the
Tone Settings
1. Press to turn the radio on or off. sound between the left and right
To access the tone settings, press speakers.
2. Turn to increase or decrease the Home Page Tone button or the
the volume of the active source TONE button on the faceplate. To adjust the speaker fade:
(i.e., current audio source, active . Press the upper arrow for more
Use the tone settings to adjust the
navigation voice guidance, sound from the front speakers
following features:
or traffic prompts). and the lower arrow for more
. Setting the tone sound from the rear speakers.
The steering wheel controls can
also be used to adjust the volume. . Adjusting the speakers The middle position balances
See “Steering Wheel Controls” in the sound between the front and
Setting the Tone rear speakers.
the vehicle owner manual for more
information. To adjust the tone: EQ Settings
To access the radio main page, . Treble: Press + or − to change The EQ settings are selected
press the SOURCE button on the the level. through the tone menu. Press the
faceplate, the Now Playing screen . Middle (Midrange): Press + left or right arrows to cycle through
button, or one of the audio screen or − to change the level. the EQ options. The available
buttons on the Home Page. choices are Pop, Rock, Jazz,
. Bass: Press + or − to change
Classical, and Talk.
the level.
Finding a Station FM Changing the Sources

To select the band, see “Audio 1. Press the FM screen button on To change audio sources from any
Source” earlier in this section. the Home Page or select FM of the audio main pages (AM, FM,
from the source pop-up to XM, CD, USB/iPod, or AUX),
Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to find
display the FM main page. press the SOURCE button on the
a radio station. To select a preset
2. From the FM screen, press the faceplate or the Source screen
station, touch the FAV button and
Menu screen button to display button to display a pop-up of
choose a preset button.
the FM stations. available audio sources. Touch-tap
Seeking a Station or press the SOURCE button on the
3. Press to select the desired faceplate repeatedly to change the
Press g or l to search for a option. To update the station list, desired source.
station. touch Refresh.
Storing Radio Station Presets
AM XM (If Equipped)
There are a few ways to store
1. Press the AM screen button on 1. Press the XM screen button on presets.
the Home Page or select AM the Home Page or select XM
from the source pop-up to from the source pop-up to Up to 36 preset stations can be
display the AM main page. display the XM main page. stored. AM, FM, and XM,
if equipped, can be mixed.
2. From the AM screen, press the 2. From the XM screen, press the
Menu screen button to display Menu screen button to display 1. From the AM, FM, or XM main
the AM stations. the XM categories. page, press and hold one of the
preset screen buttons located at
3. Press to select the desired 3. Touch a desired category and the bottom of the screen. After
option. To update the station list, then turn the TUNE/MENU knob a few seconds, a beep will be
touch Refresh. to scroll the station list. heard and the new preset
information will display on that
screen button.

. In the AM, FM, or XM (if
2. Touch and hold a preset button
equipped) main page, press one
Satellite Radio
to store the currently active
station. After a few seconds, a of the preset screen buttons to XM™ Satellite Radio Service
beep will be heard and the new go to the selected preset station.
Vehicles with an XM satellite radio
preset information will display on Mixed-Band Presets tuner and a valid XM satellite radio
a small pop-up display at the subscription can receive XM
bottom of the screen. Each page can store six preset
programming.
stations. The presets within a page
3. Repeat the steps for each can be from different radio bands. XM is a satellite radio service based
preset. in the 48 contiguous United States
To scroll through the pages, press
To change the number of preset and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
the FAV button located on the
pages, see “Mixed-Band Presets” satellite radio has a wide variety of
faceplate or the FAV screen button
following for more information. programming and commercial-free
on the top bar. The current page
music, coast to coast, and in
Recalling a Preset Station number displays above the preset
digital-quality sound. A service
buttons. The stored stations for
To recall a preset station from a FAV fee is required to receive the XM
each FAV page display on the
page, do the following: service. For more information,
preset buttons at the bottom
. Press the FAV button on the see www.xmradio.com or
of the screen. The number of
faceplate to display the FAV 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. In
FAV pages displayed can be
pop-up. Select the desired Canada, see www.xmradio.ca or
changed in the Radio Settings
preset from the pop-up. 1-877-438-9677.
in the Configuration Menu.
. Press the FAV screen button at When XM is active, the channel
the top bar to display the preset name and number, category name,
pop-up that appears at the song title, and artist display on the
bottom of the page. Press one of screen.
the preset screen buttons to go
to the selected preset station.
XM Categories Turning XM Album Art On Channel Off Air: This channel is

or Off not currently in service. Tune in to
XM stations are organized in
another channel.
categories. 1. From the Home Page press the
Config screen button or the Channel Unauth: This channel is
To customize which XM categories
CONFIG button on the faceplate. blocked or cannot be received with
are used and displayed in the
your XM subscription package.
system, see “Adding or Removing 2. Select Radio Settings from the
XM Categories” following. Config Menu list. Channel Unavailable: This
previously assigned channel is no
Adding or Removing 3. Select XM Album Art to turn on longer assigned. Tune to another
Categories or off. station.
1. From the Home Page press the XM Messages No Artist Info: The system is
Config screen button or the XL (Explicit Language working properly. No artist
CONFIG button on the faceplate. Channels): These channels, or any information is available at this time
2. Select Radio Settings from the others, can be blocked by request, on this channel.
Config Menu list. by calling 1-800-929-2100 in the No Title Info: The system is
3. Select Add/Remove XM U.S., and 1-877-438-9677 in working properly. No song title
Categories. Canada. information is available at this time
XM Updating: The encryption code on this channel.
4. From the Add/Remove XM
Categories screen, select or in the receiver is being updated. No No CAT Info: The system is
deselect any category to be action is required. This process working properly. No category
used in XM mode. A checkmark should take no longer than information is available at this time
will indicate that the category is 30 seconds. on this channel.
selected. Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
No Information: The system is Check Antenna: If this message especially around tall buildings or
working properly. No text or does not clear within a short period hills, causing the sound to fade in
informational messages are of time, the receiver could have a and out.
available at this time on this fault. Consult with your dealer.
channel. AM
XM Not Available: If this message
No XM Signal: The system is does not clear within a short period The range for most AM stations is
working properly. The vehicle may of time, the receiver could have a greater than for FM, especially at
be in a location where the XM signal fault. Consult with your dealer. night. The longer range can cause
is being blocked. When the vehicle station frequencies to interfere with
each other. Static can occur when
is moved into an open area, the Radio Reception things like storms and power lines
signal should return.
Frequency interference and static interfere with radio reception. When
CAT Not Found: The system is can occur during normal radio this happens, try reducing the treble
working properly. There are no reception if items such as cell phone on the radio.
channels available for the selected chargers, vehicle convenience
category. accessories, and external electronic XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, devices are plugged into the XM Satellite Radio Service gives
this message alternates with the XM accessory power outlet. If there is digital radio reception from coast to
radio eight‐digit radio ID label. This interference or static, unplug the coast in the 48 contiguous United
label is needed to activate the item from the accessory power States, and in Canada. Just as
service. outlet. with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
Unknown: If this message is FM causing the sound to fade in and
received when tuned to channel 0,
FM signals only reach about 16 to out. In addition, traveling or standing
there could be a receiver fault.
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the under heavy foliage, bridges,
Consult with your dealer.
radio has a built-in electronic circuit garages, or tunnels may cause loss
that automatically works to reduce of the XM signal for a period of time.
interference, some static can occur,
Cellular Phone Usage Audio Players There can be increased skipping,

difficulty in recording tracks,
Cellular phone usage can cause
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
interference with the vehicle's radio. CD Player difficulty in loading and ejecting.
The player can be used for CD and If these problems occur, check the
Multi-Band Antenna MP3 audio. disc for damage or try a known
The multi-band antenna is on the good disc.
With the vehicle on, insert a disc
roof of the vehicle. The antenna is into the slot, label side up. The To avoid damage to the CD player:
used for the AM‐FM radio, OnStar, player pulls it in and begins playing.
the XM Satellite Radio Service
. Do not use scratched or
While playing, the navigation damaged discs.
System, and GPS (Global system is available.
Positioning System), if the vehicle . Do not apply labels to discs. The
has these features. Keep the The system is capable of playing: labels could get caught in the
antenna clear of obstructions for . Most audio CDs player.
clear reception.
. CD-R . Insert only one disc at a time.
. CD-RW . Keep the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
. MP3 or unprotected WMA debris.
formats
. Use a marking pen to label the
When playing any compatible top of the disc.
recordable disc, the sound quality
can be reduced due to disc quality,
the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been
recorded, or the way the disc has
been handled.
Loading and Ejecting Discs 2. From the CD screen, press the SEEK [ (Seek Up):
Menu screen button to display
To load a disc: . Press to seek to the next track.
the menu options.
1. Turn the vehicle on. . Press and hold to fast forward
3. Press to select the desired
2. Insert a disc into the slot, label option. through a track. Release the
side up. The player pulls it in the button to return to playing
On the CD main page a track speed. Elapsed time displays.
rest of the way. If the disc is
number displays at the beginning of
damaged or improperly loaded, TUNE/MENU: Turn to the right or
each track. Song, Artist, and Album
there is an error and the disc left to select the next or previous
information displays when available.
ejects. track. Press this knob to select the
Use the following controls to play ist. If a track is selected from the
The disc automatically plays once
the disc: menu, the system plays the track
loaded.
k (Play/Pause): Use to start, and returns to the CD screen.
Press X to eject a disc from the pause, or resume play.
CD player. If the disc is not removed Error Messages
within a short period of time, it is r SEEK (Seek Down): If Disc Error displays and/or the disc
automatically pulled back into the . Press to seek to the beginning comes out, it could be for one of the
player. of the current or previous track. following reasons:
If the track has been playing for .
Playing an Audio CD less than five seconds, it seeks
The disc has an invalid or
unknown format.
1. Press the CD screen button on to the previous track. If longer
the Home Page or select CD than five seconds, the current . The disc is very hot. Try the disc
from the source pop-up to track starts from the beginning. again when the temperature
display the CD main page. returns to normal.
. Press and hold to fast reverse
through a track. Release the . The road is very rough. Try the
button to return to playing disc again when the road is
speed. Elapsed time displays. smoother.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, The guidelines are: MP3 Music Menu
or upside down. . Sampling rate: 8 kHz, 16 kHz, Press the Menu screen button while
. The air is very humid. Try the 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, that source is active to access
disc again later. 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz. the menu.
. There was a problem while . Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24, Press any of the following buttons
burning the disc. 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, on the MP3 Menu:
. The label is caught in the CD 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256, Shuffle Songs: Press to play the
player. and 320 kbps. tracks randomly. Press again to stop
If the CD is not playing correctly, for . Maximum number of folders: shuffle.
any other reason, try a known 255 with a maximum hierarchy Playlists: Press to view the
good CD. of eight folders. playlists stored on the disc. Select a
If any error continues, contact your . Maximum of 1,024 files on playlist to view the list of all songs in
dealer. a disc. that playlist. There might be a delay
. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW before the list displays. Select a
MP3 with a maximum capacity of song from the list to begin playback.
700 MB. Artists: Press to view the list of
Playing an MP3 CD artists stored on the disc. Select an
. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/
MP3 Format Genre information requires a CD artist name to view a list of all songs
to be fully scanned before the by the artist. There might be a delay
There are guidelines that must be before the list displays. Select a
met when creating an MP3 disc; music navigator works with
these menus. Disc scanning song from the list to begin playback.
otherwise the CD might not play.
does not occur when the disc is Albums: Press to view the albums
being played. on the disc. Select the album to
view a list of all songs on the album.
There might be a delay before the Empty Folders Preprogrammed Playlists

list displays. Select a song from the If a root directory or folder is empty The radio recognizes
list to begin playback. or contains only folders, the player preprogrammed playlists; however,
Song Titles: Press to display a list advances to the next folder in the there is no editing capability. These
of all songs on the disc. Songs are file structure that contains a playlists are treated as special
displayed as stored on the disc. compressed audio file. The empty folders containing compressed
There might be a delay before the folder(s) are not displayed or audio song files.
list displays. To begin playback, numbered.
select a song from the list.
No Folder Auxiliary Devices
Genres: Press to view the genres. This vehicle has an auxiliary input
Select a genre to view a list of all When the CD only contains
compressed audio files without any jack in the center console. Possible
songs of that genre. Select a song auxiliary audio sources include:
from the list to begin playback. folders or playlists, all files are
under the root folder. . Laptop computer
Folders: Press to open a folder list
to access the files within the folder File System and Naming . MP3 player
structure. The song titles, artists, albums, and . Tape player
Root Directory genres are taken from the file's ID3 This jack is not an audio output.
tag and are only displayed if present Do not plug headphones into the
The root directory is treated as a in the tag. If a song title is not auxiliary input jack. Drivers are
folder. All files contained directly present in the ID3 tag, the radio encouraged to set up any auxiliary
under the root directory are displays the file name as the device while the vehicle is in
accessed prior to any root directory track name. P (Park).
folders.
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable USB MP3 Player and USB Drives
. WMA with Digital Rights
from the auxiliary device to the Management (DRM) from online
. The USB MP3 players and USB music shops cannot be played.
auxiliary input jack. When a drives connected must comply
device is connected, the system WMA files can only be played
with the USB Mass Storage back safely if they were created
automatically begins playing audio Class specification (USB MSC).
from the device over the vehicle with Windows Media Player
speakers. . Only USB MP3 players and USB version 8 or later.
drives with a sector size or ‐ Applicable playlist extensions
If an auxiliary device has already 512 bytes and a cluster size
been connected, but a different are: .m3u, .pls.
smaller or equal to 32 kbytes in
source is currently active, press the the FAT32 file system are ‐ Playlist entries must be in the
Now Playing screen button on the supported. form of relative paths.
Home Page, then press Source
repeatedly to cycle through all of the . Hard disk drives are not ‐ The system attribute for
available audio source screens, until supported. folders/files that contain audio
the AUX source screen is selected. data must not be set.
. The following restrictions apply
for the data stored on a USB To play a USB device, do one of the
Playing from a USB following:
MP3 player or USB device:
A USB mass storage device or . Connect the USB and it begins
Microsoft Transfer Protocal (MTP) ‐ Maximum folder structure
depth: 11 levels. to play.
device can be connected to the
USB port. ‐ Maximum number of MP3/
. Press the Now Playing screen
WMA files that can be button on the Home Page, then
The USB port is in the center press the SOURCE button on
console. displayed: 1,000
the faceplate repeatedly to cycle
The USB icon displays when the through all of the available audio
USB device is connected. source screens, until the USB
source screen is selected.
While the USB source is active, use USB Menu There might be a delay before the
the following to operate USB Press any of the following buttons list displays. Select a song from the
function: on the USB Menu: list to begin playback.
k (Play/Pause): Press to start, Shuffle Songs: Press to play the Song Titles: Press to display a list
pause, or resume play of the current tracks randomly. Press again to stop of all songs on the USB. Songs are
media source. shuffle. displayed as stored on the disc.
r SEEK (Seek Down): There might be a delay before the
Playlists: Press to view the list displays. To begin playback,
1. Press to seek to the beginning playlists stored on the USB. Select select a song from the list.
of the current or previous track. a playlist to view the list of all songs
If the track has been playing for in that playlist. There might be a Genres: Press to view the genres
less than five seconds, the delay before the list displays. on the USB. Select a genre to view
previous track plays. If playing Select a song from the list to begin a list of all songs of that genre.
longer than five seconds, the playback. Select a song from the list to begin
current track restarts. playback.
Artists: Press to view the list of
2. Press and hold to reverse artists stored on the USB. Select Folders: Press to open a folder list
quickly through playback. an artist name to view a list of all to access the files within the folder
albums by the artist. There might be structure.
3. Release to return to playing
speed. Elapsed time displays. a delay before the list displays. To File System and Naming
select a song, touch All Songs then
The song titles, artists, albums, and
SEEK [ (Seek Up): select a song or touch an album
genres are taken from the file's ID3
then select a song from the list to
1. Press to seek to the next track. begin playback. tag and are only displayed if present
in the tag. If a song title is not
2. Press and hold to advance Albums: Press to view the albums present in the ID3 tag, the radio
quickly through playback. on the USB. Select the album to
Release to return to playing displays the file name as the
view a list of all songs on the album. track name.
speed. Elapsed time displays.
Playing from an iPod® To connect and control an iPod, iPod Menu

connect one end of the standard Shuffle Songs: Press to play the
This feature supports the following
iPod USB cable to the iPod's dock tracks randomly. Press again to stop
iPod models:
connector. Connect the other end to shuffle.
. iPod nano (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and the USB port in the center console.
4th generation) Press any of the following buttons
iPod music information displays on the iPod Menu:
. iPod with video (5.0 and on the radio’s display and begins
5.5 generation). Video is not playing through the vehicle’s audio Playlists:
shown; only audio is supported. system. 1. Press to view the playlists stored
. iPod classic (6th generation) The iPod battery recharges on the iPod.
. iPod touch (1st and 2nd automatically while the vehicle is on. 2. Select a playlist name to view a
generation) When the vehicle is off while an list of all songs in the playlist.
iPod is connected using the iPod
There may be problems with USB cable, the iPod battery stops 3. Select the desired song from the
operation and function in the charging and the iPod automatically list to begin playback.
following situations: turns off. Artists:
. When connecting an iPod on If the iPod is an unsupported 1. Press to view the artists stored
which a more recent version of model, it can still be listened to in on the iPod.
the firmware is installed than is the vehicle by connecting to the
supported by the infotainment auxiliary input jack using a standard 2. Select an artist name to view a
system. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. list of all songs by the artist.
. When connecting an iPod on 3. Select the desired song from the
which firmware from other list to begin playback.
providers is installed.
Albums: 3. Select an artist to view albums Audio Books:

1. Press to view the albums stored or All Songs to view all songs of 1. Press to view the audio books
on the iPod. that genre. stored on the iPod.
2. Select an album name to view a 4. Select album to view songs. 2. Select an audio book name to
list of all songs on the album or 5. Select the desired song from the view a list of all audio books.
select All Songs to view all list to begin playback. 3. Select the desired audio book
songsby the artist. Podcasts: from the list to begin playback.
3. Select the desired song from the
list to begin playback.
1. Press to view the podcasts Playing from an iPhone®
stored on the iPod.
Song Titles: This feature supports the following
2. Select a podcast name to play iPhone model:
1. Press to view a list of all songs the desired podcast.
stored on the iPod.
. iPhone (3g – 3gs)
Composers:
2. Select the desired song from the To use the iPhone, follow the same
1. Press to view the composers instructions as stated earlier for
list to begin playback. stored on the iPod. using an iPod.
Genres: 2. Select a composer name to
1. Press to view the genres stored view a list of all songs by that
on the iPod. composer.
2. Select a genre name to view a 3. Select the desired song from the
list of artists of that genre. list to begin playback.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Phone The system may not work with
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to
Bluetooth (Overview) this section for more information. make and receive phone calls. The
For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice infotainment system and voice
Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use recognition are used to control
interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the the system. The system can be
allowing: address book or contact list. See used while in ON/RUN or ACC/
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section ACCESSORY. The range of the
. Placement and receipt of calls in Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
a hands-free mode. for more information.
(30 ft). Not all phones support all
. Sharing of the cell phone’s
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone functions and not all phones work
address book or contact list with Numbers” in this section for with the Bluetooth system. See
the vehicle. more information. www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information about compatible
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
{ WARNING phones.
parked: When using a cell phone, it can Bluetooth Controls
. Become familiar with the be distracting to look too long or Use the buttons located on the
features of the cell phone. too often at the screen of the infotainment system and the
Organize the phone book and phone or the infotainment steering wheel to operate the
contact lists clearly and delete (navigation) system. Taking your Bluetooth system.
duplicate or rarely used entries. eyes off the road too long or
If possible, program speed dial too often could cause a crash Steering Wheel Controls
or other shortcuts. resulting in injury or death. Focus b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
. Review the controls and your attention on driving. answer incoming calls, confirm
operation of the infotainment system information, and start voice
system. recognition.
$ / i (End Call/Mute): Press to Audio System Bluetooth (Infotainment

end a call, reject a call, or cancel an When using the Bluetooth system, Controls)
operation. sound comes through the vehicle's
For information about how to
Infotainment System Controls front audio system speakers and
navigate the menu system using the
overrides the audio system. Use
For information about how to infotainment controls, see Overview
the VOL/ O knob during a call to on page 7‑2.
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Overview change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in Pairing
on page 7‑2.
memory for later calls. The system A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
V (Phone): Press to enter the maintains a minimum volume level. must be paired to the Bluetooth
Phone main menu.
Other Information system and then connected to the
Voice Recognition vehicle before it can be used. See
The Bluetooth® word mark and your cell phone manufacturer's user
The voice recognition system uses logos are owned by the Bluetooth® guide for Bluetooth functions before
commands to control the system SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
and dial phone numbers. by General Motors is under license. phone is not connected, calls will be
Noise: The system may not Other trademarks and trade names made using OnStar Hands‐Free
recognize voice commands if there are those of their respective owners. Calling, if available. See OnStar
is too much background noise. See Radio Frequency Statement on Overview on page 14‑1 for more
When to Speak: A tone sounds to page 13‑16 for information information.
indicate that the system is ready for regarding Part 15 of the Federal
a voice command. Wait for the tone Communications Commission (FCC)
and then speak. rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
Pairing Information Pairing a Phone vehicle. The system responds

. A Bluetooth phone with MP3 1. Press the CONFIG button. with “<Phone name> has been
capability cannot be paired to successfully paired” after the
2. Select Phone Settings or pairing process is complete.
the vehicle as a phone and an Bluetooth Settings.
MP3 player at the same time. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to pair
3. Select Bluetooth. additional phones.
. Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system. 4. Select Pair Device (Phone). Listing All Paired and Connected
A four‐digit Personal Phones
. The pairing process is disabled Identification Number (PIN)
when the vehicle is moving. appears on the display. The PIN 1. Press the CONFIG button.
. Pairing only needs to be is used in Step 6. 2. Select Phone Settings or
completed once, unless the 5. Start the pairing process on the Bluetooth Settings.
pairing information on the cell cell phone to be paired to the 3. Select Bluetooth.
phone changes or the cell phone vehicle. See the cell phone
is deleted from the system. 4. Select Device List.
manufacturer's user guide for
. Only one paired cell phone can information on this process. Deleting a Paired Phone
be connected to the Bluetooth 6. Locate the device named “Your 1. Press the CONFIG button.
system at a time. Vehicle” in the list on the cell
. 2. Select Phone Settings or
If multiple paired cell phones are phone. Follow the instructions
Bluetooth Settings.
within range of the system, the on the cell phone to enter the
system connects to the first PIN provided in Step 4. After the 3. Select Bluetooth.
available paired cell phone in the PIN is successfully entered, the 4. Select Device List.
order that they were first paired system prompts you to provide a
to the system. To link to a name for the paired cell phone. 5. Select the phone to delete and
different paired phone, see This name will be used to follow the on screen prompts.
“Linking to a Different Phone” indicate which phones are
later in this section. paired and connected to the
Linking to a Different Phone or contact your wireless provider to button to scroll through the
To link to a different phone, the new find out if this feature is supported entire list of names/numbers in
phone must be in the vehicle and by your phone. the phone book.
available to be connected to the When a cell phone supports the 4. Select the name or number you
Bluetooth system before the phone book feature, the Phone want to call.
process is started. Book and Call Lists menus are To make a call using the Call
1. Press the CONFIG button. automatically available. Lists menu:
2. Select Phone Settings or The Phone Book menu allows you 1. Press the PHONE button once
Bluetooth Settings. to access the phone book stored in or twice (depending on the
the cell phone to make a call. radio).
3. Select Bluetooth.
The Call Lists menu allows you to 2. Select Call Lists.
4. Select Device List. access the phone numbers from the
5. Select the new phone to link to Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and 3. Select the Incoming Calls,
and follow the on screen Missed Calls menus on your cell Outgoing Calls, or Missed
prompts. phone to make a call. Calls list.
If delete is selected, the To make a call using the Phone 4. Select the name or number you
highlighted phone will be Book menu: want to call.
deleted. 1. Press the PHONE button once Making a Call
or twice (depending on the
Making a Call Using radio).
To make a call:
Phone Book 1. Press the PHONE button once
2. Select Phone Book.
For cell phones that support the or twice (depending on the
phone book feature, the Bluetooth 3. Search through the list by radio).
system can use the contacts stored selecting the letter group the
2. Enter the phone number.
on your cell phone to make calls. phone book entry begins with,
See your cell phone's owner's guide or press the TUNE/MENU 3. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Accepting or Declining a Call Declining a Call 4. After the call has been placed,
Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to turn or press the TUNE/MENU
When an incoming call is received,
“Decline” and press the TUNE/ knob and choose Merge Calls.
the infotainment system mutes and
a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. MENU knob to decline the call. 5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat Steps 1
Accepting a Call Switching Between Calls (Call through 4. The number of callers
Waiting Calls Only) that can be added is limited by
Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to
“Answer” and press the TUNE/ To switch between calls: your wireless service carrier.
MENU knob to accept the call. 1. Turn or press the TUNE/ Ending a Call
Declining a Call MENU knob.
Turn or press the TUNE/MENU
Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to 2. Select Switch Call from knob and select Hang Up.
“Decline” and press the TUNE/ the menu.
MENU knob to decline the call. Muting a Call
Conference Calling
Call Waiting To Mute a Call
Conference calling and three‐way
Call waiting must be supported on calling must be supported on the Turn or press the TUNE/MENU
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by Bluetooth phone and enabled by the knob and select Mute Call.
the wireless service carrier to work. wireless service carrier to work. To Cancel Mute
Accepting a Call To start a conference while in a Turn or press the TUNE/MENU
current call: knob and select Mute Call.
Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to
“Answer” and press the TUNE/ 1. Turn or press the TUNE/
MENU knob to accept the call. MENU knob.
2. Select Enter Number.
3. Enter the phone number and
then select Call.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency vehicle before it can be used. See

. If multiple paired cell phones are
(DTMF) Tones your cell phone manufacturer's user within range of the system, the
guide for Bluetooth functions before system connects to the first
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth available paired cell phone in the
send numbers during a call. This is phone is not connected, calls will be order that they were first paired
used when calling a menu‐driven made using OnStar Hands‐Free to the system. To link to a
phone system. Calling, if available. See OnStar different paired phone, see
1. Turn or press the TUNE/MENU Overview on page 14‑1 for more “Linking to a Different Phone”
knob and select Enter Number. information. later in this section.
2. Enter the phone number. Pairing Information Pairing a Phone
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3 1. Press b / g. The system
Bluetooth (Voice capability cannot be paired to responds “Ready,” followed by
Recognition) the vehicle as a phone and an a tone.
MP3 player at the same time.
Using Voice Recognition 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
. Up to five cell phones can be
To use voice recognition, press 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
paired to the Bluetooth system.
the b / g button located on the with instructions and a four‐digit
. The pairing process is disabled Personal Identification Number
steering wheel. Use the commands when the vehicle is moving. (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
below for the various voice features.
For additional information, say . Pairing only needs to be 4. Start the pairing process on the
“Help” while you are in a voice completed once, unless the cell phone that you want to pair.
recognition menu. pairing information on the cell For help with this process, see
phone changes or the cell phone your cell phone manufacturer's
Pairing is deleted from the system. user guide.
A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone . Only one paired cell phone can
must be paired to the Bluetooth be connected to the Bluetooth
system and then connected to the system at a time.
5. Locate the device named “Your Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone
Vehicle” in the list on the cell Phones To connect to a different cell phone,
phone. Follow the instructions The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
on the cell phone to enter the paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the
PIN provided in Step 3. After the also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all the available cell
PIN is successfully entered, the system responds with “is connected” phones were paired. Depending on
system prompts you to provide a after that phone name. which cell phone you want to
name for the paired cell phone. connect to, you may have to use
This name will be used to 1. Press b / g. The system this command several times.
indicate which phones are responds “Ready,” followed by
paired and connected to the a tone. 1. Press b / g. The system
vehicle. The system responds responds “Ready,” followed by
with “<Phone name> has been 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
a tone.
successfully paired” after the 3. Say “List.”
pairing process is complete. 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Deleting a Paired Phone 3. Say “Change phone.”
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones. If the phone name you want to . If another cell phone is
delete is unknown, see “Listing All found, the response will be
Paired and Connected Phones.”
“<Phone name> is now
1. Press b / g. The system connected.”
responds “Ready,” followed by . If another cell phone is not
a tone. found, the original phone
2. Say “Bluetooth.” remains connected.
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
for which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
Numbers that you want to store. After
1. Press b / g. The system each digit is entered, the system
The system can store up to responds “Ready,” followed by repeats back the digit it heard
30 phone numbers as name tags in a tone. followed by a tone. After the last
the Hands‐Free Directory that is digit has been entered, say
2. Say “Store.”
shared between the Bluetooth and “Store,” and then follow the
OnStar systems. 3. Say the phone number or group directions given by the system to
of numbers you want to store all save a name tag for this number.
The following commands are used
at once with no pauses, then
to delete and store phone numbers.
follow the directions given by the Using the “Delete” Command
Store: This command will store a system to save a name tag for
phone number, or a group of this number. 1. Press b / g. The system
numbers as a name tag. responds “Ready,” followed by
Using the “Digit Store” Command a tone.
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a If an unwanted number is 2. Say “Delete.”
name tag by entering the digits one recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the last 3. Say the name tag you want to
at a time. delete.
number.
Delete: This command is used to Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
delete individual name tags. To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say Command
Delete All Name Tags: This “Verify” at any time. This command deletes all stored
command deletes all stored name name tags in the Hands Free
tags in the Hands‐Free Calling 1. Press b / g. The system
Calling Directory and the
Directory and the Destinations responds “Ready,” followed by Destinations Directory.
Directory. a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store.”
To delete all name tags: Digit Dial: This command allows a If an unwanted number is
phone number to be dialed by recognized by the system, say
1. Press b / g. The system entering the digits one at a time. “Clear” at any time to clear the last
responds “Ready,” followed by number.
a tone. Re‐dial: This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell To hear all of the numbers
2. Say “Delete all name tags.” phone. recognized by the system, say
Listing Stored Numbers “Verify” at any time.
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
The list command will list all the Command 1. Press b / g. The system
stored numbers and name tags. responds “Ready,” followed by
1. Press b / g. The system
a tone.
Using the “List” Command responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone. 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
responds “Ready,” followed by
that you want to dial. After each
a tone. 3. Say the entire number without
digit is entered, the system
2. Say “Directory.” pausing or say the name tag.
repeats back the digit it heard
3. Say “Hands Free Calling.” Once connected, the person called followed by a tone. After the
will be heard through the audio last digit has been entered,
4. Say “List.” speakers. say “Dial.”
Making a Call Using the “Digit Dial” Command Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
Calls can be made using the The digit dial command allows a
speakers.
following commands. phone number to be dialed by
Dial or Call: The dial or call entering the digits one at a time.
command can be used After each digit is entered, the
interchangeably to dial a phone system repeats back the digit it
number or a stored name tag. heard followed by a tone.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
1. Press b / g. The system Call waiting must be supported on
to be called.
responds “Ready,” followed by the cell phone and enabled by the
a tone. wireless service carrier. 4. Once the call is connected,
press b / g to link all callers
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.” The . Press b / g to answer an
system dials the last number together.
incoming call when another call
called from the connected cell is active. The original call is Ending a Call
phone. placed on hold.
Once connected, the person called
Press $ / i to end a call.
. Press b / g again to return to
will be heard through the audio the original call. Muting a Call
speakers.
. To ignore the incoming call, no During a call, all sounds from inside
Receiving a Call action is required. the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
When an incoming call is received, . Press $ / i to disconnect the cannot hear them.
the audio system mutes and a ring
current call and switch to the call
tone is heard in the vehicle.
on hold. To mute a call, press b / g, and
. Press b / g to answer the call. then say “Mute Call.”
Three‐Way Calling
To cancel mute, press b / g, and
. Press $ / i to ignore a call. Three‐way calling must be then say “Un‐mute Call.”
supported on the cell phone and
enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
1. While on a call, press b / g.
2. Say “Three‐way call.”
Transferring a Call To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth 3. Say “Voice.” The system
System from a Cell Phone responds “OK, accessing
Audio can be transferred between
During a call with the audio on the <phone name>.”
the Bluetooth system and the cell
phone. cell phone, press b / g. The audio The cell phone's normal prompt
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio messages will go through their cycle
The cell phone must be paired and
does not transfer to the vehicle, according to the phone's operating
connected with the Bluetooth
use the audio transfer feature on the instructions.
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process cell phone. See your cell phone Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
can take up to two minutes after the manufacturer's user guide for more
(DTMF) Tones
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. information.
The Bluetooth system can send
To Transfer Audio from the Voice Pass-Thru numbers and the numbers stored as
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone Voice pass‐thru allows access to the name tags during a call. You can
During a call with the audio in the voice recognition commands on the use this feature when calling a
vehicle: cell phone. See your cell phone menu‐driven phone system.
manufacturer's user guide to see if Account numbers can also be
1. Press b / g. the cell phone supports this feature. stored for use.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” To access contacts stored in the cell
phone:
a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Sending a Number or Name Tag Trademarks and

During a Call
License Agreements
a tone.
2. Say “Dial.”
Manufactured under license from
3. Say the number or name tag Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
to send. double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Clearing the System Manufactured under license
Unless information is deleted out of under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
will be retained indefinitely. This 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
includes all saved name tags in worldwide patents issued &
the phone book and phone pairing pending. DTS and the Symbol are
information. For information on how registered trademarks and DTS
to delete this information, see the Digital Surround and the DTS logos
are trademarks of DTS Inc. All MP3PRO audio decoding
previous sections on “Deleting a technology licensed from Coding
Paired Phone” and “Deleting Rights Reserved.
Technologies, Fraunhofer IIS and
Name Tags.” Thompson.
and related content delivery. Regarding the use of Gracenote

For more information, visit Music Recognition Service, when
www.gracenote.com. this product is used, it is necessary
CD and music data from Gracenote, to agree to the following articles.
Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote® End User License
Gracenote. One or more patents
owned by Gracenote apply to This application or device contains
“Made for iPod” means that an software from Gracenote, Inc. of
electronic accessory has been this product and service. See
the Gracenote website for a Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).
designed to connect specifically The software from Gracenote (the
to iPod and has been certified by non-exhaustive list of applicable
Gracenote patents. Gracenote and “Gracenote Software”) enables
the developer to meet Apple this application to perform disc
performance standards. CDDB, MusicID, Media VOCS, the
Gracenote logo and logotype, and and/or file identification and obtain
iPod is a trademark of Apple the “Powered by Gracenote” logo music-related information, including
Computer, Inc., registered in the are either registered trademarks or name, artist, track, and title
U.S. and other countries. trademarks of Gracenote in the information (“Gracenote Data”)
United States and/or other from online servers or embedded
countries. databases (collectively, “Gracenote
Servers”) and to perform other
If you require more information functions. You may use Gracenote
regarding the use of the Data only by means of the intended
Gracenote Service, visit: End-User functions of this
www.gracenote.com/corporate. application or device. You agree that
For the data provided by you will use Gracenote Data, the
Music and video recognition Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
technology and related data Gracenote® Music Recognition
Service, the content is not Servers for your own personal
are provided by Gracenote®. non-commercial use only. You agree
Gracenote is the industry standard necessarily guaranteed 100%.
not to assign, copy, transfer or
in music recognition technology
transmit the Gracenote Software or Under no circumstances will Gracenote reserves the right to
any Gracenote Data to any third Gracenote become liable for any delete data from the Gracenote
party. payment to you for any information Servers or to change data
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR that you provide. You agree that categories for any cause that
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its Gracenote deems sufficient.
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR rights under this Agreement against No warranty is made that the
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT you directly in its own name. Gracenote Software or Gracenote
AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED The Gracenote service uses a Servers are error-free or that
HEREIN. You agree that your unique identifier to track queries for functioning of Gracenote Software
non-exclusive license to use the statistical purposes. or Gracenote Servers will be
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote The purpose of a randomly uninterrupted.
Software, and Gracenote Servers assigned numeric identifier is to Gracenote is not obligated to
will terminate if you violate these allow the Gracenote service to provide you with new enhanced or
restrictions. If your license count queries without knowing additional data types or categories
terminates, you agree to cease any anything about who you are. For that Gracenote may provide in the
and all use of the Gracenote Data, more information, see the web page future and is free to discontinue its
the Gracenote Software, and for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for services at any time.
Gracenote Servers. the Gracenote service. Gracenote disclaims all warranties
Gracenote reserves all rights in The Gracenote Software and each express or implied, including,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote item of Gracenote Data are licensed but not limited to, implied
Software, and the Gracenote to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes warranties of merchantability,
Servers, including all ownership no representations or warranties, fitness for a particular purpose,
rights. express or implied, regarding the title, and non-infringement.
accuracy of any Gracenote Data
from in the Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote does not warrant the

results that will be obtained by your
use of the Gracenote software or
any Gracenote server. In no case
will Gracenote be liable for any
consequential or incidental
damages or for any lost profits or
lost revenues.
Portions of this software are
copyright © 2008 The FreeType
Project (www.freetype.org). All rights
reserved.
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control running the engine, even if the

high voltage battery is adequately
Systems charged. Under these conditions,
the engine will start and use fuel.
Climate Control Systems
Automatic Climate Control Automatic Climate Make sure there is fuel in the tank.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Control System Do not allow the vehicle to remain
in extreme temperatures for long
Air Vents The climate control buttons and the periods without being driven or
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 touch screen are used to adjust the being plugged in.
heating, cooling, and ventilation.
The vehicle may require the use
of an auxiliary heat source under
certain cold conditions. This
provides additional heating and
defrost capability obtained by
8-2 Climate Controls
E. Auto (Automatic Operation)

F. Rear Window Defogger
G. Manual Fan Control
Climate Control Buttons
A. Temperature Control C. Defrost

B. Driver and Passenger Heated D. Climate
Seats
Climate Control Touch Screen

The climate mode, fan, air delivery,
recirculation, and auto heated seats
are controlled by pressing the
CLIMATE button on the center stack
and viewing information in the
center stack display.
Climate Mode Operation
There are three climate mode
settings: Fan Only, ECO, and
Comfort. These settings adjust the
impact the climate control system
has on the vehicle's electric range
or fuel economy.
To select a climate mode:
Climate Touch Screen Controls 1. Press CLIMATE on the center
stack.
A. Driver and Passenger Auto F. Climate Modes: Fan Only, ECO, 2. Press the climate mode button
Heated Seats Comfort on the touch screen. The climate
mode will be lit.
B. Air Delivery Mode Controls G. Climate Power Gauge
C. Auto Recirculation H. Manual Fan Control
D. Manual Recirculation I. Temperature Setting Display
E. Outside Air Temperature J. Air Conditioning Indicator
Display K. Heat Status Indicator
Fan Only Mode: The air Air Quality” under Vehicle

conditioning and electric heat are Personalization on page 5‑53 for
turned off. As long as 0 is not more information on the Auto Defog
selected, the climate control settings selection. The air conditioning may
may not have a noticeable effect on also run if 0 is selected.
the vehicle electric range and fuel ECO Mode: The air conditioning
economy. and electric heat are controlled to Climate Power Gauge
When in Fan Only mode, the AUTO balance comfort with fuel economy. When the climate mode is changed,
indicator light will be off. When As long as 0 is not selected, the Climate Power gauge displays
AUTO is selected in Fan Only the vehicle electric range or fuel the impact that user setting changes
mode, the mode will change to economy will decrease less than in have on energy consumption. The
either ECO or Comfort. Comfort mode, but will result in higher the reading, the more energy
When in Fan Only mode, the air moderate comfort. is being used.
conditioning system may turn on Comfort Mode: The air
automatically if the high voltage conditioning and electric heat are
battery is being cooled. The climate controlled to reach the best comfort
control system could blow cold air. level based on the temperature
This is normal. To prevent cold air setting selected. In this mode,
from blowing into the interior, turn off vehicle electric range or fuel
the fan control and select the vent economy will decrease depending Air Conditioning/Heat Status
mode and manual recirculation on the amount of energy required to Indicators
mode, and close the air vents. reach the best comfort levels.
The air conditioning/heat status
When in Fan Only mode, if
displays when the air conditioning or
Auto Defog is enabled, the air
electric heat is being used.
conditioning and electric heat
may turn on when high humidity
conditions exist. See “Climate and
The air conditioning and electric fan speed, or recirculation setting is Defog off or on, see “Climate
heat could be on at the same time adjusted, the AUTO indicator turns and Air Quality” under Vehicle
when dehumidification is required in off and the selected settings display. Personalization on page 5‑53.
ECO or Comfort modes. For automatic operation: Manual Operation
In Fan Only mode, occasionally the
air conditioning and/or heating
1. Press AUTO. A (Fan Control): Press the fan
status will be on if the Auto Defog 2. Set the temperature. An initial control buttons or the touch screen
function is enabled and high setting of 23°C (74°F) is fan control, to increase or decrease
humidity is detected. See “Climate recommended. Allow the system the fan speed. The fan speed
and Air Quality” under Vehicle time to stabilize. Adjust the setting displays. Pressing either
Personalization on page 5‑53, for temperature as needed. button cancels automatic fan control
details on enabling or disabling the and the fan can be controlled
Q / R (Temperature Control): manually. Press AUTO to return to
Auto Defog function. Press to increase or decrease the automatic operation. Press the fan
The air conditioning may also run temperature. down button repeatedly to turn off
if 0 is selected, regardless of the Auto Defog: The system will the fan and the climate control
climate mode. monitor high humidity inside the system.
vehicle. When high humidity is If the fan is manually turned off
Automatic Operation detected, the climate control system while in ECO or Comfort mode, the
The system automatically controls may adjust to outside air supply and display will automatically change to
the fan speed, air delivery mode, turn on the air conditioner or the Fan Only mode. When the fan is
and recirculation to heat or cool the heater. The fan speed may slightly turned back on either by manually
vehicle to the selected temperature. increase to help prevent fogging. increasing fan speed or pressing
When the AUTO indicator light is When high humidity is no longer the AUTO button, the climate
on, the system is in full automatic detected, the system will return to mode will revert back to ECO or
operation. If the air delivery mode, its prior operation. To turn Auto Comfort mode.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Press 0 (Defrost): Air is directed to h (Manual Recirculation):
CLIMATE to select the Climate the windshield. The windshield is Press to alternate between
touch screen. Press the air delivery cleared of fog or frost more quickly. recirculating air inside the vehicle
mode touch screen button to Selecting 0 will disable automatic or pulling in outside air. When
change the direction of the airflow. selected, the touch screen button
control and the AUTO button
The selected air delivery mode lights up to indicate that air is being
indicator will not be lit.
button is lit. Pressing any of the air recirculated. This helps to quickly
delivery buttons cancels automatic Selecting 0 again will return to the cool the air inside the vehicle or
air delivery control and the direction previous climate settings. prevent outside air and odors from
of the airflow can be controlled entering.
manually. Press AUTO to return to For best results, clear all snow and
automatic operation. ice from the windshield before Pressing this button cancels
defrosting. automatic recirculation. Press AUTO
To change the current mode, select or AUTO h to return to automatic
one of the following: If 0 is selected in Fan Only or
operation; recirculation runs
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the ECO mode, air conditioning or
automatically as needed.
instrument panel outlets. electric heat may turn on and have
a noticeable effect on vehicle Manual recirculation mode is not
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided electric range and fuel economy. available when in Defrost or Defog
between the instrument panel modes.
outlets and the floor outlets. AUTO h (Auto Recirculation):
Press to allow the system to M / L (Manual Heated Seats): If
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the automatically choose the air supply available, the controls are on the
floor outlets. mode for best performance in center stack. To operate, the vehicle
- (Defog): Air is directed to the terms of comfort, efficiency, and must be on.
windshield and floor outlets. Clears defogging. Air is recirculated or Press M or L to heat the driver
the windows of fog or moisture. outside air is pulled into the vehicle. or passenger seat cushion and
The touch screen button is lit. seatback. For more information, see
Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7.
M AUTO/ L AUTO (Auto Heated The rear window defogger turns Remote Start: For vehicles with
Seats): If available, the controls off automatically after about this feature, the climate control
are on the touch screen on the five minutes. If turned on again, it system may be started by using the
center stack. runs for about five minutes before Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
turning off. The defogger can also transmitter. The climate control
Press the touch screen L AUTO be turned off by turning the system will default to an appropriate
or M AUTO button. The button color vehicle off. heating or cooling mode. See
will change to green when this For vehicles with heated outside Remote Start on page 2‑7.
feature is on. When the vehicle is rearview mirrors, they turn on when The rear window defogger turns on
on, this feature will automatically the rear window defogger button is if it is cold outside.
activate the heated seats at the on and help to clear fog or frost from
level required by the vehicle's the surface of the mirror. See Compressor
interior temperature. The active Heated Mirrors on page 2‑16. The vehicle has an electric powered
high, medium, low, or off heated air conditioning compressor.
seat level will be indicated by the Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside This allows for continuous air
manual heated seat button lights on conditioning and/or high voltage
the center stack. Use the touch of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or battery cooling operation, without
screen buttons or the manual running the engine.
heated seat buttons on the center anything else that is sharp. This
stack to turn auto heated seats off. may damage the rear window The compressor operating speed
For more information, see Heated defogger grid and affect the is not tied to the engine speed, so
Front Seats on page 3‑7. radio's ability to pick up stations some noise may be heard from the
clearly. The repairs would not be compressor, especially when air
Rear Window Defogger covered by the vehicle warranty. conditioning use is high and the
= (Rear Window Defogger): engine has turned off. This is
Press to turn the rear window normal.
defogger on or off.
Sensors Humidity Sensor Air Vents

Solar Sensor The humidity sensor is near the
Use the louvers on the air vents to
base of the inside rearview mirror.
The solar sensor is located on top change the direction of the airflow.
The climate control system uses the
of the instrument panel, near the sensor information to adjust the Use the thumbwheels near each
windshield, where it monitors solar temperature and recirculation for vent to open and close off the
intensity. best comfort. airflow.
The climate control system uses Operation Tips
Outside Air Temperature Sensor
the sensor information to adjust
. Keep all outlets open whenever
the temperature, fan speed, The outside air temperature sensor
recirculation, and air delivery mode is located behind the front grille of possible for best system
for best comfort. the vehicle. The vehicle uses the performance.
sensor information to display . Keep the path under all seats
Do not cover the sensor; otherwise
outside air temperature. The climate clear of objects to help circulate
the automatic climate control system
control system uses the information the air inside the vehicle more
may not work properly.
to adjust the climate system effectively.
operation.
. Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Brakes
Antilock Brake
Operating Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
9-19
9-20
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . 9-30
Parking over Things Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . 9-32
Driving Information That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Ride Control Systems
Driving for Better Energy Electric Vehicle Operating Traction Control
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Modes System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Electronic Stability
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Electric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Extended Range Mode . . . . . . 9-22
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Cruise Control
Driver Selected Operating
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Out of Fuel/Engine Object Detection Systems
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-38
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Maintenance Modes . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Rear Vision
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Engine Exhaust Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-9 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Charging
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Running the Vehicle While Plug-In Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Delayed Charging
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Electric Drive Unit Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Starting and Operating Electric Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Charging Status
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16 Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Starting and Stopping the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9-2 Driving and Operating
Charge Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 Driving Information Acceleration/Braking/Coasting

Utility Interruption of Avoid unnecessary rapid
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Electrical Requirements for Driving for Better Energy accelerations and decelerations.
Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 Efficiency Electric range is maximized at
80 km/h (50 mph) and below. Higher
Fuel Use the following tips to help speeds use more energy and can
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 maximize energy efficiency and significantly reduce electric range.
Gasoline Specifications (U.S. range.
and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 Use cruise control when
California Fuel
Driving Style appropriate.
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 Efficiency Gauge (Instrument Plan ahead for decelerations and
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-54 Cluster) coast whenever possible. For
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 example, do not rush to traffic
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 The ball indicator should be kept
green and in the center of the signals.
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 gauge. Do not shift to N (Neutral) to coast.
Inefficient acceleration is indicated The vehicle recovers energy while
Towing when the ball turns yellow and coasting and braking in D (Drive)
General Towing travels above the center of the or L (Low).
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 gauge. Drive Mode and PRNDL Selection
Conversions and Add-Ons Aggressive braking is indicated Use Normal Mode when possible.
Add-On Electrical when the ball turns yellow and
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 travels below the center of the Sport Mode provides more
gauge. responsive acceleration than
Normal Mode but can reduce
efficiency.
Use Mountain Mode prior to Less energy is used at low fan Turn off the front and rear window
climbing long, steep grades in speeds. When using the fan: defog/defrost when they are no
mountainous areas. Be sure to . Fan Only is the most energy longer needed.
engage Mountain Mode before efficient climate setting as long Avoid driving with the windows open
starting to climb. Mountain Mode
reduces electric range and power as 0 is not selected. at highway speeds.
but may be needed to maintain . ECO is for moderate air Vehicle Charging/Maintenance
speeds above 96 km/h (60 mph) conditioning and heater
when climbing grades of 5% or Charging
operation and is the next
greater. most energy efficient setting as Keep the vehicle plugged in, even
Use L (Low) in heavy stop‐and‐go long as 0 is not selected when fully charged, to keep the
traffic or when traveling downhill. battery temperature ready for the
. Comfort provides the most next drive. This is important when
L (Low) requires less brake pedal
comfort but is the least energy outside temperatures are extremely
application and provides a
efficient. hot or cold.
controlled, efficient way to slow the
vehicle down. Use the auto heated seat feature Maintenance
instead of climate settings. Heating
Climate Setting the seat uses less energy than Always keep the tires properly
heating the vehicle interior. inflated and the vehicle properly
Using the heat and air conditioning
aligned.
systems decreases the energy Use remote start to heat or cool the
available for electric driving. interior when the vehicle is plugged The weight of excess cargo in the
in to maximize the electric range by vehicle affects efficiency and range.
Optimal energy efficiency is
utilizing electricity from the electrical Avoid carrying more than is needed.
achieved with the heat, air
conditioning, and fan turned off. outlet. If fuel is not regularly used, consider
In hot weather, avoid parking in keeping the fuel tank only one‐third
direct sunlight or use sunshades full. Excess fuel weight impacts
inside the vehicle. efficiency and range.
Use premium fuel. To avoid distracted driving, always

. Wait until the vehicle is parked
keep your eyes on the road, hands to retrieve items that have fallen
Avoid unnecessary use of electrical to the floor.
accessories. Power used for on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
functions other than propelling the . Do not use a phone in
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend
vehicle will reduce EV range. demanding driving situations. to children.
Using a rooftop carrier will reduce Use a hands-free method to . Keep pets in an appropriate
efficiency due to additional weight place or receive necessary carrier or restraint.
and drag. phone calls. . Avoid stressful conversations
. Watch the road. Do not while driving, whether with a
Distracted Driving read, take notes, or look up passenger or on a cell phone.
information on phones or
Distraction comes in many forms
and can take your focus from the
other electronic devices.
{ WARNING
task of driving. Exercise good . Designate a front seat
judgment and do not let other passenger to handle potential Taking your eyes off the road too
activities divert your attention distractions. long or too often could cause a
away from the road. Many local . crash resulting in injury or death.
Become familiar with vehicle
governments have enacted laws features before driving, such Focus your attention on driving.
regarding driver distraction. Become as programming favorite radio
familiar with the local laws in stations and adjusting climate Refer to the Infotainment section
your area. control and seat settings. for more information on using that
Program all trip information into system, including pairing and using
any navigation device prior to a cell phone.
driving.
If equipped, refer to the navigation
manual for information on that
system, including pairing and using
a cell phone.
Defensive Driving Braking

{ WARNING
Defensive driving means “always Braking action involves perception
expect the unexpected.” The first Drinking and then driving is time and reaction time. Deciding to
step in driving defensively is to wear very dangerous. Your reflexes, push the brake pedal is perception
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on perceptions, attentiveness, and time. Actually doing it is
page 3‑11. judgment can be affected by even reaction time.
. Assume that other road users a small amount of alcohol. You Average driver reaction time is
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and can have a serious — or even about three‐fourths of a second.
other drivers) are going to be fatal — collision if you drive after In that time, a vehicle moving at
careless and make mistakes. drinking. 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
Anticipate what they might do Do not drink and drive or ride with (66 ft), which could be a lot of
and be ready. a driver who has been drinking. distance in an emergency.
. Allow enough following distance Ride home in a cab; or if you are Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
between you and the driver in with a group, designate a driver include:
front of you. who will not drink. . Keep enough distance between
. Focus on the task of driving. you and the vehicle in front
Control of a Vehicle of you.
Drunk Driving . Avoid needless heavy braking.
Braking, steering, and accelerating
Death and injury associated with are important factors in helping to . Keep pace with traffic.
drinking and driving is a global control a vehicle while driving.
tragedy. If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. Doing so could make
the pedal harder to push down.
If the engine stops, there will be Curve Tips Off-Road Recovery

some power brake assist but it will . Take curves at a reasonable
be used when the brake is applied.
speed.
Once the power assist is used up, it
can take longer to stop and the . Reduce speed before entering a
brake pedal will be harder to push. curve.
. Maintain a reasonable steady
Steering speed through the curve.
Electric Power Steering . Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
Your vehicle has electric power
gently into the straightaway.
steering. It does not have power
steering fluid. Regular maintenance Steering in Emergencies
is not required. . There are some situations when
If power steering assist is lost due steering around a problem may The vehicle's right wheels can drop
to a system malfunction, the vehicle be more effective than braking. off the edge of a road onto the
can be steered, but may require shoulder while driving. Follow
increased effort.
. Holding both sides of the
steering wheel allows you to turn these tips:
See specific vehicle steering 180 degrees without removing 1. Ease off the accelerator and
messages under Vehicle Messages a hand. then, if there is nothing in the
on page 5‑45. way, steer the vehicle so that
. The Antilock Brake System
(ABS) allows steering while it straddles the edge of the
braking. pavement.
2. Turn the steering wheel about

. Acceleration Skid — too much control can be affected when
one-eighth of a turn, until the throttle causes the driving traction is reduced by water,
right front tire contacts the wheels to spin. snow, ice, gravel, or other
pavement edge. Defensive drivers avoid most skids material on the road. Learn to
3. Then turn the steering wheel to by taking reasonable care suited recognize warning clues — such
go straight down the roadway. to existing conditions, and by not as enough water, ice, or packed
overdriving those conditions. But snow on the road to make a
skids are always possible. mirrored surface — and slow
Loss of Control down when you have any doubt.
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
Skidding these suggestions: . Try to avoid sudden steering,
There are three types of skids that acceleration, or braking,
. Ease your foot off the including reducing vehicle
correspond to the vehicle's three accelerator pedal and quickly
control systems: speed by shifting to a lower
steer the way you want the gear. Any sudden changes
. Braking Skid — wheels are not vehicle to go. The vehicle may could cause the tires to slide.
rolling. straighten out. Be ready for a
second skid if it occurs. Remember: Antilock brakes help
. Steering or Cornering avoid only the braking skid.
Skid — too much speed or . Slow down and adjust your
steering in a curve causes tires driving according to weather
to slip and lose cornering force. conditions. Stopping distance
can be longer and vehicle
Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

Other Rainy Weather Tips
Rain and wet roads can reduce Besides slowing down, other wet
vehicle traction and affect your happens, you and other vehicle weather driving tips include:
ability to stop and accelerate. occupants could drown. Do not . Allow extra following distance.
Always drive slower in these types ignore police warnings and be
of driving conditions and avoid very cautious about trying to drive
. Pass with caution.
driving through large puddles and through flowing water. . Keep windshield wiping
deep‐standing or flowing water. equipment in good shape.
Hydroplaning . Keep the windshield washer fluid
{ WARNING Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
reservoir filled.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. can build up under the vehicle's . Have good tires with proper
They might not work as well in a tires so they actually ride on the tread depth. See Tires on
quick stop and could cause water. This can happen if the road is page 10‑40.
pulling to one side. You could wet enough and you are going fast . Turn off cruise control.
lose control of the vehicle. enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no Highway Hypnosis
After driving through a large contact with the road.
puddle of water or a car/vehicle Always be alert and pay attention
wash, lightly apply the brake There is no hard and fast rule about
to your surroundings while driving.
pedal until the brakes work hydroplaning. The best advice is to
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
normally. slow down when the road is wet.
safe place to park the vehicle
and rest.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
(Continued)
Other driving tips include:

. Pay attention to special road
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
. Keep the interior Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take
temperature cool. or with the vehicle turned off is appropriate action.
.
dangerous. The brakes will have
Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
to do all the work of slowing down Winter Driving
the vehicle and could become too
. Check the rearview mirror and hot. Hot brakes may not be able Driving on Snow or Ice
vehicle instruments often. to slow the vehicle enough to Drive carefully when there is snow
maintain speed and control. You or ice between the tires and the
Hill and Mountain Roads could crash. Always have the road, creating less traction or grip.
Driving on steep hills or through vehicle running and in gear Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
mountains is different than driving (preferably LOW range) when (32°F) when freezing rain begins to
on flat or rolling terrain. See going downhill. This will allow the fall, resulting in even less traction.
“Mountain Mode” under Driver electric drive unit to assist in Avoid driving on wet ice or in
Selected Operating Modes on slowing and maintaining speed. freezing rain until roads can be
page 9‑22. Tips for driving in these treated with salt or sand.
conditions include: . Stay in your own lane. Do not Drive with caution, whatever the
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in swing wide or cut across the condition. Accelerate gently so
good shape. center of the road. Drive at traction is not lost. Accelerating too
speeds that let you stay in your quickly causes the wheels to spin
. Check all fluid levels and brakes, and makes the surface under the
tires, cooling system, and own lane.
tires slick, so there is even less
electric drive unit. . Top of hills: Be traction.
. Keep the vehicle in gear when alert — something could
going down steep or long hills. be in your lane (stalled car,
accident).
Try not to break the fragile traction. If possible, use the Roadside
If you accelerate too fast, the drive Assistance Program. To get WARNING (Continued)
wheels will spin and polish the help and keep everyone in the
surface under the tires even more. vehicle safe:
. Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) . Turn on the hazard warning not collect there.
improves vehicle stability during flashers.
hard stops on slippery roads, but
. Open a window about 5 cm
. Tie a red cloth to an outside (2 in) on the side of the
apply the brakes sooner than when mirror.
on dry pavement. vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
slippery spots. Icy patches can or under the instrument
Snow can trap engine exhaust
occur on otherwise clear roads in panel.
under the vehicle. This may
shaded areas. The surface of a cause exhaust gases to get . Adjust the climate control
curve or an overpass can remain icy inside. Engine exhaust contains system to a setting that
when the surrounding roads are carbon monoxide (CO) which circulates the air inside the
clear. Avoid sudden steering cannot be seen or smelled. It can vehicle and set the fan speed
maneuvers and braking while cause unconsciousness and even to the highest setting. See
on ice. “Climate Control Systems” in
death.
Turn off cruise control on slippery the Index.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
surfaces. For more information about
. Clear away snow from around carbon monoxide, see Engine
Blizzard Conditions the base of the vehicle, Exhaust on page 9‑26.
Being stuck in snow can be a especially any that is blocking
serious situation. Stay with the the exhaust pipe.
vehicle unless there is help nearby. (Continued)
To conserve energy, run the vehicle electric drive unit wear, wait until the
for only short periods as needed to { WARNING wheels stop spinning before shifting
warm the vehicle and then shut the gears. Release the accelerator
vehicle off and close the window If the vehicle's tires spin at high pedal while shifting, and press
most of the way to save heat. speed, they can explode, and you lightly on the accelerator pedal
Repeat this until help arrives or others could be injured. The when the electric drive unit is in
but only when you feel really vehicle can overheat, causing an gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in
uncomfortable from the cold. Moving engine compartment fire or other the forward and reverse directions
about to keep warm also helps. damage. Spin the wheels as little causes a rocking motion that could
as possible and avoid going free the vehicle. If that does not get
If it takes some time for help to
above 55 km/h (35 mph). the vehicle out after a few tries, it
arrive, start the vehicle. The engine
may start to charge the 12‐volt might need to be towed out. If the
battery. Turn off unnecessary vehicle does need to be towed out,
For information about using tire
accessories to conserve energy. see Towing the Vehicle on
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
page 10‑73.
Chains on page 10‑58.
If the Vehicle Is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits
Slowly and cautiously spin the it Out
wheels to free the vehicle when It is very important to know how
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. Turn the steering wheel left and much weight the vehicle can
right to clear the area around the carry. This weight is called the
The Traction Control System (TCS) front wheels. Shift back and forth
must be turned off by pressing the
vehicle capacity weight and
between R (Reverse) and a forward
TSC/ESC button. Traction control is includes the weight of all
gear, spinning the wheels as little
not completely off, but will only as possible. The Traction Control occupants, cargo, and all
engage if the maneuver can cause System prevents the tires from nonfactory‐installed options.
damage to the electric drive unit. spinning at high speeds. To prevent
Two labels on the vehicle Tire and Loading Information and the maximum vehicle
show how much weight it was Label capacity weight (B) in kilograms
designed to carry, the Tire and and pounds.
Loading Information label and The Tire and Loading
the Certification label. Information label also shows
the tire size of the original
{ WARNING equipment tires (C) and the
Do not load the vehicle any recommended cold tire inflation
heavier than the Gross pressures (D). For more
Vehicle Weight Rating information on tires and inflation
(GVWR), or either the see Tires on page 10‑40 and
maximum front or rear Gross Tire Pressure on page 10‑46.
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). There is also important loading
This can cause systems to Label Example information on the Certification
break and change the way the A vehicle-specific Tire and label. It tells you the Gross
vehicle handles. This could Loading Information label is Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
cause loss of control and a attached to the center pillar and the Gross Axle Weight
crash. Overloading can also (B-pillar). With the driver door Rating (GAWR) for the front
shorten the life of the vehicle. open, the label is attached and rear axle; see “Certification
below the door lock post. The Label” later in this section.
Tire and Loading Information
label shows the number of
occupant seating positions (A),
Steps for Determining Correct the amount of available cargo

Load Limit and luggage load capacity
1. Locate the statement is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
“The combined weight of (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
occupants and cargo should 5. Determine the combined
never exceed XXX kg or weight of luggage and cargo
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's being loaded on the vehicle.
placard. That weight may not safely
2. Determine the combined exceed the available cargo
weight of the driver and and luggage load capacity
passengers that will be riding calculated in Step 4.
Example 1
in your vehicle. 6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
3. Subtract the combined for Example 1 = 453 kg
weight of the driver and trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this (1,000 lbs).
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs. manual to determine how this B. Subtract Occupant Weight
reduces the available cargo @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
4. The resulting figure equals and luggage load capacity of 136 kg (300 lbs).
the available amount of cargo your vehicle.
and luggage load capacity. C. Available Occupant and
For example, if the “XXX” The vehicle is neither designed Cargo Weight = 317 kg
amount equals 1400 lbs and nor intended to tow a trailer. (700 lbs).
there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
seating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
Example 2 = 453 kg for Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = Label Example
340 kg (750 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs). A vehicle-specific Certification
C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = label is found on the center pillar
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs). (B-pillar). The label shows the
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and gross weight capacity of the
Loading Information label for vehicle. This is the Gross
specific information about the Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
vehicle's capacity weight and and includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and
cargo. Never exceed the GVWR If you put things inside the
for the vehicle, or the Gross vehicle — like suitcases, WARNING (Continued)
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for tools, packages, or anything . Never stack heavier
either the front or rear axle. else — they will go as fast as things, like suitcases,
Spread out heavy loads equally the vehicle goes. If you have to inside the vehicle so that
on both sides of the vehicle. See stop or turn quickly, or if there is some of them are above
“Steps for Determining Correct a crash, they will keep going. the tops of the seats.
Load Limit” earlier in this
section. { WARNING . Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle.
{ WARNING strike and injure people in a . Secure loose items in the
Do not load the vehicle any sudden stop or turn, or in a vehicle.
heavier than the Gross crash.
. Do not leave a seat folded
Vehicle Weight Rating . Put things in the cargo down unless needed.
(GVWR), or either the area of the vehicle. In the
maximum front or rear Gross cargo area, put them as
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). far forward as possible.
This can cause systems to Try to spread the weight
break and change the way the evenly.
vehicle handles. This could (Continued)
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Starting and door is open and the vehicle is not

on. The flashing light will eventually
will display a screen with inactive
fuel and battery gauges. See
Operating time out. The POWER O button Starting and Stopping the Vehicle
light is on steady when in ON/RUN on page 9‑17.
New Vehicle Break-In power mode. When the vehicle is Service Only Mode
Notice: The vehicle does not turned off, the POWER O button
This power mode is available for
require a break-in period. Vehicle light will turn off. service and diagnostics, and to
break‐in is performed during The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) verify the proper operation of the
manufacturing. transmitter must be in the vehicle for malfunction indicator lamp as may
the system to operate. If the vehicle be required for emission inspection
Power Button will not start, place the RKE purposes. With the vehicle off,
transmitter in the transmitter slot. and the brake pedal not applied,
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) pressing and holding the POWER O
System Operation on page 2‑2. button for more than five seconds
ON/RUN: This position is for will place the vehicle in Service
starting and driving. With the vehicle Only Mode. The instruments and
off, and the brake pedal applied, audio systems will operate as they
pressing the POWER O button once do in ON/RUN, but the vehicle will
not be able to be driven. The
will place the vehicle in ON/RUN.
propulsion system will not start in
When the READY light is on in the
Service Only Mode. Push the button
instrument cluster, the vehicle is
again to turn the vehicle off.
ready to be driven. This could take
up to 15 seconds at extremely cold Notice: Service Only Mode will
temperatures. See Vehicle Ready discharge the 12-volt battery. Do
The vehicle has an electronic Light on page 5‑27. The engine will not use Service Only Mode for an
push‐button start. The POWER O only start if needed. If the vehicle extended period, or the vehicle
button light flashes when the driver did not start, the instrument cluster may not start.
STOPPING THE VEHICLE/OFF: to N (Neutral), firmly apply the Starting and Stopping the
To turn the vehicle off, push the brakes and steer the vehicle to a
safe location.
Vehicle
POWER O button with the vehicle
in P (Park). Retained Accessory 3. Come to a complete stop, shift Starting Procedure
Power (RAP) will remain active until to P (Park), and turn the vehicle Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
the driver door is opened. See off by pushing the POWER O N (Neutral). The propulsion system
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) button. will not start in any other position.
on page 9‑19. When turning off the
vehicle, if the vehicle is not in 4. Set the parking brake. See Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park), the vehicle will go to Electric Parking Brake on P (Park) if the vehicle is moving
ACC/ACCESSORY and display the page 9‑30. or the electric drive unit could be
message SHIFT TO PARK in the damaged. Shift to P (Park) only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Driver Information Center (DIC). { WARNING
See Electric Drive Unit Messages Notice: The vehicle is designed
on page 5‑47. Turning off the vehicle while to work with the electronics in
If the vehicle must be shut off in an moving may disable the airbags. the vehicle. If you add electrical
emergency: While driving, only shut the parts or accessories, you could
propulsion system off in an change the way the vehicle
1. Brake using a firm and steady emergency. operates. Before adding electrical
pressure. Do not pump the equipment, check with your
brakes repeatedly. This may dealer. If you do not, the vehicle
deplete power assist, requiring If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, might not perform properly. Any
increased brake pedal force. and must be shut off while driving, resulting damage would not be
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). press and hold the POWER O covered by the vehicle warranty.
This can be done while the button for longer than two seconds,
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
vehicle is moving. After shifting or press twice in five seconds.
transmitter must be in the vehicle.
Press the brake pedal and push and
release the POWER O button.
If the RKE transmitter is not in the screen with inactive fuel and battery
vehicle or something is interfering gauges. See Starting and Stopping
with the transmitter, a message the Vehicle on page 9‑17.
displays in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Key and Lock Restarting Procedure
Messages on page 5‑48. If the vehicle must be restarted
If the vehicle will not start due to a while it is still moving, move the shift
low RKE transmitter battery, the lever to N (Neutral) and press the
vehicle can still be driven. See POWER O button twice without
“Starting the Vehicle with a Low pressing the brake pedal. The
Transmitter Battery” in Remote propulsion system will not restart in
Keyless Entry (RKE) System any other position.
Operation on page 2‑2. A Welcome, Ready, and Good‐bye Computers determine when the
audio message will be heard in engine needs to run. The engine
the vehicle and animated on the may start, if required, when the
instrument cluster when opening the propulsion system is on. Some
driver door upon entry, when the vehicle conditions that force the
vehicle is ready to be driven, and engine to run are:
when the vehicle is turned off. . Cold ambient temperatures.
The instrument cluster displays an . The hood is open or not
active fuel or battery gauge, along
completely latched.
with an audio startup cue, when the
vehicle is ready to be driven. This . The high voltage battery has a
could take up to 15 seconds at low charge.
extremely cold temperatures. The
engine will only start if needed.
If the vehicle did not start, the
instrument cluster will display a

. The engine is needed to
maintain the high voltage battery
Shifting Into Park Leaving the Vehicle with the
Propulsion System On
temperature.
{ WARNING
. The engine needs to run for
maintenance.
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
See Maintenance Modes on the vehicle if the shift lever is not It can be dangerous to leave
page 9‑24. fully in P (Park) with the parking the vehicle with the propulsion
brake firmly set. The vehicle can system on. The vehicle could
A chime will sound if the driver door move suddenly if the shift lever
is opened while the vehicle is in ON/ roll. If you have left the propulsion
system on, the vehicle can move is not fully in P (Park) with the
RUN. Always press the POWER O suddenly. You or others could be parking brake firmly set. And,
button to turn the vehicle off before injured. To be sure the vehicle will if you leave the vehicle with the
exiting. propulsion system on, it could
not move, even when you are on
Stopping Procedure fairly level ground, use the steps overheat and even catch fire. You
For information on how to turn the that follow. or others could be injured. Do not
vehicle off, see Power Button on leave the vehicle with the
page 9‑16. propulsion system on.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake.
Retained Accessory If you have to leave the vehicle with
See Electric Parking Brake on
Power (RAP) page 9‑30 for more information.
the propulsion system on, be sure
the vehicle is in P (Park) and the
The following features will operate 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) parking brake is firmly set before
for up to 10 minutes or until the by pushing the lever all the way you leave it. After you have moved
driver door is opened: toward the front of the vehicle. the shift lever into P (Park), hold
. Audio System 3. Turn the vehicle off. down the regular brake pedal.
. Power Windows
. Accessory Power Outlets
See if you can move the shift lever Shifting out of Park If the vehicle has an uncharged
away from P (Park) without first 12‐volt battery or a 12‐volt battery
pulling it toward you. If you can, it To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle with low voltage, try charging or
means that the shift lever was not must be in ON/RUN, the brake jump starting the 12‐volt battery.
fully locked into P (Park). pedal must be applied, and the See Jump Starting on page 10‑68.
charge cord must be unplugged.
Torque Lock If the console shift lever cannot be
The vehicle has an electronic shift moved out of P (Park):
Torque lock is when the weight of lock release system. The shift lock
the vehicle puts too much force on release is designed to: 1. Apply and maintain the regular
the parking pawl in the electric drive brakes.
. Prevent the vehicle from turning
unit. This happens when parking 2. Turn the vehicle on using the
off unless the shift lever is in
on a hill and shifting the electric POWER O button. See Power
P (Park).
drive unit into P (Park) is not done
. Prevent moving the shift lever Button on page 9‑16.
properly and then it is difficult to
shift out of P (Park). To prevent out of P (Park), unless the 3. Let up on the shift lever and
torque lock, set the parking brake vehicle is in ON/RUN, the brake make sure the shift lever is
and then shift into P (Park). pedal is applied, and the charge pushed all the way into P (Park).
cord is unplugged. 4. Press the shift lever button.
If torque lock does occur, your
vehicle may need to be pushed The shift lock is always functional 5. Move the shift lever into the
uphill by another vehicle to relieve except in the case of an uncharged desired gear.
the parking pawl pressure, so you or low charged 12‐volt battery (less
can shift out of P (Park). than 9 volts). If you still cannot move the shift
lever from P (Park), see your dealer
or a professional towing service.
Parking over Things Electric Vehicle Electric Mode

That Burn Operating Modes In Electric Mode, the vehicle does
not use fuel or produce tailpipe
{ WARNING System Operation emissions. During this primary
mode, the vehicle is powered by
Things that can burn could touch This vehicle is an Extended Range electrical energy stored in the high
hot exhaust parts under the Electric Vehicle (EREV). It uses an voltage battery. The vehicle can
vehicle and ignite. Do not park electric propulsion system to drive operate in this mode until the
over papers, leaves, dry grass, the vehicle at all times. Electricity battery has reached a low charge.
or other things that can burn. is the vehicle's primary source of
There are some conditions when the
energy, while gasoline is the
battery charge is high enough to
secondary source.
provide Electric Mode operation, but
The vehicle has two modes of the engine still runs. They are:
operation: Electric and Extended . Cold ambient temperatures.
Range. In both modes, the vehicle
is propelled by its electric drive unit. . Hot or cold high voltage battery
It converts electrical energy into temperatures.
mechanical energy to drive the . The hood being open or not
wheels. The vehicle's performance completely closed and latched.
remains the same in either mode.
See Driving for Better Energy
. Certain high voltage battery fault
Efficiency on page 9‑2. conditions.
. Engine Maintenance Mode or
Fuel Maintenance Mode
being run.
Extended Range Mode In either Electric Mode or Extended Driver Selected Operating
Range Mode, when the hood is
When the vehicle reaches the end open, the engine will run without
Modes
of its electric range, it switches to turning off if the vehicle is on. The While driving in Electric or Extended
Extended Range Mode (ERM). In high voltage battery is neither Range Mode, additional operating
this secondary mode, electricity is charged nor discharged when this modes can be selected.
produced by the fuel‐powered occurs.
engine. This secondary source of
electric power extends the vehicle In either Electric Mode or Extended
range. Operation will continue in Range Mode, if there is a high
ERM until the vehicle can be voltage battery fault, the engine may
plugged in to recharge the high run without turning off to generate
voltage battery and restore needed electricity. The malfunction
Electric Mode. indicator lamp will turn on. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
The high voltage battery will page 5‑19.
continue to provide some power and
work together with the engine to
provide peak performance when it is
required, such as driving up a steep
incline or for high acceleration
Press the DRIVE MODE button to
maneuvers. The battery will not be
display selectable drive modes in
charged nor will electric vehicle
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
range be restored by the engine.
Continue pressing to scroll through
the modes.
If in Sport or Mountain Mode, either Press the DRIVE MODE button

may become unavailable and the again to return to Normal Mode
vehicle will return to Normal Mode. and it becomes active after
The indicator light goes off and a three seconds.
DIC message displays. See The Sport light comes on when
Propulsion Power Messages on Sport Mode is selected. See Sport
page 5‑50. Mode Light on page 5‑23.
Sport Mode Each time the vehicle is started, it
Highlight either the Mountain or will return to Normal Mode.
Sport Mode, then release the Mountain Mode
DRIVE MODE button. After
three seconds, the new drive mode
will become active.
Pressing the DRIVE MODE button
again will return to Normal Mode,
and become active after
three seconds.
At next start, the vehicle will default Sport Mode provides more
to Normal Mode. Drive modes can responsive acceleration than
then be selected again as desired. Normal Mode, but can reduce
efficiency. Use Normal Mode Mountain Mode should be selected
During some conditions, certain whenever possible. at the beginning of a trip before
drive modes may be unavailable. climbing steep, uphill grades
The unavailable mode is grayed out Press the DRIVE MODE button to and when expecting to drive in
in the DIC menu and cannot be select Sport Mode. very hilly or mountainous terrain.
selected.
This mode maintains a reserve The engine may run when Mountain responsive acceleration. DIC
electrical charge of the high voltage Mode is selected, depending on messages indicate reduced
battery to provide better grade high voltage battery charge, to build propulsion power, that the engine is
climbing performance. While driving reserve battery charge for uphill not available, and the need for fuel
in Mountain Mode, the vehicle will climbs. If Mountain Mode is entered or service.
have less responsive acceleration. with a sufficient battery charge Once the vehicle is refueled, or the
Mountain Mode will not change reserve, the estimated electric range malfunction is corrected, the engine
normal vehicle braking performance will adjust accordingly and any will start the next time the vehicle is
for steep downhill grades. See Hill battery charge reserve still unused turned on to perform a self test, and
and Mountain Roads on page 9‑9 upon exiting Mountain Mode will be DIC messages will not be displayed.
and Electric Drive Unit on added back to the electric range Once the engine starts successfully,
page 9‑28. display. normal operation will continue in
Press the DRIVE MODE button to Press the Drive Mode button again either Electric or Extended Range
select Mountain Mode. If steep to return to Normal Mode and it Mode. The engine will stop running
hill driving is expected, it is becomes active after three seconds. after the self test is completed, and
recommended to select Mountain Each time the vehicle is started, based on the current mode of
Mode at least 20 minutes before it will return to Normal Mode to operation. See Fuel System
driving on steep grades. This will maintain a smaller battery charge Messages on page 5‑48 and
allow the vehicle time to build a reserve for normal driving. Service Vehicle Messages on
sufficient battery charge reserve. page 5‑51.
If Mountain Mode is not selected for Out of Fuel/Engine Maintenance Modes

these conditions, propulsion power Unavailable
may be reduced and the engine Engine Maintenance Mode (EMM)
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, or
speed may increase. See Engine Maintenance Mode (EMM)
the engine will not start due to a
Propulsion Power Messages on runs the engine to keep it in
malfunction, the vehicle can
page 5‑50. good working condition after
continue to be driven in Electric
Mode. The vehicle will have less approximately six weeks of no or
very limited engine operation. EMM If the EMM request was delayed for be maintained in the vehicle to keep
will force the engine to run, even if one day, EMM will automatically it operational. See Propulsion Power
there is a charge to power the start the engine at the next vehicle Messages on page 5‑50.
vehicle. When EMM is needed, the start. An EMM Notification screen
EMM Request screen appears on will appear in the center stack
the center stack display at vehicle display.
start.
Fuel Maintenance Mode (FMM)

Fuel Maintenance Mode (FMM)
tracks average fuel age. Old fuel
If the vehicle shuts off during EMM, can cause engine problems. If low
If Yes is selected, EMM will begin. it will restart the next time the engine usage causes average fuel
The engine will run for a set amount vehicle is driven. A message age to exceed approximately
of time without turning off. During displays to indicate that EMM is one year, FMM will run the engine
EMM, a DIC message displays to active. to use up the old fuel. The engine
show the EMM percentage If EMM is required and the fuel level will run until enough fresh fuel is
complete. is low, EMM may eventually empty added to bring the average fuel
If No is selected, the EMM Request the fuel tank if fuel is not added. age into an acceptable range.
screen will appear when the vehicle This will result in reduced, or no
is next started. The EMM request power. An adequate fuel level must
can be delayed for only one day.
Allowing more old fuel to be used If No is selected, the FMM Request Engine Exhaust
up by FMM and adding a larger screen will appear when the vehicle
amount of fresh fuel will maximize is next started. The FMM request
the length of time before another can be delayed for only one day. { WARNING
fuel maintenance mode is needed. If the FMM request was delayed for
During FMM the engine may turn on Engine exhaust contains carbon
one day, FMM will start at the next monoxide (CO) which cannot be
and off. vehicle start and display the FMM seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
When FMM is needed, the FMM Notification screen on the center can cause unconsciousness and
Request screen appears on the stack display. even death.
center stack display at vehicle start. If FMM is required and the fuel level Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
is low, FMM may eventually empty
the fuel tank if fuel is not added. . The engine is running in
This will result in reduced, or no Extended Range Mode in
power. An adequate fuel level must areas with poor ventilation
be maintained in the vehicle to keep (parking garages, tunnels,
it operational. See Propulsion Power or deep snow that may block
Messages on page 5‑50. underbody airflow or tail
pipes).
. The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
If Yes is selected, FMM will begin.
FMM will automatically continue at . The exhaust system leaks
each vehicle start until fresh fuel is due to corrosion or damage.
added. . The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Running the Vehicle

WARNING (Continued)
While Parked
{ WARNING
. There are holes or openings It can be dangerous to get out of
It is better not to park with the
in the vehicle body from the vehicle if the electric drive unit
propulsion system on. But if you
damage or aftermarket shift lever is not fully in P (Park)
ever have to, here are some things
modifications that are not with the parking brake firmly set.
to know.
completely sealed. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave
the vehicle with the propulsion
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
{ WARNING system on unless you have to.
coming into the vehicle: Leaving the engine running in If you have left the propulsion
Extended Range Mode in an system on, the vehicle can move
. Drive it only with the windows
enclosed area with poor suddenly. You or others could be
completely down.
ventilation is dangerous. Engine injured. To be sure the vehicle will
. Have the vehicle repaired exhaust may enter the vehicle. not move, even when you are on
immediately. Engine exhaust contains carbon level ground, always set the
Never park with the engine monoxide (CO) which cannot be parking brake and move the shift
running in Extended Range Mode seen or smelled. It can cause lever to P (Park).
in an enclosed area such as a unconsciousness and even
garage or a building that has no death. Never run the engine in Follow the proper steps to be sure
fresh air ventilation. an enclosed area that has no the vehicle will not move. See
fresh air ventilation. For more Shifting Into Park on page 9‑19.
information, see Engine Exhaust
on page 9‑26.
Electric Drive Unit { WARNING

shifting from P (Park) when the
vehicle is in ON/RUN. If you cannot
The vehicle uses an electric drive shift out of P (Park), ease pressure
unit. The shift lever is on the It is dangerous to get out of the on the shift lever, then push the shift
console between the seats. vehicle if the shift lever is not fully lever all the way into P (Park) as
in P (Park) with the parking brake you maintain brake application.
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Then press the shift lever button
Do not leave the vehicle when the and move the shift lever into
propulsion system is running another gear. See Shifting out of
unless you have to. If you have Park on page 9‑20.
left the propulsion system R (Reverse): Use this gear to
running, the vehicle can move back up.
suddenly. You or others could be Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
injured. To be sure the vehicle will while the vehicle is moving
not move, even when you are on forward could damage the electric
fairly level ground, always set the drive unit. The repairs would
parking brake and move the shift not be covered by the vehicle
lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
Park on page 9‑19. after the vehicle is stopped.
P (Park): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position To rock the vehicle back and forth to
to use when starting the propulsion Make sure the shift lever is fully get out of snow, ice, or sand without
system because the vehicle cannot in P (Park) before starting the damaging the electric drive unit, see
move easily. propulsion system. The vehicle If the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑11.
has an electric drive unit shift lock N (Neutral): In this position, the
control system. The regular brake propulsion system does not connect
must be fully applied first and then with the wheels.
the shift lever button pressed before
D (Drive): This position is for L (Low): This position reduces Brakes

normal driving. It provides the best vehicle speed without using the
fuel economy. If more power is brakes. You can use L (Low) on
needed for passing, and the hills. It can help control vehicle Antilock Brake
vehicle is: speed going down steep mountain System (ABS)
. Going less than 56 km/h roads along with using the brakes
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
(35 mph), push the accelerator off and on. You can use L (Low) on
System (ABS), an advanced
pedal about halfway down. very steep hills, in deep snow,
electronic braking system that helps
or in mud.
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or prevent a braking skid.
more, push the accelerator all Notice: Spinning the tires or
When propulsion is active and the
the way down. holding the vehicle in one
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
place on a hill using only the
Notice: If the vehicle seems to checks itself. A momentary motor or
accelerator pedal may damage
accelerate slowly or not respond clicking noise might be heard while
the electric drive unit. The repair
when you go faster, and you this test is going on, and it might
will not be covered by the vehicle
continue to drive the vehicle that even be noticed that the brake
warranty. If you are stuck, do not
way, you could damage the pedal moves a little. This is normal.
spin the tires. When stopping on
electric drive unit. Have the a hill, use the brakes to hold the
vehicle serviced right away. vehicle in place.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑23.
If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always Electric Parking Brake
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
to each wheel, as required, faster normal.
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard. ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help The vehicle has an Electric Parking
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best Brake (EPB). The Y switch is on
on wheel speed and controls braking. the center stack. The EPB can
braking pressure accordingly. always be activated, even if the
Remember: ABS does not change vehicle is off. To prevent draining
the time needed to get a foot up to the 12‐volt battery, avoid repeated
the brake pedal or always decrease cycles of the EPB system when the
stopping distance. If you get too vehicle is off.
close to the vehicle in front of you, In case of insufficient electrical
there will not be enough time to power, the EPB cannot be applied
apply the brakes if that vehicle or released.
Before leaving the vehicle, check the Y switch during the of time than normal when this
the Electric Parking Brake Light to deceleration will release the parking light is on. Continue to hold
ensure the parking brake is applied. the Y switch until the Electric
brake. If the Y switch is held in
EPB Apply the up position until the vehicle Parking Brake Light remains on.
comes to a stop, the EPB will If the Service Electric Parking Brake
The EPB can be applied anytime Light is on, see your dealer.
remain applied.
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
applied by momentarily lifting up on If the Electric Parking Brake Light If the EPB fails to apply, the rear
flashes continuously, the EPB is wheels should be blocked to
the Y switch. Once fully applied, prevent vehicle movement.
the Electric Parking Brake Light will only partially applied or released,
be on. While the brake is being or there is a problem with the EPB. For maximum EPB force when
applied, the Electric Parking Brake The DIC message SERVICE parking on a hill, pull the EPB
Light will flash until full apply is PARKING BRAKE will be displayed. switch twice.
reached. If the light does not come If this light flashes continuously,
release the EPB, and attempt to EPB Release
on, or remains flashing, have the
vehicle serviced. Do not drive the apply it again. If this light continues To release the EPB, place the
vehicle if the Electric Parking Brake to flash, do not drive the vehicle. vehicle in ON/RUN, apply and hold
Light is flashing. See your dealer. See your dealer. the brake pedal, and push down
If the EPB is applied while the If the Service Electric Parking Brake momentarily on the Y switch.
vehicle is in motion, a chime will Light is on, the EPB has detected a If attempting to release the EPB
sound, and the DIC message system problem and is operating without the brake pedal applied, a
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE will with reduced functionality. To apply chime will sound, and the DIC
be displayed. The vehicle will the EPB when this light is on, lift message STEP ON BRAKE TO
decelerate as long as the switch is up on the Y switch and hold it in RELEASE PARK BRAKE will be
held in the up position. Releasing the up position. Full application displayed. The EPB is released
of the parking brake by the EPB when the Electric Parking Brake
system may take a longer period Light is off.
If the Service Electric Parking Automatic EPB Release The braking system is computer
Brake Light is on, the EPB has controlled and blends the
The EPB will automatically release if
detected a system problem, regenerative braking with the
the vehicle is running, placed into
and is operating with reduced conventional hydraulic disc brakes
gear, and an attempt is made to
functionality. To release the EPB to meet any requirements for
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
when this light is on, push down deceleration. The controller
when the EPB is applied, to
on the Y switch and hold it in interprets the braking request
preserve parking brake lining life.
the down position. EPB release and uses regenerative braking,
may take a longer period of time See Electric Parking Brake Light on conventional hydraulic braking, or a
than normal when this light is on. page 5‑22, Service Electric Parking combination of both as necessary.
Brake Light on page 5‑22, and Because the controller applies the
Continue to hold the Y switch until Brake System Messages on hydraulic brakes through its high
the Electric Parking Brake Light is page 5‑46. pressure accumulator, you may
off. If the light is on, see your dealer. occasionally hear the motor‐driven
Notice: Driving with the parking Regenerative Braking pump when it recharges the system.
brake on can overheat the brake This is normal.
system and cause premature Regenerative braking takes some of
the energy from the moving vehicle See Warning Lights, Gauges, and
wear or damage to brake system Indicators on page 5‑9 and Driver
parts. Make sure that the parking and turns it back into electrical
energy. This energy is then stored Information Center (DIC) on
brake is fully released and the page 5‑43. In the event of a
Electric Parking Brake Light is off back into the high voltage battery
system, contributing to increased controller problem, the brake pedal
before driving. may be harder to push and the
energy efficiency.
stopping distance may be longer.
The hydraulic disc brakes work with
the regenerative braking to ensure
effective braking, such as when a
high braking demand is requested.
Ride Control Systems When the vehicle is started and d flashes to indicate that TCS is
begins to move, the system active. See Traction Control System
performs several diagnostic checks (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on
Traction Control to ensure there are no problems. page 5‑24 for more information.
System (TCS) The system may be heard or felt If there is a problem detected with
The vehicle has a Traction Control while it is working. This is normal TCS, SERVICE TRACTION
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin. and does not mean there is a CONTROL is displayed on the
The system operates if it senses problem with the vehicle. The Driver Information Center (DIC).
that one or both of the drive wheels system should initialize before the See Ride Control System Messages
are slipping or beginning to lose vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). on page 5‑50. When this message
traction. When this happens, the In some cases, it may take is displayed and d comes on and
system brakes the spinning wheel(s) approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of
stays on, the vehicle is safe to drive
and/or reduces power to limit driving before the system initializes.
but the system is not operational.
wheel spin. The TCS may activate on dry or Driving should be adjusted
The system may be heard or felt rough roads or under conditions accordingly.
while it is working, but this is such as heavy acceleration while
normal. turning or abrupt changes in output If d comes on and stays on, reset
from the electric drive unit. When the system:
To assist with directional control of
this happens, a reduction in 1. Stop the vehicle.
the vehicle, TCS automatically
acceleration may be noticed, or a
comes on whenever the vehicle 2. Turn the engine off and wait
noise or vibration may be heard.
is turned on. To limit wheel spin, 15 seconds.
This is normal.
especially in slippery road
conditions, the system should 3. Start the engine.
always be left on. But, TCS can be
turned off if needed.
If d still comes on and stays on, the on, and the appropriate DIC Electronic Stability
vehicle needs service. message also displays. See Ride
Control System Messages on
Control (ESC)
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake page 5‑50. With TCS turned off, the The vehicle has an Electronic
or accelerate heavily when TCS is system does not limit wheel spin. Stability Control system called
off. The vehicle's driveline could Driving should be adjusted StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
be damaged. accordingly. See Traction Off Light computer-controlled system that
on page 5‑24 for more information. assists with directional control of the
Press and release the TCS/ESC vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
button again to turn the system StabiliTrak comes on automatically
back on. whenever the vehicle is turned on.
It may be necessary to turn the To assist with directional control of
system off if the vehicle gets stuck the vehicle, the system should
in sand, mud, or snow and rocking always be left on.
the vehicle is required. See If the The system may be heard or felt
Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑11 for while it is working, but this is
more information. See also Winter normal.
Driving on page 9‑9 for information
StabiliTrak activates when the
on using TCS when driving in snowy
computer senses a difference
or icy conditions.
TCS can be turned off by pressing between the intended path and the
and releasing the TCS/ESC button Adding non‐GM accessories can direction the vehicle is actually
located on the overhead console. affect vehicle performance. See traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
When TCS is turned off, i comes Accessories and Modifications on applies braking pressure to the
page 10‑3 for more information. vehicle brakes to help steer the
vehicle in the intended direction.
When the vehicle is started and If a problem is detected

begins to move, the system with StabiliTrak, SERVICE
performs several diagnostic checks STABILITRAK is displayed on the
to ensure there are no problems. Driver Information Center (DIC).
The system may be heard or felt See Ride Control System Messages
while it is working. This is normal on page 5‑50. When this message
and does not mean there is a is displayed and d comes on and
problem with the vehicle. The stays on, the vehicle is safe to drive
system should initialize before the but the system is not operational.
vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). Driving should be adjusted
In some cases, it may take accordingly.
approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of
driving before the system initializes. If d comes on and stays on, reset . To turn off both StabiliTrak and
When StabiliTrak activates, the system: TCS, press and hold the TCS/
d flashes on the instrument cluster. 1. Stop the vehicle. ESC button, located on the
This also occurs when traction 2. Turn the engine off and wait overhead console, until i and
control is activated. This is normal.
15 seconds. g illuminate and the appropriate
Continue to steer the vehicle in the DIC message is displayed. See
intended direction. A noise may be 3. Start the engine. Ride Control System Messages
heard or vibration may be felt in on page 5‑50.
If d still comes on and stays on, the
the brake pedal. This is normal.
Continue to steer the vehicle in the vehicle needs service.
intended direction. See Traction
Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak®
Light on page 5‑24 for more
information.
When StabiliTrak is turned off, Cruise Control

the system will not assist with { WARNING
directional control of the vehicle The cruise control lets the vehicle
or limit wheel spin. Driving maintain a speed of about 40 km/h Cruise control can be dangerous
should be adjusted accordingly. (25 mph) or more without keeping where you cannot drive safely at
See StabiliTrak® OFF Light on your foot on the accelerator. Cruise a steady speed. So, do not use
page 5‑24 for more information. control does not work at speeds the cruise control on winding
below 40 km/h (25 mph). roads or in heavy traffic.
. Press and release the TCS/ESC
button again to turn the system With the Traction Control System Cruise control can be dangerous
back on. (TCS) or Electronic Stability Control on slippery roads. On such roads,
(ESC), the system may begin to fast changes in tire traction can
If cruise control is being used when
limit wheel spin while you are using cause excessive wheel slip, and
StabiliTrak activates, cruise control
cruise control. If this happens, the you could lose control. Do not use
will automatically disengage. Press
cruise control will automatically cruise control on slippery roads.
the cruise control RES/+ button to
disengage. See Traction Control
reengage when road conditions
System (TCS) on page 9‑33 or
allow. See Cruise Control on
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on
page 9‑34.
SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the Resuming a Set Speed

thumbwheel down to set a speed If the cruise control is set at a
and activate cruise control or to desired speed and then the brakes
make the vehicle decelerate. are applied, the cruise control is
Setting Cruise Control disengaged without erasing the set
speed from memory. Once the
If the cruise button is on when not in vehicle speed is about 40 km/h
use, it could get bumped and go into (25 mph) or greater, move the
cruise when not desired. Keep the thumbwheel up toward RES/+
cruise control button off when cruise briefly and then release it. The
is not being used. vehicle returns to the previously set
To set a speed: speed and stays there.
The cruise control buttons are on
1. Press 1 to turn cruise Increasing Speed While Using
the steering wheel. Cruise Control
control on.
1 (On/Off): Press to turn the 2. Get up to the speed desired. If the cruise control system is
cruise control system on and off. An already activated:
indicator light will turn on or off in 3. Move the thumbwheel down
the instrument cluster. toward SET/− and release it. . Move the thumbwheel up toward
The desired set speed briefly RES/+ and hold it until the
* (Cancel): Press to disengage
appears in the instrument vehicle accelerates to the
cruise control without erasing the desired speed, then release it.
cluster.
set speed from memory.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator . To increase the speed in small
RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move amounts, move the thumbwheel
pedal.
the thumbwheel up to resume up toward RES/+ briefly and
to a previously set speed or to When the brakes are applied, the then release it. Each time this is
accelerate. cruise control shuts off. done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using you might have to step on the Object Detection
Cruise Control accelerator pedal to maintain
If the cruise control system is the vehicle speed. When going Systems
already activated: downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to maintain Ultrasonic Parking Assist
. Move the thumbwheel toward the vehicle speed. When the brakes
SET/− and hold until the desired are applied the cruise control is If available, the Ultrasonic Front
lower speed is reached, then disengaged. and Rear Parking Assist (UFRPA)
release it. system assists the driver with
Ending Cruise Control parking and avoiding objects.
. To slow down in very small UFRPA operates at speeds less
amounts, move the thumbwheel There are three ways to end cruise
control: than 8 km/h (5 mph). The sensors
toward SET/− briefly. Each time on the front and rear bumper detect
this is done, the vehicle goes . Step lightly on the brake pedal; objects up to 1.2 m (4 ft) in front of
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. when cruise control disengages, the vehicle, 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the
Passing Another Vehicle While the indicator light will not be lit. vehicle, and at least 25 cm (10 in)
Using Cruise Control . Press *. off the ground.
Use the accelerator pedal to . Press 1 to turn the cruise
increase vehicle speed. When you
take your foot off the pedal, the control system off completely.
vehicle will slow down to the The cruise control cannot be
previously set cruise control speed. resumed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills Erasing Speed Memory

How well the cruise control works The cruise control set speed is
on hills depends upon the vehicle erased from memory by pressing 1
speed, load, and the steepness of or if the vehicle is turned off.
the hills. When going up steep hills,
How the System Works High-toned beeps from the front

{ WARNING When the vehicle is shifted into
speakers are for objects detected
near the front bumper. Low-toned
The Ultrasonic Front and Rear R (Reverse) the front and rear
beeps from the rear speakers are
Parking Assist (UFRPA) system sensors are automatically turned on.
for objects detected near the rear
does not replace driver vision. After the vehicle is shifted out of
bumper. The interval between the
It cannot detect: R (Reverse), the rear sensors are
beeps becomes shorter as the
turned off and the front sensors
. Objects that are below the vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
stay on until the vehicle is above a
bumper, under the vehicle, When the distance is less than
speed of 8 km/h (5 mph). For the
or too close or far from the 30 cm (12 in) the beeping is a
front park assist system to be
vehicle. continuous tone for five seconds.
active again without shifting into
. Children, pedestrians, R (Reverse), the park assist button To be detected, objects must be at
bicyclists, or pets. in the overhead console must be least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground
pressed. See “Turning the System and below hatch level. Objects must
If you do not use proper care On and Off” later in this section. also be within 1.2 m (4 ft) in front of
before moving forward and while the vehicle and 2.5 m (8 ft) from the
backing up, vehicle damage, UFRPA operates only at speeds
rear bumper. This distance may be
injury, or death could occur. Even less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
less during warmer or humid
with UFRPA, always check in When the vehicle is in N (Neutral), weather.
front of the vehicle before moving the system may be active. If the
forward and behind the vehicle vehicle is in a car wash, the sensors Objects Detected by Both the
may detect objects in the car wash. Front and Rear Sensors
before backing up. While moving
forward and backing up, be sure See “Turning the System On and In general, if objects are detected at
to look for objects and check the Off” later in this section to turn the the same time near both the front
vehicle mirrors. system off. and rear bumpers while backing up,
the beeps only sound to indicate
that objects are close to the rear
bumper.
However, if an object comes within When the system is off, PARK ice, and slush. For cleaning
0.3 m (1 ft) of the front bumper while ASSIST OFF displays on the Driver instructions, see Exterior Care
the vehicle is backing up and at the Information Center (DIC). The on page 10‑78.
same time there is another object message disappears after a short . The park assist sensors are
further than 0.3 m (1 ft) from the rear period of time. covered by frost or ice. Frost or
bumper, then the beeps only sound UFRPA defaults to the on setting ice can form around and behind
to indicate the object that is closer each time the vehicle is started. the sensors and may not always
to the front bumper. be seen; this can occur after
When the System Does Not washing the vehicle in cold
Turning the System On and Off
Seem to Work Properly weather. The message may not
The UFRPA system can be turned clear until the frost or ice has
The following messages may be
on and off by pressing the park melted.
displayed on the DIC:
assist button located in the
overhead console. SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: If . An object was hanging out of the
this message occurs, take the hatch during the last drive cycle.
vehicle to your dealer to repair the Once the object is removed,
system. UFRPA will return to normal
operation.
PARK ASSIST OFF: If the UFRPA
system does not activate due to a . An object or cover is attached to
temporary condition, the message the front of the vehicle.
displays on the DIC. This can occur . The bumper is damaged. Take
The LED next to the park assist under the following conditions: the vehicle to your dealer to
button lights up when the system is . The driver has disabled the repair the system.
on and turns off when it has been system.
disabled.
. The ultrasonic sensors are not
clean. Keep the vehicle's
bumpers free of mud, dirt, snow,

. Other conditions, such as The previous screen displays
vibrations from a jackhammer or WARNING (Continued) when the vehicle is shifted out of
the compression of air brakes on R (Reverse) after approximately
a very large truck, are affecting Do not back the vehicle using 10 seconds.
system performance. only the RVC screen or by using
the screen during longer, higher To cancel the delay, do one of the
following:
Rear Vision speed backing maneuvers,
Camera (RVC) or where there could be . Press a button on the
cross-traffic. Perceived distances infotainment system.
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision may be different from actual
Camera (RVC) system. Read this
. Shift into P (Park).
distances.
entire section before using it. . Reach a vehicle speed of
Failure to use proper care before 8 km/h (5 mph).
The RVC system can assist backing may result in injury,
the driver when backing up by death, or vehicle damage. Always Turning the Rear Vision Camera
displaying a view of the area behind check before backing by checking System On or Off
the vehicle.
behind and around the vehicle. To turn the RVC system on or off:
{ WARNING How the System Works

1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the CONFIG button on the
The RVC system does not display When the vehicle is shifted into center stack.
pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, R (Reverse), the image of the
or any other object located 3. Select Display.
area behind the vehicle appears
outside the camera's field of view, in the center stack display 4. Select Camera. When a
below the bumper, or under the with the message CHECK checkmark appears next to
vehicle. SURROUNDINGS FOR SAFETY. Camera, then the RVC system
(Continued) is on.
Symbols 3. Select Display. Rear Vision Camera Error

The navigation system may have a 4. Select Symbols. When a Messages
feature that lets the driver view checkmark appears next to SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERA
symbols on the navigation screen Symbols, symbols will appear. SYSTEM: If this message appears
while using the RVC. The Ultrasonic in the center stack display, the
Front and Rear Parking Assist Guidelines system is not receiving information it
(UFRPA) system must not be The RVC system has a guideline requires from other vehicle systems.
disabled to use the caution symbols. overlay that can help the driver align If any other problem occurs or if a
The error message REAR PARKING the vehicle when backing into a problem persists, see your dealer.
ASSIST SYMBOLS UNAVAILABLE parking spot.
may display if UFRPA has been To turn the guidelines on or off: Rear Vision Camera Location
disabled and the symbols have
been turned on. See Ultrasonic 1. Shift into P (Park).
Parking Assist on page 9‑38. 2. Press the CONFIG button on the
The symbols appear and may cover center stack.
an object when viewing the 3. Select Display.
navigation screen when an object is
detected by the UFRPA system. 4. Select Guidelines. When a
checkmark appears next to
To turn the symbols on or off: Guidelines, guidelines will
1. Shift into P (Park). appear.
2. Press the CONFIG button on the
center stack.
The RVC is located above the

license plate.
The area displayed by the camera is When the System Does Not
limited. Seem To Work Properly
It does not display objects that are The RVC system may not work
close to either corner or under the properly or display a clear image if:
bumper and can vary depending
on vehicle orientation or road
. The RVC is turned off. See
conditions. The distance of the “Turning the Rear Vision Camera
image that appears on the screen is System On or Off” earlier in this
different from the actual distance. section.
. It is dark.
The following illustration shows the
field of view that the camera . The sun or the beam of
provides. headlamps is shining directly
into the camera lens.
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
has built up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
. The back of the vehicle was in
an accident. The position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have the
A. View displayed by the camera. camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
dealer.
Charging Charging In cold weather conditions, ice

may form around the charge port
Start Charge door. The charge port door may
Plug-In Charging not open on the first attempt.
This section explains the process Remove ice from the area and
for charging the vehicle's high repeat attempting to open the
voltage battery. Do not allow the charge port door.
vehicle to remain in temperature
extremes for long periods without
being driven or plugged in. It is
recommended that the vehicle be
plugged in when temperatures are
below 0°C (32°F) and above 32°C
(90°F) to maximize high voltage
battery life.
The charging system may run fans 1. The charge port door release
and pumps that result in sounds button is on the driver door inner
from the vehicle while it is turned trim panel. With the vehicle in
off. Additional unexpected clicking P (Park), press the button for
sounds may be caused by the one second and release to open
electrical devices used while 2. Open the rear hatch, lift the load
the charge port door. The charge support floor covering (A), and
charging. port door can also be opened remove the charge cord (D).
While the charge cord is plugged using the RKE transmitter. See It is located near the tire
into the vehicle, the vehicle cannot Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) sealant and compressor kit (C).
be driven. System Operation on page 2‑2.
Pull up on the charge cord End Charge

handle (D) to release it from the 1. Unlock the vehicle with the RKE
handle clip (E). Lift the charge transmitter to disarm the charge
cord up and rearward to remove cord theft alert.
it from the vehicle. The vehicle
plug (B) is stored as shown.
3. Plug the charge cord into the
electrical outlet. See Electrical
Requirements for Battery
Charging on page 9‑52. Verify
that the charge cord status
indicators are both green. See
Charge Cord on page 9‑50 for 4. Then plug in the vehicle plug of
more information. the charge cord into the charge
port on the vehicle. Verify that 2. Unplug the vehicle plug of the
the charging status indicator charge cord from the vehicle by
illuminates on top of the squeezing the vehicle plug lever
instrument panel and a horn and pull to remove.
chirp occurs. See Charging
3. Close the charge port door by
Status Feedback on page 9‑47
pressing firmly in the center to
for more information.
latch properly.
5. To arm the charge cord theft
4. Unplug the charge cord from the
alert, lock the vehicle with the
electrical outlet.
RKE transmitter. To disable this
feature, see “Charge Cord Theft
Alert” in Vehicle Personalization
on page 5‑53.
5. Before storing the charge cord, Delayed Charging

have the charge cord face up
and wrap the charge cable
Override
neatly counterclockwise around To temporarily override a delayed
the body of the charge cord. charge event, unplug the charge
cord from the charge port and then
plug it back in within five seconds.
A single horn chirp will sound and
charging will begin immediately.
To cancel a temporary override,
unplug the charge cord, wait for
10 seconds, and then plug the
6. Place the charge cord, face charge cord back in. A double horn
down, into the storage chirp will sound and charging will be
compartment with the front delayed.
edge (F) of the charge cord
body under the clips (G) located See “Programmable Charging”
in the front of the storage in Charging on page 5‑31 for
compartment. The vehicle advanced charge scheduling
plug (B) should be on the right options.
side of the charge cord.
7. Push the charge cord handle
down until it locks into the
handle clip at the rear of the
storage compartment.

. Long Flashing Green – Vehicle
Charging Status is plugged in. Battery is not fully
The system may be thermally
conditioning the battery during any
Feedback charged. Battery charging is of the states above, requiring
delayed. electrical energy to be transferred to
. Short Flashing Green – Vehicle the vehicle.
is plugged in. Battery is fully If the vehicle is plugged in and
charged. vehicle power is on, the CSI will be
. Solid Yellow – Vehicle is plugged on solid green. The same is true
in. It is normal for the CSI to turn during a remote start if the vehicle is
yellow for a few seconds after plugged in.
plugging in a compatible charge If the vehicle is plugged in and the
cord. The solid yellow may be CSI is off, a total utility interruption
extended depending on the using OnStar or a charging fault
vehicle and if there is a total has been detected. See “Utility
utility interruption via OnStar. Interruption of Charging” or “Charge
See “Utility Interruption of Cord Status Indicators” later in this
The vehicle has a Charging Status Charging” later in this section.
Indicator (CSI) at the center of section.
This may also indicate that the
the instrument panel near the charging system has detected a This chart indicates vehicle
windshield. When the vehicle is fault and will not charge the feedback when the charge cord is
plugged in and the vehicle power is battery. See “Charge Cord plugged in.
off, the CSI indicates the following: Status Indicators” later in this
. Solid Green – Vehicle is plugged section.
in. Battery is not fully charged.
Battery is charging.
Charging Status
Sound Action/Reason
Indicator
Solid Green One horn chirp Charging has begun.
Charging is delayed by Programmable
Charging or, if vehicle is equipped
accordingly, by a total utility interruption
Long Flashing Green Two horn chirps
via OnStar. Charging will begin later.
See Utility Interruption of Charging on
page 9‑52.
Short Flashing Green None Charging is complete.
Charge cord is okay and vehicle is not yet
Yellow (Upon Plug‐in) None
charging.
Charge cord is okay, but vehicle is not
charging. This may be due to a total utility
Yellow (For Extended
interruption via Onstar and charging will
Time Period after None
begin later. See Utility Interruption of
Plug‐in)
Charging on page 9‑52 or Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19.
Charging Status
Sound Action/Reason
Indicator
Solid Green or Long Insufficient time to fully charge by
Four horn chirps
Flashing Green departure time.
None (Upon Plug‐in) None Charge cord connection should be checked.
Charge cord connection should be checked.
If connection is good, this may be due to a
None (After Green or
total utility interruption via OnStar and
Yellow CSI Indication None
charging will begin later. See Utility
Observed)
Interruption of Charging on page 9‑52 or
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19.
Repeated horn chirps
To disable this feature, see “Charge Power
Loss Alert” in Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑53.
To stop this alert, do one of the following:
. Unplug the charge cord. Electricity was interrupted before charging
None
was complete.
. Press K on the RKE.
. Press and hold 7 on the RKE, then
press again to stop the panic alarm.
. Press the horn pad.
Charge Cord A portable charge cord used to

charge the vehicle high voltage { WARNING
See Radio Frequency Statement on battery is stored under the rear
page 13‑16 for information luggage compartment. Using the charge cord with a
regarding Part 15 of the Federal worn or damaged AC outlet
Communications Commission (FCC) may cause burns or start a fire.
rules and Industry Canada { WARNING Periodically, check the AC wall
Standards RSS-210/220/310. There is a risk of electric shock plug and charge cord while the
that may cause personal injury or vehicle is charging. If the AC wall
death. Do not use the charge plug feels hot, unplug the charge
cord if any part of the charge cord cord and have the AC outlet
is damaged. Do not open or replaced by a qualified electrician.
remove the charge cord cover. Replace the charge cord if the AC
Service by qualified personnel wall plug or cord are damaged.
only. Connect the charge cord to Do not use an AC outlet that is
a properly grounded outlet with worn or damaged.
cords that are not damaged.
The charge cord used to charge the { WARNING

vehicle is a high‐powered electrical
A. Charge Level Button device. During normal operation, the An extension cord should not
AC wall plug of the charge cord may be used to charge the vehicle.
B. Charge Level Indicators Use of an extension cord may
feel warm. The AC wall plug must fit
C. Charge Cord Status Indicators tightly into an AC outlet that is in increase the risk of electric shock
D. Vehicle Plug good condition. or other hazards.
(Continued)
E. Wall Plug
Charge Level Button

WARNING (Continued)
If an extension cord is used { WARNING
because of limited access to
Using a charge level that exceeds
120V AC power, use the following
the electrical circuit or AC outlet
safeguards:
A flashing red AC PRESENT (A) capacity may start a fire or
The 120V AC outlet should be indicates the AC voltage is out of damage the electrical circuit.
GFCI protected. range. Have a qualified electrician
The extension cord should be: inspect your electrical circuit and
Flashing red AC PRESENT (A) and AC outlet capacity before using
. GFCI protected. FAULT (B) indicate the AC outlet
the normal charge level. Use the
does not have a proper safety
. 12 or 14 gage, 3 conductor. ground. Charging is not permitted reduced charge level if the
. Rated for outdoor. for safety reasons. The AC outlet electrical circuit or AC outlet
must be repaired or another outlet capacity is not known.
source should be used.
Charge Cord Status Indicators
A flashing red FAULT (B) indicates a Two charge levels are available by
The charge cord status indicators charge cord fault. The charge cord pressing the charge level button.
illuminate green or flashing red to will attempt to reset automatically. Select reduced or normal level.
identify the charge cord status. If the flashing red FAULT (B)
When both indicators are green, The charge level cannot be
continues for more than changed when the vehicle plug
the vehicle can be charged. If any 30 seconds, unplug the charge
indicators are flashing red, the is plugged into the charge port on
cord from the wall to reset. If the the vehicle. If the charge level
charge cord will not permit vehicle fault remains, see your dealer for
charging. button is pressed while the vehicle
service. plug is plugged into the charge
port on the vehicle, the charge
level indicators will flash briefly.
To change the charge level, unplug grid usage for brief time periods. Electrical Requirements
the vehicle plug from the charge A utility interruption of charging may
port on the vehicle and select the increase vehicle charge time.
for Battery Charging
desired charge level. When electrical grid power is The AC outlet must have a
Normal Level: This level is completely blocked, the vehicle grounded, dedicated, 15 amp or
recommended. All four charge level will delay charging until the utility greater, three‐prong wall plug. That
indicators will be lit. interruption has expired. The vehicle means there should be no other
should be left plugged in so that, major appliances connected to the
Reduced Level: Use when the same circuit. If it is not a dedicated
electrical current is limited. Two when the utility interruption expires,
the vehicle can automatically begin circuit, the current rating of the
charge level indicators will be lit. outlet circuit breaker could be
charging.
Vehicle Plug exceeded and cause it to trip or
Changing the charge mode to open. The vehicle can be charged
The vehicle plug attaches to the Immediate or performing a delayed in the reduced level mode. See
charge port on the vehicle. There is charging override will not disable a “Charge Level Button” in this
a flashlight built into the vehicle plug utility interruption. section. Reduced level mode allows
that can be used by squeezing the A pop‐up will be displayed in the a non‐dedicated circuit to be used
vehicle plug lever. The flashlight will center stack display during the but increases the charging time.
turn off when the connection is key cycle following any utility This vehicle is capable of being
complete and the lever is released. interruption. See “Charge Override/ charged with a variety of standard
Interruption Pop‐up” under Charging vehicle charging equipment.
Utility Interruption of on page 5‑31.
The following are the minimum
Charging Text will be displayed on the requirements for circuits used to
For participating customers, this instrument cluster notifying the charge this vehicle:
vehicle will respond to remote customer that a utility interruption
has occurred. See Instrument
. 120V/15Amp
requests via OnStar to limit or
completely block electrical power Cluster on page 5‑10. . 240V/20Amp
Charging equipment with a rating of Fuel

at least 240V/20Amp will provide
the fastest charging time to Use of the recommended fuel is
recharge the high voltage battery. an important part of the proper
240V/40Amp circuits provide maintenance of this vehicle. To help
flexibility for future vehicle charging keep the engine clean and maintain
needs. Contact your dealer for more optimum vehicle performance, we
information. recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Do not use non‐grounded electrical
Gasoline.
plug adapters.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
Notice: Do not use portable or
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
stationary backup generating
enhanced detergency standards Use premium unleaded gasoline
equipment to charge the vehicle.
developed by auto companies. A list with a posted octane rating of 91 or
This may cause damage to the
of marketers providing TOP TIER higher. If the octane is less than 91,
vehicle's charging system. Only
Detergent Gasoline can be found at you could damage the engine.
charge the vehicle from utility
www.toptiergas.com. If heavy knocking is heard when
supplied power.
using gasoline rated at 91 octane or
higher, the engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications California Fuel Fuels in Foreign

(U.S. and Canada Only) Requirements Countries
At a minimum, gasoline should If the vehicle is certified to meet Never use leaded gasoline or any
meet ASTM specification California Emissions Standards, it is other fuel not recommended in the
D 4814 in the United States designed to operate on fuels that previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in meet California specifications. See caused by use of improper fuel
Canada. Some gasolines contain the underhood emission control would not be covered by the vehicle
an octane-enhancing additive label. If this fuel is not available in warranty.
called methylcyclopentadienyl states adopting California Emissions To check the fuel availability, ask an
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We Standards, the vehicle will operate auto club, or contact a major oil
recommend against the use of satisfactorily on fuels meeting company that does business in the
gasolines containing MMT. See Fuel federal specifications, but emission country where you will be driving.
Additives on page 9‑54 for control system performance might
additional information. be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the Fuel Additives
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on in the United States are now
page 5‑19. If this occurs, return to required to contain additives that
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. help prevent engine and fuel system
If it is determined that the condition deposits from forming, allowing the
is caused by the type of fuel used, emission control system to work
repairs might not be covered by the properly. In most cases, nothing
vehicle warranty. should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain For customers who do not use TOP Notice: This vehicle was not
only the minimum amount of TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, designed for fuel that contains
additive required to meet U.S. one bottle of GM Fuel System methanol. Do not use fuel
Environmental Protection Agency Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel containing methanol. It can
regulations. To help keep fuel tank at every engine oil change, corrode metal parts in the fuel
injectors and intake valves clean can help clean deposits from fuel system and also damage plastic
and avoid problems due to dirty injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel and rubber parts. That damage
injectors or valves, look for gasoline System Treatment PLUS is the only would not be covered under the
that is advertised as TOP TIER gasoline additive recommended by vehicle warranty.
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the General Motors. It is available at Some gasolines that are
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to your dealer. not reformulated for low
ensure gasoline meets enhanced Gasolines containing oxygenates, emissions can contain an
detergency standards developed such as ethers and ethanol, and octane-enhancing additive called
by the auto companies. A list of reformulated gasolines might be methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
marketers providing TOP TIER available in your area. We tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
Detergent Gasoline can be found at recommend that you use these where you buy gasoline whether the
www.toptiergas.com. gasolines, if they comply with the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
specifications described earlier. against the use of such gasolines.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Fuels containing MMT can reduce
other fuels containing more than spark plug life and affect emission
15% ethanol must not be used in control system performance. The
vehicles that were not designed for malfunction indicator lamp might
those fuels. turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service.
Filling the Tank The fuel system on this vehicle

requires a refueling process to
control evaporative emissions. To
{ WARNING refuel the vehicle:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump 2. When the READY TO REFUEL
island. Turn off the vehicle when message displays, the fuel door
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel on the passenger side will
or when refueling the vehicle. Do unlock. Push the rearward edge
not use cellular phones. Keep of the fuel door in and release to
sparks, flames, and smoking open the door.
materials away from fuel. Do not 3. Turn the fuel cap
leave the fuel pump unattended counterclockwise to remove.
when refueling the vehicle. This is 1. Press the fuel door button on While refueling, hang the fuel
against the law in some places. the driver door for one second. cap tether from the hook on the
Do not re-enter the vehicle while A WAIT TO REFUEL message inside of the fuel door. Complete
pumping fuel. Keep children away displays on the Driver refueling within 30 minutes of
from the fuel pump; never let Information Center. pushing the fuel door button on
children pump fuel. the driver door. If refueling more
than 30 minutes, push the fuel
door button again.
4. After refueling, reinstall the fuel
cap by turning it clockwise until it
clicks. Close the fuel door.
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Fuel can spray out on you by shutting off the pump or by container can ignite the fuel
if you open the fuel cap too notifying the station attendant. vapor. You can be badly burned
quickly. If you spill fuel and then Leave the area immediately. and the vehicle damaged if this
something ignites it, you could be occurs. To help avoid injury to you
badly burned. This spray can Notice: If a new fuel cap is and others:
happen if the tank is nearly full, needed, be sure to get the right . Dispense fuel only into
and is more likely in hot weather. type of cap from your dealer. The approved containers.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait wrong type of fuel cap might not
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
. Do not fill a container while
fit properly, might cause the
unscrew the cap all the way. it is inside a vehicle, in a
malfunction indicator lamp to
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
light, and could damage the fuel
or on any surface other than
Do not top off or overfill the tank and tank and emissions system. See
the ground.
wait a few seconds before removing Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑19. . Bring the fill nozzle in contact
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
with the inside of the fill
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Filling a Portable Fuel opening before operating the
Exterior Care on page 10‑78.
nozzle. Contact should be
Container maintained until the filling is
{ WARNING complete.
If a fire starts while you are
{ WARNING . Do not smoke while
refueling, do not remove the Never fill a portable fuel container pumping fuel.
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel while it is in the vehicle. Static . Do not use a cellular phone
(Continued) electricity discharge from the while pumping fuel.
(Continued)
Towing Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
Add-Ons vehicle is not operating.
General Towing
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Information Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything
The vehicle is neither designed nor Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see
intended to tow a trailer or another Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Notice: Do not add anything Vehicle on page 3‑30 and Adding
vehicle.
electrical to the vehicle unless Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
For information on towing a disabled you check with your dealer first. Vehicle on page 3‑31.
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on Some electrical equipment can
page 10‑73. For information on damage the vehicle and the
towing the vehicle behind another damage would not be covered
vehicle such as a motor home, see by the vehicle's warranty. Some
Recreational Vehicle Towing on add-on electrical equipment can
page 10‑76. keep other components from
working as they should.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Cooling System (Power

Electronics and Charger
Electrical System
High Voltage Devices and
Modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Electrical System
General Information Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Engine Compartment Fuse
California Proposition Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Instrument Panel Fuse Block
California Perchlorate Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 (Left Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Electric Drive Unit Shift Lock Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Accessories and Control Function Check . . . 10-24 (Right Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Park Brake and P (Park) Rear Compartment Fuse
Lifting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Vehicle Checks Wiper Blade
Doing Your Own Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Wheels and Tires
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Headlamp Aiming Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Compartment
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Bulb Replacement Tire Terminology and
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Pressure Monitor
Cooling System (Engine) . . . 10-14 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Cooling System (High Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Tire Pressure Monitor
Voltage Battery) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New Jump Starting General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 For service and parts needs,
Different Size Tires and Towing visit your dealer. You will receive
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-73 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Uniform Tire Quality Recreational Vehicle and supported service people.
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Genuine GM parts have one of
Wheel Alignment and Tire Appearance Care these marks:
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-57
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Cleaning the Center
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Tire Sealant and
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
California Proposition 65
Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
Vehicle Care 10-3
cause cancer and birth defects or Accessories and not covered under the terms of the
other reproductive harm. Engine vehicle warranty and may affect
exhaust, many parts and systems,
Modifications remaining warranty coverage for
many fluids, and some component Adding non‐dealer accessories or affected parts.
wear by-products contain and/or making modifications to the vehicle GM Accessories are designed to
emit these chemicals. can affect vehicle performance and complement and function with other
safety, including such things as systems on the vehicle. See your
California Perchlorate airbags, braking, stability, ride and dealer to accessorize the vehicle
Materials Requirements handling, emissions systems, using genuine GM Accessories
aerodynamics, durability, and installed by a dealer technician.
Certain types of automotive electronic systems like antilock
applications, such as airbag brakes, traction control, and stability Also, see Adding Equipment to the
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, control. These accessories or Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
and lithium batteries contained in modifications could even cause page 3‑31.
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, malfunction or damage not covered
may contain perchlorate materials. by the vehicle warranty. Lifting the Vehicle
Special handling may be necessary.
Damage to vehicle components This vehicle can be lifted with a
For additional information, see
resulting from modifications or the hoist or a service jack. Do not use
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
installation or use of non‐GM any other type of jack to lift the
perchlorate.
certified parts, including control vehicle.
module or software modifications, is
10-4 Vehicle Care
Lifting the Vehicle with a Hoist The rear lifting points can be
This vehicle can be lifted with a accessed from either side of the { WARNING
hoist at the four locations, as vehicle, in front of the rear tires.
Getting under a vehicle when it is
illustrated. Lifting the Vehicle with a jacked up is dangerous. If the
Notice: Lifting the vehicle Service Jack vehicle slips off the jack, you
improperly can damage the could be badly injured or killed.
vehicle and result in costly { WARNING Never get under a vehicle when it
repairs not covered by the is supported only by a jack.
warranty. Lifting a vehicle can cause an
injury. The vehicle can slip off the
jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be { WARNING
badly injured. Find a level place
to lift your vehicle. To help Raising the vehicle with the
prevent the vehicle from moving: jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle or the vehicle
1. Set the parking brake firmly. may fall and cause you or others
2. Put the shift lever in injury.
P (Park).
3. Turn off the vehicle. When using a jack to lift the vehicle,
follow the instructions that came
To be even more certain the with the jack and be sure to use
vehicle will not move, put blocks the correct lifting points to avoid
The front lifting points can be in front of and behind the wheels.
accessed from either side of the damaging the vehicle.
vehicle, behind the front tires.
Vehicle Care 10-5
Notice: Lifting the vehicle

improperly can cause damage
and result in costly repairs not
covered by the warranty. To lift
the vehicle properly, use this
procedure.
For additional information, see
your dealer and the service
manual.
When lifting the vehicle from the When lifting the vehicle from the
rear, place the service jack directly front, place the service jack directly
under the spring seat. under the cradle mount. Ramps may
be needed under the front tires to
provide the necessary clearance for
certain service jacks in this location.
For more information, see Doing
Your Own Service Work on
page 10‑6.
There are four points where the

vehicle can be lifted with a
service jack.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Doing Your Own High voltage components are . Be sure to use the proper
Service Work identified by labels. Do not nuts, bolts, and other
remove, open, take apart, fasteners. Metric and English
or modify these components. fasteners can be easily
{ WARNING High voltage cable or wiring has confused. If the wrong
orange covering. Do not probe, fasteners are used, parts can
Never try to do your own later break or fall off. You
service on high voltage battery tamper with, cut, or modify high
voltage cable or wiring. could be hurt.
components. You can be injured
and the vehicle can be damaged
if you try to do your own service If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
work. Service and repair of these
high voltage battery components
{ WARNING manual. It tells you much more
should only be performed by a about how to service the vehicle
You can be injured and the
than this manual can. To order the
trained dealer technician with the vehicle could be damaged if you
proper service manual, see Service
proper knowledge and tools. try to do service work on a vehicle Publications Ordering Information
Exposure to high voltage can without knowing enough about it. on page 13‑12.
cause shock, burns, and . Be sure you have sufficient This vehicle has an airbag system.
even death. The high voltage knowledge, experience, Before attempting to do your own
components in the vehicle can the proper replacement service work, see Airbag System
only be serviced by technicians parts, and tools before Check on page 3‑31.
with special training. attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-7
Keep a record with all parts receipts To close the hood:

and list the mileage and the date 1. Before closing the hood, check
of any service work performed. that all filler caps are properly
See Maintenance Records on installed. Then, lift the hood
page 11‑14. to relieve pressure on the
hood prop.
Hood
2. Remove the hood prop from the
To open the hood: slotted retainer in the hood and
1. Turn the vehicle off before 3. Go to the front of the vehicle and return it to its retainer above the
opening the hood. If the vehicle locate the secondary release radiator support. The prop rod
is on, the engine will start when lever under the front center of must lock into place when
the hood is opened. See Electric the hood. Push the secondary returning it to the retainer to
Mode on page 9‑21 and hood release lever to the right to prevent hood damage.
Extended Range Mode on disengage. 3. Lower the hood 20 cm (8 in)
page 9‑22. above the vehicle and release it
4. Lift the hood and release the
hood prop rod from its retainer so it fully latches. Check to
above the radiator support. make sure the hood is firmly
Place the prop rod securely into closed. Repeat the process if
the slotted retainer in the hood. necessary.
2. Pull the release handle with

this symbol. It is below the
instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
10-8 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview

Vehicle Care 10-9
A. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and System (Power Electronics Engine Oil
Pressure Cap. See Engine and Charger Modules) on
Coolant on page 10‑16. page 10‑16. To ensure proper engine
performance and long life, careful
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on H. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See attention must be paid to engine
page 10‑12. “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on oil. Following these simple, but
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine page 10‑20. important steps will help protect
Oil on page 10‑9. I. High Voltage Cables (Orange your investment:
D. High Voltage Battery Coolant Color). . Always use engine oil approved
Reservoir and Pressure Cap. J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. to the proper specification and of
See Cooling System (Engine) See Jump Starting on the proper viscosity grade. See
on page 10‑14 or Cooling page 10‑68. “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
System (High Voltage Battery) in this section.
K. Power Electronics Module.
on page 10‑15 or Cooling . Check the engine oil level
System (Power Electronics L. Windshield Washer Fluid
regularly and maintain the
and Charger Modules) on Reservoir. See “Adding Washer proper oil level. See “Checking
page 10‑16. Fluid” under Washer Fluid on Engine Oil” and “When to Add
page 10‑19. Engine Oil” in this section.
E. Engine Cover.
M. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine . Change the engine oil at the
See Jump Starting on appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Oil on page 10‑9. page 10‑68. Life System on page 10‑12.
G. Power Electronics Coolant N. Engine Compartment Fuse
Reservoir and Pressure Cap. . Always dispose of engine oil
Block on page 10‑31.
See Cooling System (Engine) properly. See “What to Do with
on page 10‑14 or Cooling Used Oil” in this section.
System (High Voltage Battery)
on page 10‑15 or Cooling
10-10 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
It is a good idea to check the engine
be damaged. You should drain
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
out the excess oil or limit driving
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
of the vehicle and seek a service
must be on level ground. The
professional to remove the
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
excess amount of oil.
loop. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑8 for the See Engine Compartment Overview
location of the engine oil dipstick. If the oil is below the cross-hatched on page 10‑8 for the location of the
area at the tip of the dipstick, add engine oil fill cap.
Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential: 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil Add enough oil to put the level
and then recheck the level. See somewhere in the proper operating
1. If the engine has been running “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in range. Push the dipstick all the way
recently, turn off the engine and this section for an explanation of back in when through.
allow several minutes for the oil what kind of oil to use. For engine
to drain back into the oil pan. oil crankcase capacity, see Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Checking the oil level too soon Capacities and Specifications on
after engine shutoff will not Selecting the right engine oil
page 12‑2. depends on both the proper oil
provide an accurate oil level
reading. Notice: Do not add too much oil. specification and viscosity grade.
Oil levels above or below the See Recommended Fluids and
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it acceptable operating range Lubricants on page 11‑12.
with a paper towel or cloth, then shown on the dipstick are harmful
push it back in all the way. Specification
to the engine. If you find that
Remove it again, keeping the tip you have an oil level above the Use and ask for licensed engine
down, and check the level. operating range, i.e., the engine oils with the dexos1™ approved
has so much oil that the oil level certification mark. Engine oils
gets above the cross-hatched meeting the requirements for the
Vehicle Care 10-11
vehicle should have the dexos1 If in an area of extreme cold, where What to Do with Used Oil
approved certification mark. This the temperature falls below −20°F
Used engine oil contains certain
certification mark indicates that the (−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil should
elements that can be unhealthy for
oil has been approved to the dexos1 be used. An oil of this viscosity
your skin and could even cause
specification. grade will provide easier cold
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
starting for the engine at extremely
your skin for very long. Clean your
low temperatures. When selecting
skin and nails with soap and water,
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
grade, always select an oil that
properly dispose of clothing or rags
meets the dexos1 specification or
containing used engine oil. See the
equivalent. See “Specification” for
manufacturer's warnings about the
more information.
use and disposal of oil products.
Notice: Failure to use the Engine Oil Additives/Engine
recommended engine oil or Used oil can be a threat to the
Oil Flushes environment. If you change your
equivalent can result in engine
damage not covered by the Do not add anything to the oil. The own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
vehicle warranty. Check with your recommended oils with the dexos from the filter before disposal. Never
dealer or service provider on specification and displaying the dispose of oil by putting it in the
whether the oil is approved to the dexos certification mark are all that trash or pouring it on the ground,
dexos1 specification. is needed for good performance and into sewers, or into streams or
engine protection. bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
Viscosity Grade it to a place that collects used oil.
Engine oil system flushes are not
SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscosity recommended and could cause
grade for the vehicle. Do not use engine damage not covered by the
other viscosity grade oils such as vehicle warranty.
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.
10-12 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Life System every two years and, at this time, 3. The DIC menu will display “Are
the system must be reset. Your you sure that you want to reset?”
When to Change Engine Oil dealer has trained service people Use SELECT to choose YES to
This vehicle has a computer system who will perform this work and reset reset oil life or NO to exit and
that indicates when to change the the system. It is also important to return to the previous menu.
engine oil and filter. This is based check the oil regularly over the 4. If YES is selected, the DIC menu
on a combination of factors which course of an oil drain interval and will display RESET OIL LIFE for
include engine revolutions, engine keep it at the proper level. a short time and then 100% OIL
temperature, and miles driven. If the system is ever reset LIFE will be displayed when OIL
Based on driving conditions, the accidentally, the oil must be LIFE is successfully reset.
mileage at which an oil change is changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
indicated can vary considerably. For since the last oil change. message comes back on when the
the oil life system to work properly, Remember to reset the oil life vehicle is started, the engine oil life
the system must be reset every time system whenever the oil is changed. system has not reset. Repeat the
the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil procedure.
When the system has calculated Life System
that oil life has been diminished, it Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
indicates that an oil change is Reset the system whenever the
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE engine oil is changed so that the See Engine Compartment Overview
OIL SOON message comes on. system can calculate the next on page 10‑8 for the location of the
Change the oil as soon as possible engine oil change. To reset the engine air cleaner/filter.
within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). system:
When to Inspect the Engine Air
It is possible that, if driving under 1. Use the SELECT knob to select Filter
the best conditions, the oil life OIL LIFE on the DIC menu.
system might indicate that an oil Inspect the air filter at the scheduled
change is not necessary for up to 2. Press SELECT to start the OIL maintenance intervals and replace
two years. The engine oil and filter LIFE reset procedure. it at the first oil change after each
must be changed at least once 80 000 km (50,000 mi) interval.
Vehicle Care 10-13
See Maintenance Schedule on 5. Lift the retaining clips (A) from

page 11‑3 for more information. the engine air cleaner/filter
If driving in dusty/dirty conditions, assembly.
inspect the air filter at each engine 6. Turn and tilt the air cleaner cover
oil change. slightly upward and slide it out.
How to Inspect the Engine Air Remove the air filter.
Filter How to Reinstall the Engine
To inspect the air filter, remove it Air Filter
from the engine air cleaner/filter 1. Install the air filter into the
assembly and lightly shake to engine air cleaner/filter
release loose dust and dirt. If the air assembly. The outer air filter
filter remains covered with dirt, a A. Retaining Clips seal must be fitted properly in
new air filter is required. the engine air cleaner/filter
B. Air Duct Clamp
To inspect or replace the air filter: assembly.
C. Electrical Connector
1. Open the hood. See Hood on 2. Replace the air cleaner cover by
3. Disconnect the air duct by
page 10‑7. lowering it to meet the bottom
loosening the air duct clamp (B).
2. Locate the engine air cleaner/ of the engine air cleaner/filter
4. Disconnect the electrical assembly. Place the retaining
filter assembly on the passenger
connector (C). clips (A) on the engine air
side of the engine compartment.
See Engine Compartment cleaner/filter assembly and
Overview on page 10‑8. secure. The rear tabs must be
secured into the lower portion of
the air cleaner.
10-14 Vehicle Care
3. Reconnect the air duct and Cooling System (Engine) If the coolant inside the coolant
tighten the air duct clamp (B). surge tank is boiling, do not do
When it is safe to lift the hood: anything else until it cools down.
4. Reconnect the electrical
connector (C). The vehicle should be parked on a
level surface.
{ WARNING The coolant level should be up to
the cold fill line. If it is not, there
Operating the engine with the air might be a leak at the radiator
cleaner/filter off can cause you hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
or others to be burned. The air pump, or somewhere else in the
cleaner not only cleans the air; it cooling system.
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when A. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and { WARNING
working on the engine and do not Pressure Cap
drive with the air cleaner/filter off. Heater and radiator hoses, and
B. Engine Cooling Fans (Out
other engine parts, can be very
of View)
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is you can be burned.
off, dirt can easily get into the { WARNING Do not run the vehicle if there is
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter The electric fans under the hood a leak. If you run the engine, it
in place when you are driving. can start up even when the could lose all coolant. That could
engine is not running and can cause an engine fire, and you
cause injury. Keep hands, could be burned. Get any leak
clothing, and tools away from fixed before you drive the vehicle.
any underhood electric fan.
Vehicle Care 10-15
If there seems to be no leak, with If the temperature rises above this The high voltage battery coolant
the engine on, check to see if the temperature, the battery cooling reservoir is located on the
electric cooling fans are running. system turns on the air conditioning passenger side of the engine
If the engine is overheating, the fans compressor and cools the coolant compartment. See Engine
should be running. If it is not, the until the correct temperature is Compartment Overview on
vehicle needs service. Turn off the reached. If the temperature falls page 10‑8 for more information on
vehicle. below this temperature, a high location.
Notice: Using coolant other than voltage heater, located in the
DEX-COOL® can cause premature battery, heats the coolant until the
engine, heater core, or radiator correct temperature is reached.
corrosion. In addition, the engine What to Use
coolant could require changing
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi) The high voltage battery coolant
or 24 months, whichever occurs reservoir in the vehicle is filled with
first. Any repairs would not be a 50/50 mixture of DEX-COOL
covered by the vehicle warranty. engine coolant and deionized water.
Always use DEX-COOL If using this mixture, nothing else
(silicate-free) coolant in the needs to be added. Check to see if coolant is visible in
vehicle. the high voltage battery coolant
Checking Coolant reservoir. If coolant is visible but the
Cooling System (High The vehicle must be on a level coolant level is below the cold fill
surface when checking the coolant line, there could be a leak in the
Voltage Battery) level. cooling system.
During vehicle operation and The high voltage battery coolant
also during charging, the high should only be serviced by a
voltage battery cells in the qualified technician.
vehicle are kept within a normal
operating temperature range.
10-16 Vehicle Care
Cooling System (Power Checking Coolant The power electronics and charger
modules coolant should only be
Electronics and Charger The vehicle must be on a level
serviced by a qualified technician.
Modules) surface when checking the coolant
level.
The power electronics and charger Engine Coolant
modules are cooled using the same The power electronics and charger
modules coolant reservoir is located The engine cooling system in the
coolant loop. vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL
on the driver side of the engine
The power electronics and charger compartment. See Engine engine coolant. This coolant is
modules in the vehicle are kept Compartment Overview on designed to remain in the vehicle for
below a maximum temperature. page 10‑8 for more information on 5 years or 240 000 km (150,000 mi),
If the temperature rises above this location. whichever occurs first.
temperature, the electric cooling The following explains the cooling
fans will turn on and cool the system and how to check and add
coolant until the correct temperature coolant when it is low. If there is a
is reached. problem with engine overheating,
What to Use see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑19.
The power electronics and charger
modules coolant reservoir in the What to Use
vehicle is filled with a 50/50 mixture
of DEX-COOL engine coolant and { WARNING
deionized water. If using this Check to see if coolant is visible in
mixture, nothing else needs to be the power electronics and charger Adding only plain water or some
added. modules coolant reservoir. If coolant other liquid to the cooling system
is visible but the coolant level is can be dangerous. Plain water
below the cold fill line, there could and other liquids, can boil before
be a leak in the cooling system. (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-17

. Protects against rust and Checking Coolant
WARNING (Continued) corrosion.
.
The vehicle must be on a level
the proper coolant mixture will. Will not damage aluminum parts. surface when checking the coolant
The coolant warning system is set . Helps keep the proper engine level.
for the proper coolant mixture. temperature. Check to see if coolant is visible in
With plain water or the wrong Notice: If an improper coolant the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
mixture, the engine could get too mixture is used, the engine could inside the coolant surge tank is
hot but you would not get the overheat and be badly damaged. boiling, do not do anything else until
overheat warning. The engine The repair cost would not be it cools down. If coolant is visible
could catch fire and you or covered by the vehicle warranty. but the coolant level is not at or
others could be burned. Use a Too much water in the mixture above the cold fill mark, add a
50/50 mixture of deionized water can freeze and crack the engine, 50/50 mixture of deionized water
and DEX-COOL coolant. radiator, heater core, and other and DEX-COOL coolant at the
parts. coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system is cool before this is
Use a 50/50 mixture of deionized Never dispose of engine coolant by
done. See Engine Overheating on
water and DEX-COOL coolant. putting it in the trash, pouring it on
If using this mixture, nothing else the ground, or into sewers, streams,
needs to be added. This mixture: or bodies of water. Have the coolant The coolant reservoir is located on
changed by an authorized service the passenger side of the engine
. Gives freezing protection down center, familiar with legal compartment. See Engine
to −37°C (−34°F), outside requirements regarding used Compartment Overview on
temperature. coolant disposal. This will help page 10‑8 for more information on
. Gives boiling protection up to protect the environment and your location.
129°C (265°F), engine health.
temperature.
10-18 Vehicle Care
The coolant level should be at or If coolant is needed, add the proper

above the cold fill line on the { WARNING DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
coolant surge tank. If it is not, there coolant surge tank.
could be a leak in the cooling The electric fans under the hood
system. can start up even when the
engine is not running and can
How to Add Coolant to the cause injury. Keep hands,
Coolant Surge Tank clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING
The coolant surge tank pressure
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts. { WARNING cap can be removed when the
cooling system, including the surge
Coolant contains ethylene glycol tank pressure cap and upper
Steam and scalding liquids from a
and it will burn if the engine parts radiator hose, is no longer hot.
hot cooling system can blow out
are hot enough. Do not spill
and burn you badly. They are 1. Turn the pressure cap slowly
coolant on a hot engine.
under pressure, and if you turn counterclockwise. If a hiss is
the surge tank pressure heard, wait for that to stop.
Notice: This vehicle has a cap — even a little — they can A hiss means there is still some
specific coolant fill procedure. come out at high speed. Never pressure left.
Failure to follow this procedure turn the cap when the cooling
could cause the engine to 2. Keep turning the cap and
system, including the surge tank remove it.
overheat and be severely pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
damaged. cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
Vehicle Care 10-19
Engine Overheating Washer Fluid

The vehicle has an indicator to warn What to Use
of engine overheating.
When adding windshield washer
If the decision is made not to lift the fluid to the vehicle, be sure to read
hood when this warning appears, the manufacturer's instructions
get service help right away. See before use. If operating the vehicle
Roadside Assistance Program on in an area where the temperature
page 13‑6. may fall below freezing, use a fluid
If the decision is made to lift the that has sufficient protection against
hood, make sure the vehicle is freezing.
parked on a level surface.
Adding Washer Fluid
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with Then check to see if the engine
the proper mixture to the cold The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
cooling fans are running. If the
fill line. FLUID message will appear on the
engine is overheating, the fans
Driver Information Center (DIC)
4. Replace the pressure cap. should be running. If they are not,
when the fluid level is low. See
Be sure the pressure cap is do not continue to run the vehicle
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
hand‐tight and fully seated. and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not Notice: Engine damage from
tightly installed, coolant loss and running the engine without
possible engine damage may coolant is not covered by the
occur. Be sure the cap is properly warranty.
and tightly secured.
10-20 Vehicle Care

. Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is { WARNING
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing The brake wear warning sound
occurs, which could damage means that soon the brakes will
the tank if it is not work well. That could lead to
completely full. a crash. When the brake wear
Open the cap with the washer
. Do not use engine coolant warning sound is heard, have the
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
(antifreeze) in the windshield vehicle serviced.
the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on washer. It can damage the
page 10‑8 for reservoir location. windshield washer system Notice: Continuing to drive with
and paint. worn-out brake pads could result
Notice
in costly brake repair.
. When using concentrated Brakes Some driving conditions or climates
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc can cause a brake squeal when
for adding water. brake pads have built-in wear the brakes are first applied or
indicators that make a high-pitched lightly applied. This does not
. Do not mix water with warning sound when the brake pads mean something is wrong with the
ready-to-use washer fluid. are worn and new pads are needed. brakes.
Water can cause the solution The sound can come and go or be
to freeze and damage the heard all the time the vehicle is
washer fluid tank and other moving, except when applying the
parts of the washer system. brake pedal firmly.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
Vehicle Care 10-21
Properly torqued wheel nuts are Replacing Brake System Parts Brake Fluid
necessary to help prevent brake
The braking system on a vehicle is
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
complex. Its many parts have to be
inspect brake pads for wear and
of top quality and work well together
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
if the vehicle is to have really good
proper sequence to torque
braking. The vehicle was designed
specifications in Capacities and
and tested with top-quality brake
Specifications on page 12‑2.
parts. When parts of the braking
Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get The brake master cylinder reservoir
replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts. is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
If this is not done, the brakes might indicated on the reservoir cap. See
Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example, Engine Compartment Overview on
See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are page 10‑8 for the location of the
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change reservoir.
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and
pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The There are only two reasons why the
that brake service might be braking performance expected can brake fluid level in the reservoir
required. change in many other ways if the might go down:
wrong replacement brake parts are . The brake fluid level goes down
Brake Adjustment installed. because of normal brake lining
Every time the brakes are applied, wear. When new linings are
with or without the vehicle moving, installed, the fluid level goes
the brakes adjust for wear. back up.
10-22 Vehicle Care

. A fluid leak in the brake When the brake fluid falls to a low operating range (B) between the
hydraulic system can also cause level, the brake warning light comes MIN and MAX marks. If it is not,
a low fluid level. Have the brake on. See Brake System Warning have the brake hydraulic system
hydraulic system fixed, since a Light on page 5‑22. checked to see if there is a leak.
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well. Checking Brake Fluid After work is done on the brake
hydraulic system, make sure the
Do not top off the brake fluid. Check brake fluid by looking at the level, with the vehicle running, is in
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. brake fluid reservoir. See Engine the proper operating range (B)
If fluid is added when the linings Compartment Overview on between the MIN and MAX marks.
are worn, there will be too much page 10‑8.
fluid when new brake linings are What to Add
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
as necessary, only when work is from a sealed container. See
done on the brake hydraulic system. Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑12.
{ WARNING Always clean the brake fluid
If too much brake fluid is added, it reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
can spill on the engine and burn,
helps keep dirt from entering the
if the engine is hot enough. You reservoir.
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic With the vehicle not running for at
system. least one minute, the maximum fluid
level (A) is at the top of the reservoir
body. With the vehicle running, the
fluid level should be in the proper
Vehicle Care 10-23

. If brake fluid is spilled on the See “If a Crash Occurs” under
{ WARNING vehicle's painted surfaces, Collision Damage Repair on
the paint finish can be page 13‑10 for additional
With the wrong kind of fluid in damaged. Be careful not to information. If an airbag has
the brake hydraulic system, the spill brake fluid on the inflated, see What Will You See
brakes might not work well. This vehicle. If you do, wash it off after an Airbag Inflates? on
could cause a crash. Always use immediately. page 3‑24.
the proper brake fluid.
Only a trained service technician
Battery with the proper knowledge and tools
Notice This vehicle has a high voltage should inspect, test, or replace the
. Using the wrong fluid battery and a standard 12‐volt high voltage battery. See your
can badly damage brake battery. dealer if the high voltage battery
hydraulic system parts. For If the vehicle is in a crash, the needs service. The dealer has
example, just a few drops of sensing system may shut down the information on how to recycle the
mineral-based oil, such as high voltage system. When this high voltage battery. There is
engine oil, in the brake occurs, the high voltage battery is also information available at
hydraulic system can disconnected and the vehicle will http://www.recyclemybattery.com.
damage brake hydraulic not start. The SERVICE VEHICLE Keep the vehicle plugged in, even
system parts so badly that SOON message in the Driver when fully charged, to keep the high
they will have to be replaced. Information Center (DIC) will be voltage battery temperature ready
Do not let someone put in displayed. Before the vehicle can be for the next drive. This is important
the wrong kind of fluid. operated again, it must be serviced when outside temperatures are
at your dealer. extremely hot or cold.
A vehicle cover, which can reduce
sun loading on the vehicle and
improve high voltage battery life, is
available from your dealer.
10-24 Vehicle Care
Refer to the replacement number Remember to reconnect the 12‐volt

shown on the original battery label WARNING (Continued) battery when ready to drive the
when a new 12‐volt battery is vehicle.
needed. The vehicle has an See Jump Starting on page 10‑68
for tips on working around a
Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) 12‐volt
battery without getting hurt.
Electric Drive Unit Shift
battery. Installation of a standard
12‐volt battery will result in reduced
Lock Control Function
12‐volt battery life. Extended Storage Check
Remove the 12‐volt battery black,
{ WARNING negative (−) cable from the battery { WARNING
to keep the 12‐volt battery from When you are doing this
Battery posts, terminals, and
running down or use a battery trickle inspection, the vehicle could
related accessories contain lead
charger. move suddenly. If the vehicle
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to In addition, to avoid potential moves, you or others could be
cause cancer and reproductive damage to the high voltage battery, injured.
harm. Wash hands after handling. perform the following recommended
steps:
1. Before starting this check, be
Vehicle Storage
. Store the high voltage battery sure there is enough room
with 1/2 charge or less. around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
{ WARNING . Always store the vehicle in an
environment between −10°C 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12‐volt batteries have acid that (14°F) and 30°C (86°F). See Electric Parking Brake on
can burn you and gas that can . Vehicle storage at extreme page 9‑30.
explode. You can be badly temperatures can cause damage Be ready to apply the regular
hurt if you are not careful. to the high voltage battery. brake immediately if the vehicle
(Continued) begins to move.
Vehicle Care 10-25
3. With the vehicle off and the Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Wiper Blade Replacement
brake not applied, press and vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set Windshield wiper blades should be
hold the POWER O button for
the electric parking brake. inspected for wear and cracking.
more than five seconds to place See Maintenance Schedule on
the vehicle in Service Only . To check the electric parking page 11‑3 for more information.
Mode. See Power Button on brake's holding ability: With the
page 9‑16. Without applying the propulsion system active and the Replacement blades come in
regular brake, try to move the electric drive unit in N (Neutral), different types and are removed
shift lever out of P (Park) with slowly remove foot pressure in different ways. For proper type
normal effort. If the shift lever from the regular brake pedal. Do and length, see Maintenance
moves out of P (Park), contact this until the vehicle is held by Replacement Parts on page 11‑13.
your dealer for service. the electric parking brake only. Notice: Allowing the wiper blade
. To check the P (Park) arm to touch the windshield when
Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability: no wiper blade is installed could
Mechanism Check With the propulsion system damage the windshield. Any
active, shift to P (Park). Then damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not
{ WARNING release the electric parking
brake followed by the regular allow the wiper blade arm to
When you are doing this check, brake. touch the windshield.
the vehicle could begin to move. Contact your dealer if service is To replace the windshield wiper
You or others could be injured required. blade:
and property could be damaged. 1. Pull the windshield wiper
Make sure there is room in front assembly away from the
of the vehicle in case it begins to windshield.
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
10-26 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement

Headlamp aim has been preset at For the proper type of replacement
the factory and should need no bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
further adjustment. page 10‑29.
However, if the vehicle is damaged For any bulb‐changing procedure
in a crash, the headlamp aim may not listed in this section, contact
be affected. Aim adjustment to the your dealer.
low-beam headlamps may be
necessary if oncoming drivers flash Halogen Bulbs
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
2. Press the button in the middle of
{ WARNING
If the headlamps need to be
the wiper arm connector, and re-aimed, it is recommended that Halogen bulbs have pressurized
pull the wiper blade away from the vehicle be taken to a dealer for gas inside and can burst if you
the arm connector. service. drop or scratch the bulb. You or
3. Remove the wiper blade. others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 for
on the bulb package.
wiper blade replacement.
LED Lighting
This vehicle has several LED lamps.
For replacement of any LED lighting
assembly, contact your dealer.
Vehicle Care 10-27
Headlamps 6. Install the bulb socket by turning 3. Remove the air cleaner
it clockwise. assembly by pulling up to
Driver Side Headlamps 7. Install the cover in the back of release the rear two retention
To replace the high/low‐beam the headlamp assembly by posts from the securing
headlamp: turning it clockwise. grommets. Then pull it forward to
remove the remaining retention
1. Open the hood. See Hood on Passenger Side Headlamps post from the securing grommet.
page 10‑7.
To replace the high/low‐beam
headlamp:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑7.
4. Remove the cover from the back

2. Remove the cover from the back of the headlamp assembly by
of the headlamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the bulb from the
3. Remove the bulb socket from headlamp assembly by turning it
the headlamp assembly by counterclockwise.
turning it counterclockwise.
6. Disconnect the bulb from the
4. Remove the bulb from the wiring harness connector.
socket.
7. Install the new bulb in the
5. Install the new bulb in the headlamp assembly by turning it
socket. 2. Remove the air cleaner cover. clockwise.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑12.
10-28 Vehicle Care
8. Reconnect the wiring harness To replace a bulb: License Plate Lamp

connector. 1. Remove the three inboard To replace one of these bulbs:
9. Install the cover on the back of screws from the aero panel
the headlamp assembly by located under the rear fascia.
turning it clockwise. 2. Push up on the aero panel to
10. Install the air cleaner assembly locate the bulb socket.
by lowering the three retention 3. Turn the bulb socket
posts into the grommets. counterclockwise to remove it
11. Install the engine air cleaner/ from the bulb assembly.
filter assembly cover. See 4. Pull the bulb from the bulb
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on socket.
page 10‑12.
5. Push a new bulb straight into the
Back-Up Lamps bulb socket.
6. Reinstall the bulb socket by
1. Press the spring clip on the right
lining up the tabs in the lamp
end of the lamp assembly to the
assembly and turn it clockwise
left to unlock the lamp assembly.
to lock it into place.
2. Pull down on the lamp assembly
7. Replace the three inboard
to remove it from the fascia.
screws from the aero panel.
The back-up lamp is in the rear

fascia.
Vehicle Care 10-29
5. Push the replacement bulb Replacement Bulbs

straight into the bulb socket (A)
and turn the bulb socket (A) Bulb
Exterior Lamp
clockwise to install it into the Number
lamp assembly (C). Back-Up Lamps 3157K
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly (C) High/Low‐Beam
into the fascia by inserting the HIR2 (9012)
Headlamps
left side first.
License Plate
A. Bulb Socket 7. Push the spring clip side into W5W LL
Lamps
place.
B. Bulb
For replacement bulbs not listed
C. Lamp Assembly here, contact your dealer.
3. Turn the bulb socket (A)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the lamp assembly (C).
4. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of
the bulb socket (A).
10-30 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Electrical System borrowed. Choose some feature of

the vehicle that is not needed to use
Overload and replace it as soon as possible.
High Voltage Devices and The vehicle has fuses and circuit
Wiring breakers to protect against an Headlamp Wiring
electrical system overload. An electrical overload may cause
{ WARNING When the current electrical load is the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
Exposure to high voltage can and closes, protecting the circuit headlamp wiring checked right away
cause shock, burns, and even until the current load returns to if the lamps go on and off or
death. The high voltage normal or the problem is fixed. remain off.
components in the vehicle can This greatly reduces the chance of Windshield Wipers
only be serviced by technicians circuit overload and fire caused by
with special training. electrical problems. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
High voltage components are Fuses and circuit breakers protect wipers will stop until the motor cools
identified by labels. Do not the following in the vehicle: and the wiper control is turned off.
remove, open, take apart, . Headlamp Wiring After removal of the blockage, the
or modify these components. wiper motor will restart when the
High voltage cable or wiring has
. Windshield Wiper Motor control is then moved to the desired
orange covering. Do not probe, . Power Windows and other operating position.
tamper with, cut, or modify high Power Accessories Although the circuit is protected
voltage cable or wiring. Replace a bad fuse with a new one from electrical overload, overload
of the identical size and rating. due to heavy snow or ice, may
If there is a problem on the road and cause wiper linkage damage.
a fuse needs to be replaced, the Always clear ice and heavy snow
same amperage fuse can be from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
Vehicle Care 10-31
If the overload is caused by an

electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
To open the fuse block cover, press A fuse puller is located in the engine Mini Usage
the clips at the front and back and compartment fuse block. Fuses
rotate the cover up to the side. The vehicle may not be equipped Engine Control
with all of the fuses, relays, and 1
Notice: Spilling liquid on any Module – Switched Power
electrical component on the features shown.
2 Emissions
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical 3 Not Used
component.
10-32 Vehicle Care
Mini Usage Mini Usage Mini Usage

Fuses Fuses Fuses
4 Ignition Coils/Injectors Engine Control Power Electronics
17 36
Module – Battery Coolant Pump
5 Not Used
22 Left High‐Beam Headlamp Cabin Heater Control
6a Empty 37
Module
24 Empty
6b Not Used
Rechargeable Energy
25 Empty
7 Empty Storage System (High
38
26 Not Used Voltage Battery)
8 Empty
Coolant Pump
31 Not Used
9 Heated Mirrors
Run/Crank – Sensing Rechargeable Energy
Air Conditioning Control Storage System (High
10 Diagnostic Module (SDM), 39
Module Voltage Battery) Control
Instrument Cluster,
Traction Power Inverter Module
32 Passenger Airbag Display,
11
Module – Battery Automatic Dimming 40 Front Windshield Washer
12 Not Used Inside Rearview Mirror
Right High‐Beam
(If Equipped) 41
Cabin Heater Pump and Headlamp
13 Run/Crank for Vehicle
Valve 33 46 Empty
Integration Control Module
14 Not Used 47 Empty
Vehicle Integration Control
Traction Power Inverter 34
Module – Battery 49 Empty
15 Module and Transmission
35 Not Used
Control Module – Battery
Vehicle Care 10-33
Mini Usage J‐Case Usage J‐Case Usage

Fuses Fuses Fuses
Run/Crank – Rear Vision AIR Solenoid 45 Empty
16
50 Camera, Accessory (PZEV Only)
48 Cooling Fan – Left
Power Module
18 Empty
Run/Crank for ABS/ Mini Relays Usage
Power
Rechargeable Energy 19
51 Window – Front 3 Powertrain
Storage System (High
Voltage Battery) 20 Empty 4 Heated Mirrors
Engine Control Module/ Antilock Brake 7 Empty
52 Transmission Control 21 System Electronic
Module – Run/Crank Control Unit AIR Pump
9
(PZEV Only)
Traction Power Inverter 23 Charge Port Door
53 11 Empty
Module – Run/Crank
AIR Pump
27 12 Empty
Run/Crank – Fuel System (PZEV Only)
Control Module, Air 28 Empty 13 Empty
54 Conditioning Control
Module, On Board 29 Empty 14 Run/Crank
Charger Antilock Brake
30 Micro Usage
System Motor
Relays
42 Cooling Fan – Right
1 Empty
43 Front Wipers
AIR Solenoid
44 Charger 2
(PZEV Only)
10-34 Vehicle Care
Micro Usage
Relays
6 Empty
8 Empty
10 Empty
Ultra Micro Usage

Relays
5 Charge Port Door
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block (Left Side) A fuse puller is located in the engine Fuses Usage
The left instrument panel fuse compartment fuse block.
block is on the left side end of the F4 Infotainment Display
The vehicle may not be equipped
instrument panel. To access the with all of the fuses, relays, and Heating, Ventilation
fuses, open the fuse panel door by features shown. & Air Conditioning/
F5
pulling out. Integrated Center
Fuses Usage
To reinstall the door, insert the Stack Switches
bottom tab first, then push the door Power Outlet – Top
F1 Airbag (Sensing
back into its original location. of IP Storage Bin
Diagnostic Module/
F2 Radio F6
Passenger Sensing
F3 Instrument Cluster Module)
Vehicle Care 10-35
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage

Data Link Body Control Retained Accessory
F7 Connector, Left F11 Module 4/Left R1 Power Relay for
(Primary) Headlamp Power Outlets
F8 Empty F12 Empty R2 Empty
F9 OnStar F13 Empty R3 Empty
Body Control F14 Empty R4 Empty
Module 1/Body
Power Outlet (Inside
Control Module Diodes Usage
F15 Floor Console/Rear
Electronics/Keyless
of Floor Console) DIODE Empty
Entry/Power Moding/
Center High F16 Empty
Mounted Stoplamp/ F17 Empty
License Plate
F10 F18 Empty
Lamps/Left Daytime
Running Lamp/Left
Parking Lamps/
Hatch Release
Relay Control/
Washer Pump Relay
Control/Switch
Indicator Lights
10-36 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel Fuse

Block (Right Side)
The right instrument panel fuse
block is on the right side end of the
instrument panel. To access the
fuses, open the fuse panel door by
pulling out.
To reinstall the door, insert the
bottom tab first, then push the door
back into its original location.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
A fuse puller is located in the engine Fuses Usage

compartment fuse block.
Body Control Module 3/
The vehicle may not be equipped F4
Right Headlamp
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. Body Control Module 2/
Body Control Module
Fuses Usage
Electronics/Hatch Lamp/
Steering Wheel Switch F5
F1 Right Daytime Running
Backlighting Lamp/Shifter Lock/Switch
F2 Empty Backlighting
F3 Empty
Vehicle Care 10-37

Body Control Module 5/ Body Control Module 8/ R1 Empty
F9
Retained Accessory Locks
R2 Empty
Power Relay Control/Right
Data Link Connector,
Front Turn Signal Lamp/ F10 R3 Empty
F6 Right (Secondary)
Left Rear Stop and Turn
R4 Child Lockout Relay
Signal Lamp/Right Universal Garage Door
F11
Parking Lamps/Remote Opener (If Equipped)
PRNDL Diodes Usage
F12 Blower Motor
Body Control Module 6/ DIODE Empty
F13 Empty
F7 Map Lights/Courtesy
Lights/Back – up Lamp F14 Empty
Body Control Module 7/ F15 Empty
Left Front Turn Signal/ F16 Empty
Right Rear Stop and
F8 F17 Empty
Turn Signal Lamp/Child
Security Lock Relay F18 Empty
Control
10-38 Vehicle Care
Rear Compartment Fuse

Block
The rear compartment fuse block
is on the left side of the rear
compartment behind a removable
cover. Open the latch to remove the
cover and access the fuse block.
A fuse puller is located in the engine Fuses Usage

compartment fuse block.
F1 Empty
The vehicle may not have all of the
fuses, relays, and features shown. Fuel System Control
F2
Module
Passive Start/Passive
F3
Entry Module
Vehicle Care 10-39

Heated Regulated Voltage Rear Defog
F4 R1
Seats (If Equipped) Control/Ultrasonic Front (Upper Grid)
F10
and Rear Parking Assist
Driver Door Switches R2 Hatch Release
(If Equipped)
(Outside Rearview Mirror/
R3 Empty
F5 Charge Port Door F11 Horn
Release/Refuel Request/ R4 Empty
F12 Rear Power Windows
Driver Window Switch) R5 Empty
F13 Electric Parking Brake
Fuel (Diurnal Valve and R6 Empty
F6 Evap. Leak Check F14 Rear Defog (Upper Grid)
Module) R7 Empty
F15 Empty
Accessory Power Module R8 Horn
F7 F16 Hatch Release
Cooling Fan
F17 Empty Diodes Usage
Amplifier
F8 F18 Empty
(If Equipped) DIODE Empty
F9 Empty
10-40 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires can
same danger as overloaded cause a crash. Only the
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. See Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
the warranty manual for maintain the recommended the tires.
information regarding the tire pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
warranty and where to get should be checked when the excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
service. For additional tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such as
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more snow, mud, ice, etc.
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING impact — such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
. Poorly maintained and the recommended pressure. Winter Tires
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause a Consider installing winter tires on
dangerous. crash. If the tread is badly the vehicle if frequent driving on
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them. snow or ice covered roads is
cause overheating as a result expected. All season tires provide
. Replace any tires that have good overall performance on most
of too much flexing. There been damaged by impacts
could be a blowout and a surfaces, but they may not offer
with potholes, curbs, etc. the traction or the same level of
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑11. (Continued) performance as winter tires on snow
or ice covered roads.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-41
Winter tires, in general, are tires with a lower speed rating are aspect ratio, construction type,
designed for increased traction on chosen, never exceed the tire's and service description. See the
snow and ice covered roads. With maximum speed capability. “Tire Size” illustration later in this
winter tires, there may be decreased section for more detail.
dry road traction, increased road Tire Sidewall Labeling
noise, and shorter tread life. After (B) TPC Spec (Tire
changing to winter tires, be alert for Useful information about a tire Performance Criteria
changes in vehicle handling and is molded into its sidewall. The Specification): Original
braking. examples show a typical equipment tires designed to
See your dealer for details passenger tire sidewall. GM's specific tire performance
regarding winter tire availability and criteria have a TPC specification
proper tire selection. Also, see code molded onto the sidewall.
Buying New Tires on page 10‑54. GM's TPC specifications meet
If using snow tires: or exceed all federal safety
. Use tires of the same brand and
guidelines.
tread type on all four wheel (C) DOT (Department of
positions. Transportation): The
. Use only radial ply tires of the Department of Transportation
same size, load range, and (DOT) code indicates that
speed rating as the original the tire is in compliance with
equipment tires. the U.S. Department of
Winter tires with the same speed Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example Transportation Motor Vehicle
rating as the original equipment tires (A) Tire Size: The tire size is Safety Standards.
may not be available for H, V, W, Y, a combination of letters and
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
10-42 Vehicle Care
(D) Tire Identification Number (G) Maximum Cold Inflation vehicle tire engineered to
(TIN): The letters and numbers Load Limit: Maximum load standards set by the U.S. Tire
following the DOT code are that can be carried and the and Rim Association.
the Tire Identification Number maximum pressure needed to (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
(TIN). The TIN shows the support that load. number indicates the tire section
manufacturer and plant code, width in millimeters from
tire size, and date the tire was Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall.
manufactured. The TIN is
Tire Size (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may The following is an example of a number that indicates the tire
have the date of manufacture. typical passenger vehicle height‐to‐width measurements.
tire size. For example, if the tire size
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
of cord and number of plies in item C of the illustration, it would
the sidewall and under the tread. mean that the tire's sidewall is
(F) Uniform Tire Quality 60 percent as high as it is wide.
Grading (UTQG): Tire (D) Construction Code: A
manufacturers are required to letter code is used to indicate
grade tires based on three the type of ply construction in
performance factors: treadwear, (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a the tire. The letter R means
traction, and temperature radial ply construction; the
resistance. For more information metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in letter D means diagonal or
see Uniform Tire Quality bias ply construction; and the
Grading on page 10‑55. the tire size means a passenger
letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
Vehicle Care 10-43
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of drive unit, power steering, power before a tire has built up heat
the wheel in inches. brakes, power windows, power from driving. See Tire Pressure
(F) Service Description: These seats, and air conditioning. on page 10‑46.
characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a
index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and
tire. The load index represents Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including
the load carrying capacity a tire cords that is located between the maximum capacity of fuel,
is certified to carry. The speed the plies and the tread. Cords oil, and coolant, but without
rating is the maximum speed a may be made from steel or other passengers and cargo.
tire is certified to carry a load. reinforcing materials. DOT Markings: A code molded
Bead: The tire bead contains into the sidewall of a tire
Tire Terminology and signifying that the tire is in
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto compliance with the U.S.
Air Pressure: The amount the rim. Department of Transportation
of air inside the tire pressing (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
outward on each square inch Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code
of the tire. Air pressure is in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
or psi (pounds per square inch). 90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
the tread. identify the tire manufacturer,
Accessory Weight: The production plant, brand, and
combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire, date of production.
accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, electric measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑11.
10-44 Vehicle Care
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: outward when mounted on a
Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to vehicle. The side of the tire that
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. contains a whitewall, bears
page 9‑11. The maximum air pressure is white lettering, or bears
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight molded onto the sidewall. manufacturer, brand, and/or
Rating for the rear axle. See Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is
Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same
page 9‑11. maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall
pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall :
The side of an asymmetrical tire, Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars
when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight, and some light duty trucks and
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure. production options weight. Recommended Inflation
Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A manufacturer's recommended
tire used on light duty trucks and number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown
some multipurpose passenger on the tire placard. See Tire
vehicles. 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑11. Pressure on page 10‑46 and
Load Index: An assigned Vehicle Load Limits on
number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution : page 9‑11.
that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions.
carrying capacity of a tire. Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
Vehicle Care 10-45
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear number of designated seating
extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the tread positions multiplied by
90 degrees to the centerline of of a tire when only 1.6 mm 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
the tread. (1/16 in) of tread remains. See cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Rim: A metal support for a tire When It Is Time for New Tires Limits on page 9‑11.
and upon which the tire beads on page 10‑53. Vehicle Maximum Load on the
are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Tire: Load on an individual tire
Sidewall: The portion of a tire Grading Standards): A tire due to curb weight, accessory
between the tread and the bead. information system that provides weight, occupant weight, and
consumers with ratings for a cargo weight.
Speed Rating: An tire's traction, temperature,
alphanumeric code assigned to Vehicle Placard: A label
and treadwear. Ratings permanently attached to a
a tire indicating the maximum are determined by tire
speed at which a tire can vehicle showing the vehicle's
manufacturers using capacity weight and the
operate. government testing procedures. original equipment tire size
Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the and recommended inflation
the tire and the road surface. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform pressure. See “Tire and Loading
The amount of grip provided. Tire Quality Grading on Information Label” under Vehicle
page 10‑55. Load Limits on page 9‑11.
Tread: The portion of a tire
that comes into contact with
the road.
10-46 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure
. Rough ride. When to Check
Tires need the correct amount
. Needless damage from Check the tires once a month
of air pressure to operate road hazards. or more.
effectively. The Tire and Loading How to Check
Notice: Neither tire Information label on the vehicle
indicates the original equipment Use a good quality pocket-type
underinflation nor gauge to check the tire
overinflation is good. tires and the correct cold tire
inflation pressures. The pressure. Proper tire inflation
Underinflated tires, or tires cannot be determined by looking
that do not have enough air, recommended pressure is the
minimum air pressure needed to at the tire. Check the tire
can result in: inflation pressure when the tires
support the vehicle's maximum
. Tire overloading and load carrying capacity. are cold, meaning the vehicle
overheating which could has not been driven for at least
lead to a blowout. For additional information three hours or no more than
regarding how much weight 1.6 km (1 mi).
. Premature or the vehicle can carry, and an
irregular wear. example of the Tire and Loading Remove the valve cap from the
Information label, see Vehicle tire valve stem. Press the tire
. Poor handling.
Load Limits on page 9‑11. How gauge firmly onto the valve to
. Reduced fuel economy. the vehicle is loaded affects get the pressure measurement.
Overinflated tires, or tires that vehicle handling and ride If the cold tire inflation pressure
have too much air, can comfort. Never load the vehicle matches the recommended
result in: with more weight than it was pressure on the Tire and
designed to carry. Loading Information label, no
. Unusual wear. further adjustment is necessary.
. Poor handling.
Vehicle Care 10-47
If the inflation pressure is low, vehicle placard or tire inflation Please note that the TPMS is
add air until the recommended pressure label. (If your vehicle has not a substitute for proper tire
pressure is reached. If the tires of a different size than the size maintenance, and it is the driver's
inflation pressure in high, press indicated on the vehicle placard or responsibility to maintain correct tire
tire inflation pressure label, you pressure, even if under‐inflation has
on the metal stem in the center
should determine the proper tire not reached the level to trigger
of the tire valve to release air. inflation pressure for those tires.) illumination of the TPMS low tire
Re‐check the tire pressure with pressure telltale.
the tire gauge. As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a Your vehicle has also been
Return the valve caps on the tire pressure monitoring system equipped with a TPMS malfunction
valve stems to keep out dirt and (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire indicator to indicate when the
moisture and prevent leaks. pressure telltale when one or system is not operating properly.
more of your tires is significantly The TPMS malfunction indicator is
Tire Pressure Monitor under‐inflated. combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
System Accordingly, when the low tire
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
pressure telltale illuminates, you
The Tire Pressure Monitor System should stop and check your tires as approximately one minute and then
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor soon as possible, and inflate them remain continuously illuminated.
technology to check tire pressure to the proper pressure. Driving on a This sequence will continue upon
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor significantly under‐inflated tire subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
the air pressure in your tires and causes the tire to overheat and can long as the malfunction exists.
transmit tire pressure readings to a lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
receiver located in the vehicle. also reduces fuel efficiency and
Each tire, including the spare tire tread life, and may affect the
(if provided), should be checked vehicle's handling and stopping
monthly when cold and inflated to ability.
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
10-48 Vehicle Care
When the malfunction indicator is Communications Commission (FCC) located on the instrument cluster.
illuminated, the system may not be Rules and with Industry Canada If the warning light comes on, stop
able to detect or signal low tire Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. as soon as possible and inflate the
pressure as intended. TPMS tires to the recommended pressure
malfunctions may occur for a variety Tire Pressure Monitor shown on the Tire Loading and
of reasons, including the installation Information label. See Vehicle Load
of replacement or alternate tires or
Operation Limits on page 9‑11.
wheels on the vehicle that prevent This vehicle may have a Tire
A message to check the pressure in
the TPMS from functioning properly. Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
a specific tire displays in the Driver
Always check the TPMS malfunction The TPMS is designed to warn the
Information Center (DIC). The low
telltale after replacing one or more driver when a low tire pressure
tire pressure warning light and the
tires or wheels on your vehicle to condition exists. TPMS sensors are
DIC warning message come on at
ensure that the replacement or mounted onto each tire and wheel
each drive cycle until the tires are
alternate tires and wheels allow assembly. The TPMS sensors
inflated to the correct inflation
the TPMS to continue to function monitor the air pressure in the tires
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
properly. and transmit the tire pressure
pressure levels can be viewed. For
readings to a receiver located in the
See Tire Pressure Monitor additional information and details
vehicle.
Operation on page 10‑48 for about the DIC operation and
additional information. displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑43.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and The low tire pressure warning light
with Industry Canada may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
Standards turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
See Radio Frequency Statement on could be an early indicator that the
When a low tire pressure condition
page 13‑16 for information air pressure is getting low and
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
regarding Part 15 of the Federal needs to be inflated to the proper
the low tire pressure warning light
pressure.
Vehicle Care 10-49
A Tire and Loading Information Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits The malfunction light and DIC
label shows the size of the original use a GM-approved liquid tire warning message come on at each
equipment tires and the correct sealant. Using non-approved tire vehicle on/off cycle until the problem
inflation pressure for the tires when sealants could damage the TPMS is corrected. Some of the conditions
they are cold. See Vehicle Load sensors. See Tire Sealant and that can cause these to come
Limits on page 9‑11, for an example Compressor Kit on page 10‑60 for on are:
of the Tire and Loading Information information regarding the inflator kit . One of the road tires has been
label and its location. Also see Tire materials and instructions. replaced with the spare tire,
Pressure on page 10‑46. if the vehicle has one. The spare
TPMS Malfunction Light and
The TPMS can warn about a Message tire does not have a TPMS
low tire pressure condition but it sensor. The malfunction light
does not replace normal tire The TPMS will not function properly and DIC message should go off
maintenance. See Tire Inspection if one or more of the TPMS sensors after the road tire is replaced
on page 10‑51, Tire Rotation on are missing or inoperable. When the and the sensor matching
page 10‑52, and Tires on system detects a malfunction, the process is performed
page 10‑40. low tire pressure warning light successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
flashes for about one minute and Matching Process" later in this
Notice: Tire sealant materials are then stays on for the remainder of
not all the same. A non-approved section.
the vehicle on/off cycle. A DIC
tire sealant could damage the warning message also displays.
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
damage caused by using an
incorrect tire sealant is not
covered by the vehicle
warranty. Always use only
the GM-approved tire sealant
available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle.
10-50 Vehicle Care

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
process was started but not being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire,
completed or not completed wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger
successfully after rotating the TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear.
tires. The DIC message and sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to
malfunction light should go If the TPMS is not functioning purchase a relearn tool.
off once the TPMS sensor properly , it cannot detect or signal a
matching process is performed There are two minutes to match
low tire condition. See your dealer the first tire/wheel position, and
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor for service if the TPMS malfunction
Matching Process” later in this five minutes overall to match all
light and DIC message come on four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
section. and stay on. longer, the matching process stops
. One or more TPMS sensors are and must be restarted.
missing or damaged. The DIC TPMS Sensor Matching
message and the malfunction Process Follow the TPMS sensor matching
light should go off when the process:
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
TPMS sensors are installed and identification code. The identification 1. Set the parking brake.
the sensor matching process is code needs to be matched to a new 2. Put the vehicle in ON/RUN and
performed successfully. See tire/wheel position after rotating the place the vehicle in P (Park).
your dealer for service. vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
more of the TPMS sensors. Also, 3. If the DIC display is minimized,
. Replacement tires or wheels do
the TPMS sensor matching process press the SELECT knob to
not match the original equipment
should be performed after replacing maximize it.
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
other than those recommended a spare tire with a road tire 4. Use the SELECT knob to scroll
could prevent the TPMS from containing the TPMS sensor. The to the Tire Pressure display
functioning properly. See Buying malfunction light and the DIC screen.
New Tires on page 10‑54. message should go off at the next
drive cycle. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions,
Vehicle Care 10-51
5. Press and hold the SELECT 9. Proceed to the passenger Tire Inspection
knob for five seconds to begin side front tire, and repeat the
the sensor matching process. procedure in Step 8. We recommend that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the
A message displays confirming 10. Proceed to the passenger
to begin the process. side rear tire, and repeat the vehicle has one, be inspected
procedure in Step 8. for signs of wear or damage at
6. Use the SELECT knob to select least once a month.
YES with the highlighted 11. Proceed to the driver side rear
selection, and press the tire, and repeat the procedure Replace the tire if:
SELECT knob again to confirm in Step 8. The horn sounds . The indicators at three or
the selection. two times to indicate the
sensor identification code has
more places around the tire
The horn sounds twice to signal can be seen.
the receiver is in relearn mode been matched to the driver
and the TIRE LEARNING side rear tire, and the TPMS . There is cord or fabric
ACTIVE message displays on sensor matching process is showing through the tire's
the DIC screen. no longer active. The TIRE rubber.
LEARNING ACTIVE message
7. Start with the driver side on the DIC display screen . The tread or sidewall is
front tire. goes off. cracked, cut, or snagged
8. Place the relearn tool against 12. Turn the vehicle off. deep enough to show cord or
the tire sidewall, near the valve fabric.
stem. Then press the button to 13. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure . The tire has a bump, bulge,
activate the TPMS sensor.
A horn chirp confirms that the level as indicated on the Tire or split.
sensor identification code has and Loading Information label.
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.
10-52 Vehicle Care

. The tire has a puncture, cut, Check that all wheel nuts are
or other damage that cannot properly tightened. See “Wheel
be repaired well because of Nut Torque” under Capacities
the size or location of the and Specifications on
damage. page 12‑2.
Tire Rotation { WARNING
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 mi). The first Rust or dirt on a wheel, or
rotation is the most important. on the parts to which it is
See Maintenance Schedule on fastened, can make wheel
page 11‑3. nuts become loose after a
Use this rotation pattern when time. The wheel could come
Tires are rotated to achieve a rotating the tires. off and cause a crash. When
more uniform wear for all tires. Adjust the front and rear tires changing a wheel, remove any
Any time unusual wear is to the recommended inflation rust or dirt from places where
noticed, rotate the tires as soon pressure on the Tire and the wheel attaches to the
as possible, and check the Loading Information label after vehicle. In an emergency, a
wheel alignment. Also check for the tires have been rotated. See cloth or a paper towel can be
damaged tires or wheels. See Tire Pressure on page 10‑46 used, however, use a scraper
When It Is Time for New Tires and Vehicle Load Limits on or wire brush to remove all
on page 10‑53 and Wheel page 9‑11. rust or dirt.
Replacement on page 10‑57. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑48.
Vehicle Care 10-53
Lightly coat the center of the maintenance affect how fast aging
wheel hub with wheel bearing takes place. Tires will typically
grease after a wheel change or need to be replaced due to wear
tire rotation to prevent corrosion before they may need to be
replaced due to age. Consult the tire
or rust build-up. Do not get
manufacturer for more information
grease on the flat wheel on when tires should be replaced.
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts. Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally
When It Is Time for New mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
Tires a vehicle that will be stored for at
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
Factors such as maintenance, Treadwear indicators are one way
area away from direct sunlight to
temperatures, driving speeds, to tell when it is time for new tires.
slow aging. This area should be
vehicle loading, and road conditions Treadwear indicators appear when
free of grease, gasoline, or other
affect the wear rate of the tires. the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
substances that can deteriorate
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
rubber.
Inspection on page 10‑51 and Tire
Rotation on page 10‑52 for more Parking for an extended period can
information. cause flat spots on the tires that
may result in vibrations while
The rubber in tires ages over time.
driving. When storing a vehicle for
This also applies for the spare tire,
at least a month, remove the tires
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
or raise the vehicle to reduce the
never used. Multiple conditions
weight from the tires.
including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
10-54 Vehicle Care
Buying New Tires If the tires have an all‐season tread

design, the TPC spec number will { WARNING
GM has developed and matched be followed by MS, for mud and
specific tires for the vehicle. The snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on Mixing tires of different sizes,
original equipment tires installed page 10‑41 for additional brands, or types may cause
on the vehicle, when it was new, information. loss of control of the vehicle,
were designed to meet General resulting in a crash or other
Motors Tire Performance Criteria GM recommends replacing all the
tires at the same time. Uniform vehicle damage. Use the
Specification (TPC Spec) system correct size, brand, and type
rating. When replacement tires are tread depth on all tires will help to
needed, GM strongly recommends maintain the performance of the of tire on all wheels.
buying tires with the same TPC vehicle. Braking and handling
Spec rating. This way, the vehicle performance may be adversely
affected if all the tires are not
will continue to have tires that
are designed to give the same replaced at the same time. See { WARNING
performance and vehicle safety, Tire Inspection on page 10‑51 and
Using bias-ply tires on the
during normal use, as the original Tire Rotation on page 10‑52 for
information on proper tire rotation. vehicle may cause the wheel
tires. rim flanges to develop cracks
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system after many miles of driving.
considers over a dozen critical { WARNING A tire and/or wheel could fail
specifications that impact the Tires could explode during suddenly and cause a crash.
overall performance of the Use only radial-ply tires with
improper service. Attempting
vehicle, including brake system the wheels on the vehicle.
performance, ride and handling, to mount or dismount a tire
traction control, and tire pressure could cause injury or death.
monitoring performance. GM's TPC Only your dealer or authorized If the vehicle tires must be replaced
Spec number is molded onto the tire service center should with a tire that does not have a TPC
tire's sidewall near the tire size. mount or dismount the tires. Spec number, make sure they are
Vehicle Care 10-55
the same size, load range, speed brakes, rollover airbags, traction Uniform Tire Quality
rating, and construction (radial) as control, and electronic stability
the original tires. control, the performance of these
Grading
Vehicles that have a tire pressure systems can also be affected. Quality grades can be found
monitoring system could give an where applicable on the tire
inaccurate low‐pressure warning { WARNING sidewall between tread shoulder
if non‐TPC Spec rated tires are and maximum section width. For
installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor If different sized wheels are used, example:
System on page 10‑47. there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety Treadwear 200 Traction AA
The Tire and Loading Information if tires not recommended for Temperature A
Label indicates the original those wheels are selected. This
equipment tires on the vehicle. See The following information relates
increases the chance of a crash
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11,
and serious injury. Only use GM
to the system developed by the
for the label location and more United States National Highway
information about the Tire and specific wheel and tire systems
developed for the vehicle, and Traffic Safety Administration
Loading Information label. (NHTSA), which grades tires
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician. by treadwear, traction, and
Different Size Tires and temperature performance. This
Wheels applies only to vehicles sold in
See Buying New Tires on
If wheels or tires are installed that page 10‑54 and Accessories and
the United States. The grades
are a different size than the original Modifications on page 10‑3 for are molded on the sidewalls
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle additional information. of most passenger car tires.
performance, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover
may be affected. If the vehicle has
electronic systems such as antilock
10-56 Vehicle Care
The Uniform Tire Quality Treadwear controlled conditions on

Grading (UTQG) system The treadwear grade is a specified government test
does not apply to deep comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and
tread, winter-type snow tires, wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may
space-saver, or temporary use under controlled conditions on have poor traction performance.
spare tires, tires with nominal a specified government test Warning: The traction grade
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on
(25 to 30 cm), or to some graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction
limited-production tires. a half (1½) times as well on the tests, and does not include
While the tires available on government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
General Motors passenger cars graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
and light trucks may vary with performance of tires depends characteristics.
respect to these grades, they upon the actual conditions of Temperature – A, B, C
must also conform to federal their use, however, and may
The temperature grades
safety requirements and depart significantly from the
are A (the highest), B, and C,
additional General Motors Tire norm due to variations in driving
representing the tire's resistance
Performance Criteria (TPC) habits, service practices and
to the generation of heat and
standards. differences in road
its ability to dissipate heat
All Passenger Car Tires Must characteristics and climate.
when tested under controlled
Conform to Federal Safety Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor
Requirements In Addition To laboratory test wheel. Sustained
The traction grades, from
These Grades. high temperature can cause the
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead
Vehicle Care 10-57
to sudden tire failure. The will not be necessary on a regular Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
grade C corresponds to a basis. However, check the nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
level of performance which all alignment if there is unusual tire System (TPMS) sensors with new
passenger car tires must meet wear or if the vehicle is pulling to GM original equipment parts.
one side or the other. If the vehicle
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B
vibrates when driving on a smooth
road, the tires and wheels might
{ WARNING
and A represent higher levels of need to be rebalanced. See your Using the wrong replacement
performance on the laboratory dealer for proper diagnosis. wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
test wheel than the minimum nuts can be dangerous. It could
required by law. Warning: The Wheel Replacement affect the braking and handling of
temperature grade for this tire the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
Replace any wheel that is bent,
is established for a tire that is cracked, or badly rusted or and cause loss of control, causing
properly inflated and not corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming a crash. Always use the correct
overloaded. Excessive speed, loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
underinflation, or excessive wheel nuts should be replaced. nuts for replacement.
loading, either separately or in If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
combination, can cause heat Some aluminum wheels can be Notice: The wrong wheel can
buildup and possible tire failure. repaired. See your dealer if any of also cause problems with bearing
these conditions exist. life, brake cooling, speedometer
Wheel Alignment and Tire Your dealer will know the kind of or odometer calibration,
Balance wheel that is needed. headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
The tires and wheels were aligned Each new wheel should have the
clearance to the body and
and balanced at the factory to same load-carrying capacity,
chassis.
provide the longest tire life and best diameter, width, offset and be
overall performance. Adjustments to mounted the same way as the
wheel alignment and tire balancing one it replaces.
10-58 Vehicle Care
Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING { WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly { WARNING
on the parts to which it is tightened wheel nuts can cause Replacing a wheel with a used
fastened, can make wheel the wheel to become loose and one is dangerous. How it has
nuts become loose after a even come off. This could lead been used or how far it has been
time. The wheel could come to a crash. Be sure to use the driven may be unknown. It could
off and cause a crash. When correct wheel nuts. If you have to fail suddenly and cause a crash.
changing a wheel, remove any replace them, be sure to get new When replacing wheels, use a
rust or dirt from places where GM original equipment new GM original equipment
the wheel attaches to the wheel nuts. wheel.
vehicle. In an emergency, a
cloth or a paper towel can be Notice: Improperly tightened
used, however, use a scraper wheel nuts can lead to brake Tire Chains
or wire brush to remove all pulsation and rotor damage. To
rust or dirt. avoid expensive brake repairs, { WARNING
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the Do not use tire chains. There is
proper torque specification. not enough clearance. Tire chains
{ WARNING used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
Never use oil or grease on studs cause damage to the brakes,
or the threads of the wheel nuts. suspension, or other vehicle
The wheel nuts might come loose (Continued)
and the wheel could fall off,
causing a crash.
Vehicle Care 10-59
To properly lift this vehicle, see

WARNING (Continued) Lifting the Vehicle on page 10‑3. { WARNING
parts. The area damaged by the It is unusual for a tire to blowout Driving on a flat tire will cause
tire chains could cause loss of while driving, especially if the tires permanent damage to the tire.
control and a crash. are maintained properly. See Tires Re-inflating a tire after it has
on page 10‑40. If air goes out of a been driven on while severely
Use another type of traction tire, it is much more likely to leak
device only if its manufacturer underinflated or flat may cause a
out slowly. But if there ever is a blowout and a serious crash.
recommends it for the vehicle's blowout, here are a few tips about
tire size combination and Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
what to expect and what to do:
road conditions. Follow that that has been driven on while
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will severely underinflated or flat.
manufacturer's instructions. To create a drag that pulls the vehicle
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow Have your dealer or an authorized
toward that side. Take your foot off tire service center repair or
and readjust or remove the the accelerator pedal and grip the
traction device if it contacts the replace the flat tire as soon as
steering wheel firmly. Steer to possible.
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. maintain lane position, and then
If traction devices are used, install gently brake to a stop, well off the
them on the front tires. road, if possible. If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
A rear blowout, particularly on a to a level place and stopping, well
If a Tire Goes Flat curve, acts much like a skid and off the road, if possible.
may require the same correction as
This vehicle has a tire sealant and used in a skid. Stop pressing the 1. Turn on the hazard warning
compressor kit. See Tire Sealant accelerator pedal and steer to flashers. See Hazard Warning
and Compressor Kit on page 10‑60. straighten the vehicle. It may be Flashers on page 6‑3.
There is no spare tire, no tire very bumpy and noisy. Gently
changing equipment, and no place 2. Set the parking brake firmly.
brake to a stop, well off the road,
to store a tire. if possible.
10-60 Vehicle Care
3. Put the shift lever in P (Park). Tire Sealant and

See Shifting Into Park on
Compressor Kit
{ WARNING
page 9‑19.
Overinflating a tire could cause
4. Turn off the engine.
{ WARNING the tire to rupture and you or
others could be injured. Be
5. Inspect the flat tire.
Running the engine in Extended sure to read and follow the tire
If the tire has been separated from
Range Mode in an enclosed area sealant and compressor kit
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
with poor ventilation is dangerous. instructions and inflate the tire to
or has a puncture larger than
6 mm (¼ in), the tire is too severely Engine exhaust may enter the its recommended pressure. Do
damaged for the tire sealant and vehicle. Engine exhaust contains not exceed the recommended
compressor kit to be effective. See carbon monoxide (CO) which pressure.
Roadside Assistance Program on cannot be seen or smelled. It can
page 13‑6. cause unconsciousness and even
death. Never run the engine in
If the tire has a puncture less than
Extended Range Mode in an { WARNING
6 mm (¼ in) in the tread area of
enclosed area that has no Storing the tire sealant and
the tire, see Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑60. fresh air ventilation. For more compressor kit or other
information, see Engine Exhaust equipment in the passenger
on page 9‑26. compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
Vehicle Care 10-61
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and The kit includes: A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or
compressor kit, there may not be a Air Only)
spare tire, tire changing equipment, B. On/Off Button
and on some vehicles there may not
be a place to store a tire. C. Pressure Gauge
The tire sealant and compressor D. Pressure Deflation Button
can be used to temporarily seal (If equipped)
punctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in the E. Tire Sealant Canister
tread area of the tire. It can also be
used to inflate an underinflated tire. F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
If the tire has been separated from G. Air Only Hose (Black)
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, H. Power Plug
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire Tire Sealant
sealant and compressor kit to be Read and follow the safe handling
effective. See Roadside Assistance instructions on the label adhered to
Program on page 13‑6. the sealant canister.
Read and follow all of the tire Check the tire sealant expiration
sealant and compressor kit date on the sealant canister.
instructions. The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
10-62 Vehicle Care
There is only enough sealant to seal heated environment for five minutes.
one tire. After usage, the sealant This will help to inflate the tire
canister and sealant/air hose faster.
assembly must be replaced. See If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
“Removal and Installation of the and wheel damage by driving slowly
Sealant Canister” following. to a level place. Turn on the hazard
Using the Tire Sealant and warning flashers. See Hazard
Compressor Kit to Temporarily Warning Flashers on page 6‑3.
Seal and Inflate a See If a Tire Goes Flat on
Punctured Tire page 10‑59 for other important
safety warnings.
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage. Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑67.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
and the power plug (H).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
When using the tire sealant and positioned close to the ground
compressor kit during cold so the hose will reach it.
temperatures, warm the kit in a
Vehicle Care 10-63
4. Remove the valve stem cap 9. Press the on/off button (B) to reading. The compressor may
from the flat tire by turning it turn the tire sealant and be turned on/off until the
counterclockwise. compressor kit on. correct pressure is reached.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) The compressor will inject Notice: If the recommended
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it sealant and air into the tire. pressure cannot be reached after
clockwise until it is tight. The pressure gauge (C) will approximately 25 minutes, the
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the initially show a high pressure vehicle should not be driven
accessory power outlet in the while the compressor pushes the farther. The tire is too severely
vehicle. Unplug all items from sealant into the tire. Once the damaged and the tire sealant and
other accessory power outlets. sealant is completely dispersed compressor kit cannot inflate the
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. into the tire, the pressure will tire. Remove the power plug from
quickly drop and start to rise the accessory power outlet and
If the vehicle has an accessory unscrew the inflating hose from
power outlet, do not use the again as the tire inflates with
air only. the tire valve. See Roadside
cigarette lighter. Assistance Program on
If the vehicle only has a cigarette 10. Inflate the tire to the page 13‑6.
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure 11. Press the on/off button (B) to
Do not pinch the power plug gauge (C). The recommended turn the tire sealant and
cord in the door or window. inflation pressure can be found compressor kit off.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle on the Tire and Loading The tire is not sealed and will
must be running while using the Information label. See Tire continue to leak air until the
air compressor. Pressure on page 10‑46. vehicle is driven and the
The pressure gauge (C) may sealant is distributed in
8. Turn the selector switch (A) the tire; therefore, Steps 12
counterclockwise to the read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor through 18 must be done
Sealant + Air position. immediately after Step 11.
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
10-64 Vehicle Care
Be careful while handling the maximum speed label from the If the tire pressure has fallen
tire sealant and compressor sealant canister (E) and place more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
kit as it could be warm after it in a highly visible location. below the recommended
usage. The label is a reminder not to inflation pressure, stop driving
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from exceed 90 km/h (55 mph) until the vehicle. The tire is too
the accessory power outlet in the damaged tire is repaired or severely damaged and the tire
the vehicle. replaced. sealant cannot seal the tire.
17. Return the equipment to its See Roadside Assistance
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) Program on page 13‑6.
counterclockwise to remove it original storage location in the
from the tire valve stem. vehicle. If the tire pressure has not
18. Immediately drive the vehicle dropped more than 68 kPa
14. Replace the tire valve (10 psi) from the recommended
stem cap. 8 km (5 mi) to distribute the
sealant in the tire. inflation pressure, inflate the
15. Replace the sealant/air tire to the recommended
hose (F), and the power 19. Stop at a safe location and inflation pressure.
plug (H) back in their original check the tire pressure. Refer
to Steps 1 through 11 under 20. Wipe off any sealant from the
location. wheel, tire, and vehicle.
“Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without 21. Dispose of the used sealant
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not canister (E) and sealant/air
Punctured).” hose (F) assembly at a local
dealer or in accordance with
local state codes and practices.
22. Replace it with a new canister
16. If the flat tire was able to available from your dealer.
inflate to the recommended
inflation pressure, remove the
Vehicle Care 10-65
23. After temporarily sealing a tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
using the tire sealant and and wheel damage by driving slowly
compressor kit, take the to a level place. Turn on the hazard
vehicle to an authorized dealer warning flashers. See Hazard
within a 161 km (100 mi) of Warning Flashers on page 6‑3.
driving to have the tire repaired See If a Tire Goes Flat on
or replaced. page 10‑59 for other important
Using the Tire Sealant and safety warnings.
Compressor Kit without 1. Remove the tire sealant and
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not compressor kit from its storage
Punctured) location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
To use the air compressor to inflate
page 10‑67.
a tire with air only and not sealant:
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
10-66 Vehicle Care
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the 10. Inflate the tire to the 11. Press the on/off button (B) to
accessory power outlet in the recommended inflation turn the tire sealant and
vehicle. Unplug all items from pressure using the pressure compressor kit off.
other accessory power outlets. gauge (C). The recommended Be careful while handling the
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. inflation pressure can be found tire sealant and compressor kit
If the vehicle has an accessory on the Tire and Loading as it could be warm after
power outlet, do not use the Information label. See Tire usage.
cigarette lighter. Pressure on page 10‑46.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
If the vehicle only has a cigarette The pressure gauge (C) may the accessory power outlet in
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. read higher than the actual tire the vehicle.
pressure while the compressor
Do not pinch the power plug is on. Turn the compressor off 13. Disconnect the air only
cord in the door or window. to get an accurate reading. The hose (G) from the tire
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle compressor may be turned on/ valve stem by turning it
must be running while using the off until the correct pressure is counterclockwise, and replace
air compressor. reached. the tire valve stem cap.
8. Turn the selector switch (A) If you inflate the tire higher 14. Replace the air only hose (G)
clockwise to the Air Only than the recommended and the power plug (H) and
position. pressure you can adjust the cord back in their original
excess pressure by pressing locations.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to the pressure deflation
turn the compressor on. 15. Place the equipment in the
button (D), if equipped, until the original storage location in the
The compressor will inflate the proper pressure reading is vehicle.
tire with air only. reached. This option is only
functional when using the air
only hose (G).
Vehicle Care 10-67
Removal and Installation of the Storing the Tire Sealant

Sealant Canister and Compressor Kit
To remove the sealant canister: To access the tire sealant and
1. Unwrap the sealant hose. compressor kit:
2. Press the canister release 1. Open the hatch. See Hatch on
button. page 2‑13.
3. Pull up and remove the canister. 2. Lift the cover.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer.
The tire sealant and compressor kit 5. Push the new canister into
has an accessory adapter located in place.
a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc.
3. Remove the tire sealant and

compressor kit.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
10-68 Vehicle Care
Jump Starting { WARNING { WARNING

Jump starting is connecting jumper
cables between the two vehicles to Batteries are dangerous and can Electric fans can start up even
enable vehicle starting. If the Volt cause injury. Batteries contain when the engine is not running
or another vehicle has a run‐down acid and can explode or ignite. and can cause injury. Keep
12‐volt battery, it can be jump They contain electricity that can hands, clothing, and tools away
started using good condition burn. Follow the exact steps from any underhood electric fans.
jumper cables. There are different provided or injuries could occur.
procedures depending on if the Volt Using an open flame near a Notice: Ignoring these steps
has a run‐down battery or another battery can cause battery gas to could result in costly damage to
vehicle has a run‐down battery. the vehicle that would not be
explode; you or others could be
Read the appropriate procedures covered by the warranty.
hurt. Battery acid can cause
that follow.
blindness. Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
{ WARNING Be sure the battery in the other
vehicle has enough water. Add work, and it could damage the
The high voltage battery cannot water if the level is low. A low vehicle.
be jump started either with water level could cause explosive
another vehicle or battery gas to be present.
charger. Personal injury, death,
Battery fluid contains acid that
or damage to the vehicle could
can burn. If battery fluid gets in
result.
eyes or on skin; flush with water
and get medical help immediately.
Vehicle Care 10-69
Jump Starting the Volt Put both vehicles in P (Park) for

an automatic transmission or
If the Volt will not start, the 12‐volt
electric drive unit. For a manual
battery may be run down. To jump
transmission, place the vehicle
start the Volt use the underhood
in Neutral and set the parking
remote positive (+) and negative (−)
brake.
terminals.
Notice: If any accessories are left
1. The other vehicle used to jump
on or plugged in during the jump
start the Volt must have a 12‐volt
starting procedure, they could
battery with a negative ground
be damaged. The repairs would
system.
not be covered by the vehicle
Notice: Only use a vehicle that warranty. Whenever possible,
has a 12-volt system with a turn off or unplug all accessories 5. Open the hood to locate the
negative ground for jump on either vehicle when jump positive (+) and negative (−)
starting. If the other vehicle does starting the vehicle. terminals on your Volt. Open the
not have a 12-volt system with a access cover (A) for the remote
3. Turn off the ignition on the other
negative ground, both vehicles positive (+) terminal. The remote
vehicle. Turn off the radio, all
can be damaged. negative terminal (B) for the Volt
lamps, and accessories that are
2. Park both vehicles close enough not needed in both vehicles. is a stud marked GND (−) on the
so that the jumper cables can Unplug accessories from the driver side of the engine
reach both vehicles' positive (+) cigarette lighter or the accessory compartment.
and negative (−) terminals. The power outlets. This avoids 6. Check that the jumper cables
vehicles must not touch each sparks and helps save both do not have loose or missing
other. It could cause an batteries and accessories. insulation or a shock could result
unwanted ground connection and the vehicles could be
4. Locate the positive (+) and
that could damage both vehicles' damaged.
negative (−) terminals on the
electrical systems.
other vehicle.
10-70 Vehicle Care
Before connecting the jumper Connecting the Jumper Cables 12‐volt battery. The jumper
cables, here are some basic 1. Connect the red positive (+) cables can then be
things to know. Positive (+) jumper cable to the remote disconnected. If the Volt does
jumper cable goes to positive (+) positive (+) terminal (A) of your not start, call your dealer or
battery terminal or a remote Volt. Do not let the other end of Roadside Assistance. See
positive (+) terminal if available. the cable touch metal. Roadside Assistance Program
Negative (−) jumper cable goes on page 13‑6.
to negative (−) battery terminal 2. Connect the other end of the red
or a remote negative (−) terminal positive (+) jumper cable to the Disconnecting the Jumper Cables
if available. Do not connect positive (+) terminal of the other 1. Disconnect the black
positive (+) to negative (−) or vehicle. negative (−) jumper cable
there will be a short that may 3. Connect the black negative (−) from the Volt. Do not let the
damage the battery and other jumper cable to the negative (−) other end of the cable touch
parts of the vehicle. battery terminal of the other anything until after the next step.
Notice: If the jumper cables are vehicle battery. Do not let the 2. Disconnect the black
connected or removed in the other end touch anything until negative (−) jumper cable from
wrong order, electrical shorting the next step. the other vehicle with the good
may occur and damage the 4. Connect the other end of the battery.
vehicle. The repairs would not be black negative (−) jumper cable 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
covered by the vehicle warranty. to the remote negative (−) jumper cable from the other
Always connect and remove the terminal of your Volt. vehicle. Do not let the other end
jumper cables in the correct of the cable touch anything until
order, making sure that the 5. Push the POWER O button to
after the next step.
cables do not touch each other or start. This will wake up the
other metal. electronics on the Volt. After the 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
instrument cluster initializes, the jumper cable from the Volt.
Volt will use power from the high
voltage battery to charge the
Vehicle Care 10-71
5. Return the positive (+) and 2. Park both vehicles close enough 3. Turn off both vehicles. Turn
negative (−) terminal covers to so that the jumper cables can off the radio, all lamps, and
their original positions. reach both vehicles' positive (+) accessories that are not needed
and negative (−) terminals. in both vehicles. Unplug
Jump Starting Another Vehicle The vehicles must not touch accessories from the cigarette
When using the Volt to jump start each other. It could cause an lighter or the accessory power
another vehicle with a run‐down unwanted ground connection outlets. This avoids sparks and
battery, jumper cables are that could damage both vehicles' helps save both batteries and
connected directly to the positive (+) electrical systems. accessories.
and negative (−) terminals on the Put both vehicles in P (Park) for 4. Locate the positive (+) and
12‐volt battery in the rear cargo an automatic transmission or negative (−) terminals on the
area. Do not use the remote electric drive unit. For a manual vehicle with the run‐down
terminals under the hood. This transmission, place the vehicle battery.
could cause a fuse to overload in in Neutral and set the parking
the Volt. brake.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must Notice: If any accessories are left
have a 12‐volt battery with a on or plugged in during the jump
negative ground system. starting procedure, they could
Notice: Only use a vehicle that be damaged. The repairs would
has a 12-volt system with a not be covered by the vehicle
negative ground for jump warranty. Whenever possible,
starting. If the other vehicle does turn off or unplug all accessories
not have a 12-volt system with a on either vehicle when jump
negative ground, both vehicles starting the vehicle.
can be damaged.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Before connecting the jumper jumper cables in the correct

cables, here are some basic order, making sure that the
things to know. Positive (+) cables do not touch each other or
jumper cable goes to positive (+) other metal.
battery terminal or a remote
positive (+) terminal if available. Connecting the Jumper Cables
Negative (−) jumper cable goes 1. Connect the red positive (+)
to remote negative (−) terminal if jumper cable to the positive (+)
available, or a heavy, unpainted terminal of the other vehicle with
metal engine part or a solid the run‐down battery. Use a
engine ground on the vehicle remote positive (+) terminal if
with the run‐down battery. available. Do not let the other
Do not connect positive (+) to end touch metal.
5. Locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) battery terminals on negative (−) or there will be a 2. Connect the other end of the red
the Volt. The access cover is short that may damage the positive (+) jumper cable to the
under the load floor access battery or other parts of the positive (+) battery terminal of
cover in the rear cargo area. vehicle. Do not connect the the Volt.
Open the access cover for the negative (−) cable to the 3. Connect the black negative (−)
positive (+) terminal cover (A) negative (−) terminal on the jumper cable to the negative (−)
and the negative (−) terminal run‐down battery because this battery terminal of the Volt. Do
cover (B). can cause sparks. not let the other end touch
6. Check that the jumper cables do Notice: If the jumper cables are anything until the next step.
not have loose or missing connected or removed in the 4. Make the final connection to a
insulation or a shock could result wrong order, electrical shorting heavy, unpainted metal engine
and the vehicles could be may occur and damage the part or to the remote negative (−)
damaged. vehicle. The repairs would not be terminal on the other vehicle
covered by the vehicle warranty. with the run‐down battery.
Always connect and remove the
Vehicle Care 10-73
5. Press the POWER O button to 2. Disconnect the black Towing

start the Volt. This will wake up negative (−) jumper cable from
the electronics on the Volt. The the Volt.
Towing the Vehicle
engine will only start if it is 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
needed. jumper cable from the Volt. Do Notice: Incorrectly towing a
not let the other end of the cable disabled vehicle may cause
6. Try to start the other vehicle that damage to the vehicle. The
had the run‐down battery. If it touch anything until after the
next step. disabled vehicle should be towed
will not start after a few tries, it on a flatbed car carrier. Use
probably needs service. 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) care when there is low ground
Disconnecting the Jumper Cables jumper cable from the other clearance and/or special
vehicle. equipment.
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) jumper cable from 5. Return the positive (+) and Attempting to pull the vehicle
the other vehicle that had the negative (−) terminal covers to onto a flatbed without following
run‐down battery. Do not let the their original positions. the proper steps could damage
other end of the cable touch the vehicle.
anything until after the next step. Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13‑6.
10-74 Vehicle Care
To load a vehicle onto a flatbed

carrier:
1. The vehicle must be on a flat
surface.
2. The front tires must be properly
inflated. If necessary, move a
rear tire to the front to replace a
flat or damaged tire.
4. Place a 1.2 m (4 ft) X 102 mm 5. Ramps (B) are required for the
(4 in) X 102 mm (4 in) wood front fascia (C) to clear the
beam (D) under the front cradle flatbed (A). The ramp height
crossmember (C), and on top of should be approximately 102 mm
both tow chains (E) to ensure (4 in). Lower the flatbed onto the
the tow chains do not come into set of ramps.
contact with the front fascia (A). Notice: If ramps are not used, the
Try to minimize the contact of front fascia will come into contact
the chains with the flexible with the flatbed and may cause
air dam (B). damage. Always use ramps.
3. Place the tow chain hooks (B)
into one of the torque box 6. After the front tires are on the
openings (A) behind the front flatbed adjust the flatbed upward
wheels. to provide additional clearance
between the air dam, fascia, and
flatbed.
Vehicle Care 10-75
7. When the fascia has enough

clearance to clear the flatbed,
lower the flatbed, and finish
pulling the vehicle onto the
flatbed.
If the vehicle is parked off the Notice: When using tow straps to
shoulder of the road, at an angle move the vehicle, damage may
that it cannot be pulled onto a occur if the tow straps contact
flatbed, a hook/chain can be placed the rear fascia. Do not let the tow
into either of the front torque box straps contact the rear fascia.
openings to pull the vehicle onto a If you cannot access the front
8. Secure the vehicle to the flat surface. Make sure that the torque box openings, wrap a tow
flatbed (B) using nonabrasive chains do not come in contact with strap through one, or both of the
straps (A) through all four wheel the rocker panel (A) or the front rear trailing arms (A) between the
openings and secure the straps fascia (B). bushing and torque tube, and pull
to the flatbed (B). the vehicle onto a flat surface. Do
not wrap the tow strap around the
rear torque tube (B).
10-76 Vehicle Care
Recreational Vehicle Here are some important things to Dinghy Towing

consider before recreational vehicle
Towing towing:
Recreational vehicle towing refers to . The towing capacity of the
towing the vehicle behind another towing vehicle. Read the tow
vehicle such as a motor home. vehicle manufacturer's
The two most common types of recommendations.
recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly . How far the vehicle can be
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the towed. Some vehicles have
vehicle with all four wheels on the restrictions on how far and how
ground. Dolly towing is towing the long they can tow.
vehicle with two wheels on the . Whether the vehicle has the
ground and two wheels up on a proper towing equipment.
device known as a dolly. See your dealer or trailering Notice: If the vehicle is towed
professional for additional advice with all four wheels on the
and equipment ground, the drive unit could be
recommendations. damaged. Repairs would not be
. Is the vehicle ready to be towed. covered by the vehicle warranty.
Just as preparing the vehicle for Do not tow the vehicle with all
a long trip, make sure the four wheels on the ground.
vehicle is prepared to be towed. The vehicle was not designed to be
towed with all four wheels on the
ground. If the vehicle must be
towed, a dolly should be used. See
“Dolly Towing” that follows for more
information.
Vehicle Care 10-77
Dolly Towing from the Front 2. Drive the front wheels onto the Dolly Towing from the Rear
dolly.
3. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
4. Set the parking brake and
remove the key.
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
8. Check for adequate rear fascia
The vehicle can be towed from the to ground clearance. Notice: Towing the vehicle from
front using a dolly. To tow the the rear, with the front wheels on
vehicle using a dolly, follow these the ground, could damage the
steps: drive unit, and front fascia. Do
not tow the vehicle from the rear
1. Attach the dolly to the tow with the front wheels on the
vehicle following the dolly ground.
manufacturer's instructions.
10-78 Vehicle Care
Appearance Care Notice: Avoid using high tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals
pressure washes closer than from industrial chimneys, etc., can
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the damage the vehicle's finish if they
Exterior Care vehicle. Use of power washers remain on painted surfaces. Wash
Washing the Vehicle exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) the vehicle as soon as possible.
can result in damage or removal If necessary, use non-abrasive
To preserve the vehicle's finish, of paint and decals. cleaners that are marked safe for
wash it often and out of direct painted surfaces to remove foreign
sunlight. Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all matter.
Notice: Do not use petroleum cleaning agents completely. If they Occasional hand waxing or mild
based, acidic, or abrasive are allowed to dry on the surface, polishing should be done to remove
cleaning agents as they can they could stain. residue from the paint finish. See
damage the vehicle's paint, your dealer for approved cleaning
metal, or plastic parts. If damage Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to products.
occurs, it would not be covered
by the vehicle's warranty. avoid surface scratches and water Notice: Machine compounding
Approved cleaning products spotting. or aggressive polishing on a
can be obtained from your basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
Finish Care may damage it. Use only
dealer. Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct Application of aftermarket clearcoat non-abrasive waxes and polishes
product usage, necessary safety sealant/wax materials is not that are made for a basecoat/
precautions, and appropriate recommended. If painted surfaces clearcoat paint finish on the
disposal of any vehicle care are damaged, see your dealer to vehicle.
product. have the damage assessed and To keep the paint finish looking new,
repaired. Foreign materials such keep the vehicle garaged or
as calcium chloride and other salts, covered whenever possible.
ice melting agents, road oil and tar,
Vehicle Care 10-79
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Front Air Deflector Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Parts Lenses and Emblems
Regularly clean bright metal parts Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
with water or chrome polish on soft cloth, and a car washing soap
chrome or stainless steel trim, to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
if necessary. Follow instructions under "Washing
For aluminum, never use auto the Vehicle" later in this section.
or chrome polish, steam, or Windshield and Wiper Blades
caustic soap to clean. A coating
of wax, rubbed to high polish, is Clean the outside of the windshield
recommended for all bright metal with glass cleaner.
parts. Clean rubber blades using lint-free
cloth or paper towel soaked with
A. Outer Air Deflector windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield
B. Inner Air Deflector thoroughly when cleaning the
C. Tab blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
D. Slot treatments may cause wiper
The front air deflector allows air to streaking.
flow cleaner under the vehicle. Replace the wiper blades if they
Should the front air deflector are worn or damaged. Damage
become detached, insert Tab C into can be caused by extreme dusty
Slot D. Repeat for the other side. conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
snow and ice.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Weatherstrips Keep the wheels clean using a soft, automatic car wash that uses
clean cloth with mild soap and silicone carbide tire cleaning
Apply silicone grease on
water. Rinse with clean water. After brushes. Damage could occur
weatherstrips to make them last
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft, and the repairs would not be
longer, seal better, and not stick or
clean towel. A wax may then be covered by the vehicle warranty.
squeak. See Recommended Fluids
applied.
and Lubricants on page 11‑12 Steering, Suspension, and
Notice: Chrome wheels and other Chassis Components
Tires chrome trim may be damaged if
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to the vehicle is not washed after Visually inspect front and rear
clean the tires. driving on roads that have been suspension and steering system for
sprayed with magnesium, damaged, loose, or missing parts
Notice: Using petroleum-based calcium, or sodium chloride. or signs of wear. Inspect power
tire dressing products on the These chlorides are used on steering lines and hoses for proper
vehicle may damage the paint roads for conditions such as ice hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
finish and/or tires. When applying and dust. Always wash the chafing, etc. Visually check constant
a tire dressing, always wipe off chrome with soap and water after velocity joints, rubber boots, and
any overspray from all painted exposure. axle seals for leaks.
surfaces on the vehicle.
Notice: To avoid surface damage, Body Component Lubrication
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum do not use strong soaps, Lubricate all key lock cylinders,
or Chrome chemicals, abrasive polishes, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild cleaners, brushes, or cleaners steel fuel door hinge unless the
soap and water to clean the wheels. that contain acid on aluminum or components are plastic. Applying
After rinsing thoroughly with clean chrome-plated wheels. Use only silicone grease on weatherstrips
water, dry with a soft, clean towel. approved cleaners. Also, never with a clean cloth will make them
A wax may then be applied. drive a vehicle with aluminum or last longer, seal better, and not stick
chrome-plated wheels through an or squeak.
Vehicle Care 10-81
Underbody Maintenance corrosion. Larger areas of finish hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
damage can be corrected in your repellant from all interior surfaces or
Use plain water to flush dirt and
dealer's body and paint shop. permanent damage may result.
debris from the vehicle's underbody.
Your dealer or an underbody car Chemical Paint Spotting Your dealer may have products for
washing system can do this. If not cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
removed, rust and corrosion can Airborne pollutants can fall upon specifically designed for the
develop. and attack painted vehicle surfaces surfaces being cleaned to prevent
causing blotchy, ring-shaped permanent damage. To prevent
Sheet Metal Damage discolorations, and small, irregular overspray, apply all cleaners directly
dark spots etched into the paint to the cleaning cloth. Cleaners
If the vehicle is damaged and
surface. should be removed quickly. Never
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body allow cleaners to remain on the
repair shop applies anti-corrosion Interior Care surface being cleaned for extended
material to parts repaired or To prevent dirt particle abrasions, periods of time.
replaced to restore corrosion regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Cleaners may contain solvents that
protection. Immediately remove any soils. Note can become concentrated in the
Original manufacturer replacement that newspapers or dark garments interior. Before using cleaners, read
parts will provide the corrosion that can transfer color to home and adhere to all safety instructions
protection while maintaining the furnishings can also permanently on the label. While cleaning the
vehicle warranty. transfer color to the vehicle's interior, maintain adequate
interior. ventilation by opening the doors and
Finish Damage Use a soft bristle brush to remove windows.
Quickly repair minor chips and dust from knobs and crevices on the
scratches with touch-up materials instrument cluster. Using a mild
available from your dealer to avoid soap solution, immediately remove
10-82 Vehicle Care
To prevent damage, do not clean

. Do not heavily saturate the gently remove as much of the
the interior using the following upholstery when cleaning. soil as possible using one of the
cleaners or techniques: . Do not use solvents or cleaners following techniques:
. Never use a razor or any other containing solvents. . Gently blot liquids with a paper
sharp object to remove a soil Interior Glass towel. Continue blotting until no
from any interior surface. more soil can be removed.
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
. Never use a brush with stiff dampened with water. Wipe droplets
. For solid soils, remove as much
bristles. left behind with a clean dry cloth. as possible prior to vacuuming.
. Never rub any surface Commercial glass cleaners may be To clean:
aggressively or with excessive used, if necessary, after cleaning 1. Saturate a clean lint-free
pressure. the interior glass with plain water. colorfast cloth with water or
. Do not use laundry detergents Notice: To prevent scratching, club soda. Microfiber cloth is
or dishwashing soaps with never use abrasive cleaners on recommended to prevent lint
degreasers. For liquid cleaners, automotive glass. Abrasive transfer to the fabric or carpet.
use approximately 20 drops cleaners or aggressive cleaning 2. Remove excess moisture by
per 3.78L (1 gal) of water. may damage the rear window gently wringing until water does
A concentrated soap solution defogger. not drip from the cleaning cloth.
will leave a residue that creates
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the
use solutions that contain strong Start by vacuuming the surface soil and gently rub toward the
or caustic soap. using a soft brush attachment. If a center. Rotate the cleaning cloth
rotating brush attachment is being to a clean area frequently to
used during vacuuming, only use it prevent forcing the soil in to the
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, fabric.
Vehicle Care 10-83
4. Continue gently rubbing the thorough cleaning, use a soft Notice: Use of air fresheners may
soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth dampened with a cause permanent damage to
longer any color transfer from mild soap solution. plastics and painted surfaces.
the soil to the cleaning cloth. Notice: Soaking or saturating If an air freshener comes in
5. If the soil is not completely leather, especially perforated contact with any plastic or
removed, use a mild soap leather, as well as other interior painted surface in the vehicle,
solution followed only by club surfaces, may cause permanent blot immediately and clean with a
soda or plain water. damage. Wipe excess moisture soft cloth dampened with a mild
from these surfaces after soap solution. Damage caused by
If the soil is not completely air fresheners would not be
removed, it may be necessary cleaning and allow them to dry
naturally. Never use heat, steam, covered by the vehicle warranty.
to use a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small spot lifters or spot removers. Do
not use cleaners that contain Cleaning the Center
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery silicone or wax-based products. Stack
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring Cleaners containing these
solvents can permanently change Cleaning the Display
formation occurs, clean the entire
fabric or carpet. the appearance and feel of leather Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
or soft trim and are not when cleaning glass surfaces
Following the cleaning process, a recommended. could scratch the glass. Use only
paper towel can be used to blot a soft cloth and do not spray
excess moisture. Do not use cleaners that increase
gloss, especially on the instrument cleaner directly on the system as
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and panel. Reflected glare can decrease it could affect the mechanical
Other Plastic Surfaces visibility through the windshield parts.
under certain conditions. Do not apply spray cleaner directly
Use a soft microfiber cloth
dampened with water to remove to the system, the cleaner could
dust and loose dirt. For a more affect the mechanical parts.
10-84 Vehicle Care
Do not wipe the panel with a hard Use the following guidelines for Removing and Replacing the
cloth or use a volatile liquid such as proper floor mat usage: Floor Mats
paint thinner, it could scratch the . The original equipment floor
surface or erase the characters on Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
mats were designed for your to unlock each retainer and remove.
the buttons. vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
Floor Mats that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
{ WARNING may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator or
If a floor mat is the wrong size brake pedal. Always check that
or is not properly installed, it the floor mats do not interfere
can interfere with the pedals. with the pedals.
Interference with the pedals can . Use the floor mat with the
cause unintended acceleration correct side up. Do not turn
and/or increased stopping it over.
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat. Reinstall by lining up the floor mat
mat does not interfere with the
retainer openings over the carpet
pedals. . Use only a single floor mat on
retainers and snap into position.
the driver side.
Make sure the floor mat is properly
. Do not place one floor mat on
secured in place.
top of another.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the pedals.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Your dealer recognizes the

importance of providing
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
the required maintenance for the technicians, the dealer is the place
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to for routine maintenance such as oil
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 help protect against major repair changes and tire rotations and
expenses resulting from neglect or additional maintenance items like
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of blades.
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services Notice: Damage caused by
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application improper maintenance can lead
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 to costly repairs and may not be
Your dealer has trained technicians covered by the vehicle warranty.
Additional Maintenance who can perform required Maintenance intervals, checks,
and Care maintenance using genuine inspections, recommended fluids,
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have and lubricants are important to
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 up‐to‐date tools and equipment keep the vehicle in good working
for fast and accurate diagnostics. condition.
Recommended Fluids, Many dealers have extended
Lubricants, and Parts The Tire Rotation and Required
evening and Saturday hours,
Recommended Fluids and Services are the responsibility of the
courtesy transportation, and online
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 vehicle owner. It is recommended
scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance Replacement to have your dealer perform these
needs.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records keep the vehicle in good working
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14 condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use The Additional Required

vehicles, maintenance needs Services ‐ Severe are for { WARNING
vary. There may need to be vehicles that are:
more frequent checks and Performing maintenance work
. Mainly driven in hilly or can be dangerous and can
services. The Additional Required mountainous terrain.
Services ‐ Normal are for cause serious injury. Perform
vehicles that: . Frequently towing a trailer. maintenance work only if the
required information, proper tools,
. Carry passengers and cargo . Used for high speed or
competitive driving. and equipment are available.
within recommended limits on
If they are not, see your dealer to
the Tire and Loading Information . Used for taxi, police, or delivery have a trained technician do the
label. See Vehicle Load Limits service.
on page 9‑11. work. See Doing Your Own
Refer to the information in the Service Work on page 10‑6.
. Are driven on reasonable road Maintenance Schedule Additional
surfaces within legal driving Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
limits.
. Use the recommended fuel. See
Fuel on page 9‑53.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Normal chart.
Maintenance (Power Electronics and Charger

Modules) on page 10‑16 for
Your trained dealer technician can
perform this work. If the engine oil
Schedule more information. life system is reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 5 000 km/
Owner Checks and Services Engine Oil Change 3,000 mi since the last service.
At Each Fuel Stop Every 24 months or when the Reset the oil life system when the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON oil is changed.
. Check the engine oil level. See message displays, change the
Engine Oil on page 10‑9. engine oil and filter as soon as Tire Rotation and Required
possible, within the next 1 000 km/ Services Every 12 000 km/
Once a Month
600 mi. The engine oil and filter 7,500 mi
. Check the tire inflation must be changed at least once
pressures. See Tire Pressure on Rotate the tires, if recommended
every 24 months. After each oil for the vehicle, and perform the
page 10‑46. and filter change, the oil life system following services. See Tire
. Inspect the tires for wear. See must be reset. See Engine Oil Life Rotation on page 10‑52.
Tire Inspection on page 10‑51. System on page 10‑12. More .
frequent changes may be required Check engine oil level and oil
. Check the windshield washer life percentage. If needed,
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on when the vehicle is exposed to a
corrosive environment, such as change engine oil and filter, and
page 10‑19. reset oil life system. See Engine
areas of high humidity, along an
. Engine, power electronics, ocean coast, and/or areas that Oil on page 10‑9 and Engine Oil
and high voltage battery pack apply road salt during winter. Life System on page 10‑12.
coolant level checks. See . Check engine coolant level. See
Cooling System (Engine) on Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
page 10‑14 or Cooling System
(High Voltage Battery) on
page 10‑15 or Cooling System

. Check windshield washer fluid . Visually inspect steering, . Check parking brake and
level. See Washer Fluid on suspension, and chassis automatic transmission park
page 10‑19. components for damaged, loose, mechanism. See Park Brake and
. Visually inspect windshield or missing parts or signs of P (Park) Mechanism Check on
wiper blades for wear, cracking, wear. See Exterior Care on page 10‑25.
or contamination. See Exterior page 10‑78. . Check accelerator pedal for
Care on page 10‑78. Replace . Check restraint system damage, high effort, or binding.
worn or damaged wiper blades. components. See Safety System Replace if needed.
See Wiper Blade Replacement Check on page 3‑17. . Visually inspect gas strut for
on page 10‑25. . Visually inspect fuel system for signs of wear, cracks, or other
. Check tire inflation pressures. damage or leaks. damage. Check the hold open
See Tire Pressure on . Visually inspect exhaust system ability of the strut. See your
page 10‑46. and nearby heat shields for dealer if service is required.
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire loose or damaged parts. . Check tire sealant expiration
Inspection on page 10‑51. . Lubricate body components. See date, if equipped. See Tire
. Visually check for fluid leaks. Exterior Care on page 10‑78. Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑60.
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. . Check electrical drive unit shift
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on lock control function. See
page 10‑12. Electric Drive Unit Shift Lock
. Inspect brake system. Control Function Check on
page 10‑24.

Footnotes — Maintenance c) Or every five years, whichever d) Or every 10 years, whichever

Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System comes first. Inspect for fraying,
Services — Normal (Engine) on page 10‑14 or Cooling excessive cracking, or damage;
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines System (High Voltage Battery) on replace, if needed.
and hoses for proper hook‐up, page 10‑15 or Cooling System
routing, and condition. Check that (Power Electronics and Charger
the purge valve, if the vehicle has Modules) on page 10‑16.
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.
b) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.

Footnotes — Maintenance Special Application Additional

Schedule Additional Required
Services — Severe Services Maintenance and Care
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines . Severe Commercial Use Your vehicle is an important
and hoses for proper hook‐up, Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis investment and caring for it
routing, and condition. Check that components every 5 000 km/ properly may help to avoid
the purge valve, if the vehicle has 3,000 mi. future costly repairs. To maintain
one, works properly. Replace as . vehicle performance, additional
Have underbody flushing service
needed. maintenance services may be
performed once a year.
b) Or every four years, whichever required. It is recommended
. Have air conditioning system that your dealer perform these
comes first.
flushed and refilled and services — their trained dealer
c) Or every five years, whichever desiccant replaced every technicians know your vehicle
comes first. See Cooling System ten years. best. Your dealer can also
(Engine) on page 10‑14 or Cooling perform a thorough assessment
System (High Voltage Battery) on with a multi‐point inspection to
page 10‑15 or Cooling System recommend when your vehicle may
(Power Electronics and Charger need attention. The following list is
Modules) on page 10‑16. intended to explain the services and
d) Or every 10 years, whichever conditions to look for that may
comes first. Inspect for fraying, indicate services are required.
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.
Battery Brakes Hoses

The battery supplies power to Brakes stop the vehicle and are Hoses transport fluids and should
start the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving. be regularly inspected to ensure
additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include that there are no cracks or leaks.
. To avoid break‐down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing With a multi‐point inspection, your
start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping. dealer can inspect the hoses and
battery with full cranking power. advise if replacement is needed.
. Trained dealer technicians have
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment Lamps
the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and Properly working headlamps,
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts taillamps, and brake lamps are
connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle. important to see and be seen on
corrosion‐free. the road.
Fluids
Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
. Signs that the headlamps need
. Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s attention include dimming, failure
squeak or show signs of systems and components. See to light, cracking, or damage.
cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and The brake lamps need to be
Lubricants on page 11‑12 for GM checked periodically to ensure
. Trained dealer technicians that they light when braking.
can inspect the belts and approved fluids.
. With a multi‐point inspection,
recommend replacement when . Engine oil and windshield
necessary. washer fluid levels should be your dealer can check the lamps
checked at every fuel fill. and note any concerns.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
Shocks and Struts Tires Vehicle Care

Shocks and struts help aid in control Tires need to be properly inflated, To help keep the vehicle looking
for a smoother ride. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining like new, vehicle care products are
. Signs of wear may include the tires can save money, fuel, and available from your dealer. For
steering wheel vibration, bounce/ can reduce the risk of tire failure. information on how to clean and
sway while braking, longer . Signs that the tires need to be protect the vehicle’s interior and
stopping distance, or uneven replaced include three or more exterior, see Interior Care on
tire wear. visible treadwear indicators; cord page 10‑81 and Exterior Care on
or fabric showing through the page 10‑78.
. As part of the multi‐point
inspection, trained dealer rubber; cracks or cuts in the
technicians can visually inspect tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
the shocks and struts for signs split in the tire.
of leaking, blown seals, . Trained dealer technicians can
or damage, and can advise inspect and recommend the
when service is needed. right tires. Your dealer can also
provide tire/wheel balancing
services to ensure smooth
vehicle operation at all speeds.
Your dealer sells and services
name brand tires.
Wheel Alignment Windshield Wiper Blades

Wheel alignment is critical for For safety, appearance, and the Wiper blades need to be cleaned
ensuring that the tires deliver best viewing, keep the windshield and kept in good condition to
optimal wear and performance. clean and clear. provide a clear view.
. Signs that the alignment may . Signs of damage include . Signs of wear include streaking,
need to be adjusted include scratches, cracks, and chips. skipping across the windshield,
pulling, improper vehicle . Trained dealer technicians can and worn or split rubber.
handling, or unusual tire wear. inspect the windshield and . Trained dealer technicians can
. Your dealer has the required recommend proper replacement check the wiper blades and
equipment to ensure proper if needed. replace them when needed.
wheel alignment.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
Engine Oil the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑9.
Premix DEX-COOL (GM Part No. 12378390, in Canada 10953456).
Engine Cooling System
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.
High Voltage Battery Cooling System Premix DEX-COOL (GM Part No. 12378390, in Canada 10953456).
Power Electronics Cooling System Premix DEX-COOL (GM Part No. 12378390, in Canada 10953456).
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88863461, in
Hydraulic Brake System
Canada 88863462).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Parking Brake Cable Guides
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC‐LB.
Electric Drive Unit DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hood and Hatch Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 20871244 A3148C
Engine Oil Filter 55352643 —
Spark Plugs 55564962 —
Wiper Blades
Driver – 65 cm (25.6 in) 22742323 —
Passenger – 65 cm (25.6 in) 22742324 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN
Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3 Identification Label
The label is inside the right rear
cargo storage door and has the
following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
This legal identifier is in the front
. Model designation.
corner of the instrument panel, on . Paint information.
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
. Production options and special
outside. The VIN also appears on equipment.
the Vehicle Certification and Service Do not remove this label from the
Parts labels and certificates of title vehicle.
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. Refer to Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label under the hood.
See your dealer for more information.
Cooling Systems
Engine 7.3 L 7.7 qt
High Voltage Battery 6.2 L 6.6 qt
Power Electronics 2.8 L 3.0 qt
Engine Oil with Filter 3.5 L 3.7 qt
Fuel Tank 35.2 L 9.3 gal
Electric Drive Unit 8.45 L 8.93 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Electric Drive Unit Spark Plug Gap
1.4L L4 4 Automatic 0.7 mm (0.027 in)
Engine Drive Belt Routing

12-4 Technical Data
2 NOTES
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-16 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Radio Frequency with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12 reviewed with the sales, service,
Open Source Information . . . 13-13 or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto
Center at 1-877‐486‐5846 Both General Motors and your Line Program using the toll-free
(1‐877‐4‐Volt Info). In Canada, dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
call General Motors of Canada sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
Customer Care Centre at with the new vehicle. However,
1-800-263-3777 (English), BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
We encourage you to call the outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
toll-free number in order to give the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
inquiry prompt attention. Have the Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
following information available to to enforce your rights.
give the Customer Assistance Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
representative: out-of-court program administered
. Vehicle Identification Number by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
(VIN). This is available from the Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
vehicle registration or title, or disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the plate at the top left of the the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
instrument panel and visible Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
through the windshield. be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
dispute resolution program prior limitations and/or discontinue its
. Dealership name and location. participation in this program.
to filing a court action, use of the
. Vehicle delivery date and program is free of charge and your
present mileage. case will generally be heard within
STEP THREE — Canadian impartial program offers advantages Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do over courts in most jurisdictions
not feel your concerns have been because it is informal, quick, and
Offices
addressed after following the free of charge. Chevrolet encourages customers
procedure outlined in Steps One For further information concerning to call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada eligibility in the Canadian Motor assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
of its participation in a no-charge call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. the General Motors Customer Care
General Motors of Canada Limited United States
Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
has committed to binding arbitration 1-800-263-7854 (French), Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving or write to: Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service Center
claims. The program provides for The Mediation/Arbitration Program P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by c/o Customer Care Centre Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and General Motors of Canada Limited www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing Mail Code: CA1-163-005
before the arbiter. The program is 1908 Colonel Sam Drive 1-877-486-5846 (1-877-4-Volt Info)
designed so that the entire dispute Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Telephone Devices (TTYs))
The inquiry should be accompanied Roadside Assistance:
you file your complaint to the final by the Vehicle Identification
decision, should be completed in 1-888-811-1926
Number (VIN).
about 70 days. We believe our From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada Mexico, Central America, and Online Owner Center

General Motors of Canada Limited Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
CA1-163-005 Virgin Islands) www.chevyownercenter.com
1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors de Mexico, S. de Information and services
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 R.L. de C.V. customized for your specific
www.gm.ca Customer Assistance Center vehicle — all in one convenient
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 place.
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Granada . Digital owner manual, warranty
1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F. information, and more.
Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-466-0800 . Storage for online service and
Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800 maintenance records.
1-800-268-6800
. Chevrolet dealer locator for
Overseas Customer Assistance for service nationwide.
Please contact the local General Text Telephone (TTY) . Exclusive privileges and offers.
Motors Business Unit. Users . Recall notices for your specific
To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle.
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired . OnStar and GM Cardmember
and who use Text Telephones
Services Earnings summaries.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user
in the U.S. can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Other Helpful Links Here are a few of the valuable GM Mobility

tools and services you will have
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
access to:
Reimbursement Program
Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
. My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ current offers in your area.
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do . My Dealers: Save details such
. FAQ as address and phone number
. Contact Us for each of your preferred GM
dealers. This program is available to
My GM Canada www.gm.ca qualified applicants for cost
. My Driveway: Access quick
My GM Canada is a links to parts and service reimbursement of eligible
password-protected section of estimates, check trade-in aftermarket adaptive equipment
www.gm.ca where you can save values, or schedule a service required for the vehicle, such as
information on GM vehicles, get appointment by adding the hand controls or a wheelchair/
personalized offers, and use handy vehicles you own to your scooter lift for the vehicle.
tools and forms with greater ease. driveway profile. For more information on the limited
. My Preferences: Manage your offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
profile and use tools and forms call the GM Mobility Assistance
with greater ease. Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca Telephone (TTY) users, call
section within www.gm.ca. 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also

. Location of the vehicle. Chevrolet and General Motors of
has a Mobility Program. Call . Model, year, color, and license Canada Limited reserve the right
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) plate number of the vehicle. to limit services or payment to an
for details. TTY users call owner or driver if they decide the
1-800-263-3830.
. Odometer reading, Vehicle claims are made too often, or the
Identification Number (VIN), and same type of claim is made many
delivery date of the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance times.
Program
. Description of the problem.
Services Provided
From the U.S., call 1‐888‐811‐1926; Coverage . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
(Text Telephone (TTY): Services are provided up to 5 years/ Delivery of enough fuel for the
1‐888‐889‐2438). 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever vehicle to get to the nearest
From Canada, call 1-800-268-6800. comes first. service station.
Service is available 24 hours a day, In the U.S., anyone driving the . Lock‐Out Service: Service to
365 days a year. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a unlock the vehicle if you are
person driving the vehicle without locked out. A remote unlock may
Calling for Assistance permission from the owner is not be available if you have OnStar.
When calling Roadside Assistance, covered. For security reasons, the driver
have the following information must present identification
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
ready: before this service is given.
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
. Your name, home address, and Chevrolet and General Motors of
home telephone number. Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
. Telephone number of your the Roadside Assistance program at
location. any time without notification.

. Emergency Tow from a Public Services Not Included in
. Trip Routing Service: Detailed
Road or Highway: Tow to the Roadside Assistance maps of North America are
nearest Chevrolet dealer for provided when requested either
warranty service, or if the vehicle . Impound towing caused by with the most direct route or the
was in a crash and cannot be violation of any laws. most scenic route. There is a
driven. Assistance is also given . Legal fines. limit of six requests per year.
when the vehicle is stuck in the Additional travel information is
sand, mud, or snow.
. Mounting, dismounting, also available. Allow three
or changing of snow tires, weeks for delivery.
. Flat Tire Change: Service to chains, or other traction devices.
change a flat tire with the tire . Trip Interruption Benefits and
. Towing or services for vehicles
sealant and compressor kit. Assistance: Must be over
If the tire has been separated driven on a non-public road or 250 km (150 mi) from where
from the wheel, has damaged highway. the trip was started to
sidewalls, or has a large Services Specific to Canadian qualify. General Motors of
puncture, the tire is too severely Canada Limited requires
Vehicles
damaged for the tire sealant and pre-authorization, original
compressor kit to be effective. . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement detailed receipts, and a copy
It is the owner's responsibility for is approximately $5 Canadian. of the repair orders. Once
the repair or replacement of the Diesel fuel delivery may be authorization has been received,
tire if it is not covered by the restricted. Propane and other the Roadside Assistance advisor
warranty. fuels are not provided through will help to make arrangements
this service. and explain how to receive
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery. . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle payment.
registration is required.

. Alternative Service: If If the vehicle cannot be scheduled Several Courtesy Transportation
assistance cannot be provided into the service department options are available to assist in
right away, the Roadside immediately, keep driving it until it reducing inconvenience when
Assistance advisor may give can be scheduled for service, warranty repairs are required.
permission to get local unless, of course, the problem is
emergency road service. Courtesy Transportation is not a
safety related. If it is, please call part of the New Vehicle Limited
You will receive payment, your dealership, let them know this,
up to $100, after sending the Warranty. A separate booklet
and ask for instructions. entitled “Warranty and Owner
original receipt to Roadside
Assistance. Mechanical failures If your dealer requests you to bring Assistance Information” furnished
may be covered, however any the vehicle for service, you are with each new vehicle provides
cost for parts and labor for urged to do so as early in the work detailed warranty coverage
repairs not covered by the day as possible to allow for information.
warranty are the owner's same-day repair.
Transportation Options
responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation Warranty service can generally be
Scheduling Service Program completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
Appointments To enhance your ownership to minimize inconvenience by
When the vehicle requires warranty experience, we and our participating providing several transportation
service, contact your dealer and dealers are proud to offer Courtesy options. Depending on the
request an appointment. By Transportation, a customer support circumstances, your dealer can
scheduling a service appointment program for vehicles with the offer one of the following:
and advising the service consultant Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and Shuttle Service
of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your extended powertrain warranties in Shuttle service is the preferred
inconvenience. both the U.S. and Canada. means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program

of your daily schedule. This includes Your dealer may arrange to provide Information
one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
within reasonable time and distance All program options, such as shuttle
reimburse you for a rental vehicle service, may not be available at
parameters of your dealer's area. that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact your
Public Transportation or Fuel for an overnight warranty repair. dealer for specific information
Reimbursement Rental reimbursement will be limited about availability. All Courtesy
and must be supported by original Transportation arrangements will be
If the vehicle requires overnight receipts. This requires that you sign
warranty repairs, and public administered by appropriate dealer
and complete a rental agreement personnel.
transportation is used instead of and meet state/provincial, local, and
your dealer's shuttle service, the rental vehicle provider requirements. General Motors reserves the
expense must be supported by Requirements vary and may include right to unilaterally modify,
original receipts and can only be up minimum age requirements, change, or discontinue Courtesy
to the maximum amount allowed by insurance coverage, credit card, Transportation at any time and to
GM for shuttle service. In addition, etc. You are responsible for fuel resolve all questions of claim
for U.S. customers, should you usage charges and may also be eligibility pursuant to the terms and
arrange transportation through responsible for taxes, levies, usage conditions described herein at its
a friend or relative, limited fees, excessive mileage, or rental sole discretion.
reimbursement for reasonable fuel usage beyond the completion of the
expenses may be available. Claim repair.
amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original It may not be possible to provide a
receipts. See your dealer for like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel
or other transportation costs.
Collision Damage Repair vehicles that were total losses in Repair Facility
prior crashes. In most cases, the
If the vehicle is involved in a GM also recommends that you
parts being recycled are from
collision and it is damaged, have choose a collision repair facility that
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
the damage repaired by a qualified meets your needs before you ever
A recycled original equipment GM
technician using the proper need collision repairs. Your dealer
part may be an acceptable choice
equipment and quality replacement may have a collision repair center
to maintain the vehicle's originally
parts. Poorly performed collision with GM-trained technicians and
designed appearance and safety
repairs diminish the vehicle resale state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
performance; however, the history of
value, and safety performance can able to recommend a collision repair
these parts is not known. Such parts
be compromised in subsequent center that has GM-trained
are not covered by the GM New
collisions. technicians and comparable
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
equipment.
Collision Parts related failures are not covered by
that warranty. Insuring the Vehicle
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials Aftermarket collision parts are also Protect your investment in the GM
and construction methods as the available. These are made by vehicle with comprehensive and
parts with which the vehicle was companies other than GM and may collision insurance coverage. There
originally built. Genuine GM not have been tested for the vehicle. are significant differences in the
Collision parts are the best choice to As a result, these parts may fit quality of coverage afforded by
ensure that the vehicle's designed poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms.
appearance, durability, and safety corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide
are preserved. The use of Genuine perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM
GM parts can help maintain the GM collisions. Aftermarket parts are not vehicle by limiting compensation
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. covered by the GM New Vehicle for damage repairs by using
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some
Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not
may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts are typically removed from When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you ensure that the Give only the necessary information Choose a reputable repair facility
vehicle will be repaired with GM to police and other parties involved that uses quality replacement parts.
original equipment collision parts. in the crash. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
If such insurance coverage is For emergency towing see section.
not available from your current Roadside Assistance Program on In a crash, the sensing system may
insurance carrier, consider switching page 13‑6. shut down the high voltage system.
to another insurance carrier. See Battery on page 10‑23 for
Gather the following information:
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing important safety information. If an
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and airbag has inflated, see What Will
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number. You See after an Airbag Inflates? on
Genuine GM Original Equipment . Driver license number. page 3‑24.
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
. Owner name, address, and Managing the Vehicle Damage
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number. Repair Process
you may be charged at the end of . Vehicle license plate number. In the event that the vehicle requires
the lease for poor quality repairs. damage repairs, GM recommends
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year. that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined
. Vehicle Identification
If there has been an injury, call repair facility of choice, take the
emergency services for help. Do not Number (VIN). vehicle there, or have it towed
leave the scene of a crash until all . Insurance company and policy there. Specify to the facility that any
matters have been taken care of. number. required replacement collision parts
Move the vehicle only if its position be original equipment parts, either
puts you in danger, or you are
. General description of the new Genuine GM parts or recycled
instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle. original GM parts. Remember,
officer. recycled parts will not be covered by
the GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Publications Owner Information
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
Ordering Information Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
your insurance company may Service Manuals to provide basic operational
initially value the repair using
Service Manuals have the diagnosis information about the vehicle.
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
and repair information on the The Owner Manual includes the
the repair professional, and insist on
engines, electric drive unit, axle, Maintenance Schedule for all
Genuine GM parts. Remember,
suspension, brakes, electrical, models.
if the vehicle is leased, you may be
obligated to have the vehicle steering, body, etc. In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
repaired with Genuine GM parts, Service Bulletins Owner Manual, and Warranty
even if your insurance coverage Booklet.
does not pay the full cost. Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information RETAIL SELL PRICE:
If another party's insurance needed to knowledgeably service $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
company is paying for the repairs, General Motors cars and trucks. shipping fees.
you are not obligated to accept a Each bulletin contains instructions Without Portfolio: Owner
repair valuation based on that to assist in the diagnosis and Manual only.
insurance company's collision service of the vehicle.
policy repair limits, as you have no RETAIL SELL PRICE:
contractual limits with that company. $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
In such cases, you can have control shipping fees.
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Current and Past Models Open Source Information Reporting Safety

Technical Service Bulletins and This vehicle contains open source Defects
Manuals are available for current software, including without
and past model GM vehicles. limitation, software distributed
and/or modified under the GNU
Reporting Safety Defects
ORDER TOLL FREE: to the United States
1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday General Public License, Version 2,
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time June 1991, and the GNU Lesser Government
General Public License, Version 2.1,
For Credit Card Orders Only February 1999. If you believe that your vehicle
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit has a defect which could cause
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com See www.oss.gm.com for additional a crash or could cause injury or
information and to download
Or write to: related materials, including without death, you should immediately
limitation, the previous referred to inform the National Highway
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130 licenses and software. Traffic Safety Administration
Detroit, MI 48207 (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring If NHTSA receives similar
obligation. Allow ample time for complaints, it may open an
delivery. investigation, and if it finds that
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. a safety defect exists in a
funds. Make checks payable in U.S. group of vehicles, it may order
funds. a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline to the Canadian to General Motors
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
to http://www.safercar.gov; or If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors.
write to:
defect, notify Transport Canada Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA immediately, and notify General
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Chevrolet Motor Division
Motors of Canada Limited.
Washington, D.C. 20590 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Call Transport Canada at
Center
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
You can also obtain other P.O. Box 33170
information about motor Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170
vehicle safety from Road Safety Branch
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
http://www.safercar.gov. 80 rue Noel
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur.
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded
crash or near crash-like situations, by the vehicle only if a non-trivial
This GM vehicle has a number of crash situation occurs; no data is
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that recorded by the EDR under normal
information about the vehicle’s driving conditions and no personal
performance and how it is driven. will assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The data (e.g., name, gender, age,
For example, the vehicle uses and crash location) is recorded.
computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such
control engine and electric drive as law enforcement, could combine
unit performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR data with the type of
conditions for airbag deployment personally identifying data
and to deploy airbags in a crash, The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as: routinely acquired during a crash
and to provide antilock braking to investigation.
help the driver control the vehicle. . How various systems in the
These modules may store data to vehicle were operating. To read data recorded by an EDR,
help your dealer technician service special equipment is required, and
the vehicle. Some modules may
. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
also store data about how you passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle
operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened. manufacturer, other parties, such
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was as law enforcement, that have the
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal. information if they have access to
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, the vehicle or the EDR.
. How fast the vehicle was
and temperature settings. traveling.
GM will not access this data or speaking to an advisor. See OnStar personal information or link with
share it with others except: with the Overview on page 14‑1 for more any other GM system containing
consent of the vehicle owner or, information. personal information.
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response Navigation System Radio Frequency
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part of If the vehicle has a navigation Statement
GM's defense of litigation through system, use of the system may This vehicle has systems that
the discovery process; or, as result in the storage of destinations, operate on a radio frequency that
required by law. Data that GM addresses, telephone numbers, and comply with Part 15 of the Federal
collects or receives may also be other trip information. Refer to the Communications Commission (FCC)
used for GM research needs or may navigation manual for information rules and with Industry Canada
be made available to others for on stored data and for deletion Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
research purposes, where a need is instructions.
Operation is subject to the following
shown and the data is not tied to a two conditions:
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) 1. The device may not cause
OnStar® RFID technology is used in some
harmful interference.
If the vehicle is equipped with an vehicles for functions such as tire 2. The device must accept any
active OnStar system, that system pressure monitoring and ignition interference received, including
may also record data in crash or system security, as well as in interference that may cause
near crash‐like situations. The connection with conveniences undesired operation of the
OnStar Terms and Conditions such as key fobs for remote door device.
provides information on data locking/unlocking and starting, and Changes or modifications to any of
collection and use and is available in-vehicle transmitters for garage these systems by other than an
at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or door openers. RFID technology in authorized service facility could void
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by GM vehicles does not use or record authorization to use this equipment.
pressing the Q button and
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Push Q or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR

(1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
OnStar Overview Push X to:
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
. Make a call, end a call,
OnStar Services or answer an incoming call.
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a voice commands.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 comprehensive, in-vehicle system . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Navigation voice commands.
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Requires the available Directions
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic and Connections service plan.
OnStar Additional Services.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Push Q to connect to a live
The OnStar system status light is
Advisor to:
next to the OnStar buttons. If the
status light is: . Verify account information or
update contact information.
. Solid Green: System is ready.
. Get driving directions. Requires
. Flashing Green: On a call. the available Directions and
. Red: Indicates a problem. Connections service plan.
14-2 OnStar
. Receive On-Demand
Diagnostics for a check on the OnStar Services Navigation
vehicle’s key operating systems. OnStar navigation requires the
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Emergency Directions and Connections
With Automatic Crash Response, service plan.
Push ] to get a priority connection the built-in system can automatically Push Q to receive directions or
to an Emergency Advisor available connect to help in a crash even if have them sent to the vehicle
24/7 to: you cannot ask for it. navigation screen. Destinations
. Get help for an emergency. can also be forwarded to the
Push ] to connect to an
. Be a Good Samaritan or Emergency Advisor. GPS vehicle from Google Maps™ or
respond to an AMBER Alert. technology is used to identify the MapQuest.com. The OnStar
vehicle location and can provide mapping database is continuously
. Get crisis assistance and updated. Visit www.onstar.com for
evacuation routes. critical information to emergency
personnel. The Advisor is also coverage maps.
trained to offer critical assistance in Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation
emergency situations.
1. Push Q to connect to a live
Security Advisor.
OnStar provides services like Stolen 2. Request directions.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition 3. Directions are downloaded to the
Block, and Roadside Assistance, vehicle.
if the vehicle is equipped with these
services. OnStar can unlock the 4. Follow the voice-guided
vehicle doors remotely, if it is commands.
equipped with automatic door locks,
and can help police locate the
vehicle if it is stolen.
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands Repeat Other Navigation Services

During a Planned Route 1. Push X. System responds:
Available from OnStar
Cancel Route “OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from Google
1. Push X. System responds: 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds
Maps™ and MapQuest.com to
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. with the last direction given, then
their Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
Say “Cancel route.” System responds with “OnStar ready,”
screen-based navigation system.
responds: “Would you like to then a tone.
When ready, the directions will be
cancel route directions to your 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice downloaded to the vehicle.
destination?” commands.
Destination Download: Push Q,
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: Get My Destination then request the Advisor to
“OK, route canceled.” download directions to the
1. Push X. System responds:
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice navigation system in the vehicle.
“OnStar ready,” then a tone.
commands. After the call ends, push the “Go”
2. Say “Get my destination.” button on the navigation screen to
Route Preview System responds with miles to begin driving directions.
1. Push X. System responds: the destination, then responds
Destinations can also be
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. with “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
downloaded on the go. For
2. Say “Route Preview.” System 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice information about eNav, Destination
responds with the next three commands. Download, and coverage maps visit
maneuvers. www.onstar.com.
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
commands.
14-4 OnStar
Connections End a Call Place a Call Using a Stored

Number
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows Push X. System responds: “Call
calls to be made and received from ended.” 1. Push X. System responds:
the vehicle. The vehicle can also “OnStar ready.”
be controlled from a cell phone Store a Name Tag for Speed
through the OnStar mobile app. See Dialing 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
www.onstar.com for coverage maps. responds: “OK, calling
1. Push X. System responds: <name tag>.”
Hands-Free Calling “OnStar ready.”
Verify Minutes and Expiration
1. Push X. System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
“Please say the number you Push X and say “minutes” then
“OnStar ready.”
would like to store.” “verify” to check how many minutes
2. Say “Dial.” System responds: remain and their expiration date.
“Please say the name or number 3. Say the entire number without
to call.” pausing. System responds: OnStar Mobile App
“Please say the name tag.”
3. Say the entire number without With an iPhone® or
pausing, including a “1” and the 4. Pick a name tag. “System Android™-based mobile device,
area code. System responds: responds: ”About to store <name an OnStar mobile app can be
“OK calling.” tag>. Does that sound OK?” downloaded. The vehicle can be
5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again. remote started, if equipped, or
Retrieve My Number System responds: “OK, storing the doors can be unlocked from
<name tag>.” anywhere there is cell phone
1. Push X. System responds:
service. It can also check the fuel
“OnStar ready.”
level, tire pressure, and oil life.
2. Say “My Number.” System
responds: “Your OnStar
Hands-Free Calling number is.”
OnStar 14-5
It can connect to an OnStar Advisor OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works
anytime. For OnStar mobile app
Information Automatic Crash Response,
compatibility or further information,
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
see www.onstar.com.
Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Diagnostics Push Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
perform a vehicle check every can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
month. It will check the engine, account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
transmission, antilock brakes, and receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
major vehicle systems. It also ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
checks the tire pressures, if the may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
vehicle is equipped with the Tire vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
Pressure Monitoring System. If a information. conditions, see www.onstar.com
diagnostics check is needed (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);
Reactivation for Subsequent contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
between e-mails, push Q, and an Owners
Advisor can run a check. (1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
Push Q and follow the prompts to 1‐877‐248‐2080; or push Q to
speak to an Advisor as soon as speak with an Advisor. OnStar
possible after acquiring the vehicle. services require a vehicle electrical
The Advisor will update vehicle system, wireless service, and GPS
records and will explain the OnStar satellite technologies to be available
service offers and options available. and operating for features to
function properly. These systems
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
14-6 OnStar
OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement on TTY Users
your vehicle is in a place where page 13‑16 for information
OnStar has the ability to
OnStar has an agreement with a regarding Part 15 of the Federal
communicate to the deaf,
wireless service provider for service Communications Commission (FCC)
hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impaired
in that area, and the wireless rules and Industry Canada
customers while in the vehicle. The
service provider has coverage, Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
available dealer‐installed TTY
network capacity, reception, and
Services for People with system can provide in-vehicle
technology compatible with OnStar’s
Disabilities access to all of the OnStar services,
service. Service involving location
except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
information about the vehicle cannot Advisors provide services to help Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation.
work unless GPS signals are subscribers with physical disabilities
available, unobstructed, and and medical conditions. Onstar.com
compatible with the OnStar
hardware. OnStar service may not Push Q for help with: The website provides access to
work if the OnStar equipment is not account information, manages the
. Locating a gas station with an OnStar subscription, and allows
properly installed or it has not been attendant to pump gas.
properly maintained. If equipment viewing of videos of each service.
or software is added, connected,
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., Get subscription plan pricing and
or modified, OnStar service may that meets accessibility needs. sign up for OnStar Vehicle
not work. Other problems beyond Diagnostics. Click on the “My
. Providing directions to the Account” tab on the home page.
OnStar’s control may prevent closest hospital or pharmacy in
service such as hills, tall buildings, urgent situations.
tunnels, weather, electrical system
design and architecture of the
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a
crash, or wireless phone network
congestion or jamming.
OnStar 14-7
OnStar Personal Identification Potential Issues

. In emergency situations, OnStar
Number (PIN) can use the last stored GPS
Some OnStar services are disabled location to send to emergency
A PIN is needed to access some of after five days. OnStar cannot responders.
the OnStar services, like Remote perform Remote Door Unlock or
Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Assistance. You will be prompted to vehicle has been off continuously cause loss of the ability to send
change the PIN the first time when for five days. After five days, OnStar a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
speaking with an Advisor. To can contact Roadside Assistance The Advisor may give a verbal
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar and a locksmith to help gain access route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the to the vehicle. after the vehicle is driven into an
current number. open area.
Global Positioning
Warranty System (GPS) Cellular and GPS Antennas
OnStar equipment may be . Obstruction of the GPS can Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the new-vehicle occur in a large city with tall antenna to prevent blocking cellular
limited warranty. The manufacturer buildings; in parking garages; and GPS signal reception. Cellular
of the vehicle furnishes detailed around airports; in tunnels, reception is required for OnStar to
warranty information. underpasses, or parking send remote signals to the vehicle.
garages; or in an area with very
Languages dense trees. If GPS signals are
The vehicle can be programmed to not available, the OnStar system
respond in French or Spanish. should still operate to call
Push Q and ask an Advisor. OnStar. However, OnStar could
Advisors can speak French or have difficulty identifying the
Spanish. exact location.
14-8 OnStar
Unable to Connect to OnStar Add-on Electrical Equipment Privacy

Message The OnStar system is integrated The complete OnStar Privacy
If there is limited cellular coverage into the electrical architecture of the Statement may be found at
or the cellular network has reached vehicle. Do not add any electrical www.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive
maximum capacity, this message equipment. See Add-On Electrical users of wireless communications
may come on. Push Q to try the Equipment on page 9‑58. Added are cautioned that the privacy of any
call again or try again after driving a electrical equipment may interfere information sent via wireless cellular
few miles into another cellular area. with the operation of the OnStar communications cannot be assured.
system and cause it to not operate. Third parties may unlawfully
Vehicle and Power Issues intercept or access transmissions
and private communications without
OnStar services require a vehicle
consent.
electrical system, wireless service,
and GPS satellite technologies to be
available and operating for features
to function properly. These systems
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont.) Appearance Care

What Will You See after an Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Accessories and
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Should an Airbag Assistance Program,
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Add-On Electrical
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-21 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Airbags CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Additional Information,
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-18 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Audio System
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19 Automatic
Airbag
Alarm System Climate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-1
Adding Equipment to the
Anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Airbag System
Antenna
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
How Does an Airbag
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 B
Anti-theft Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Passenger Sensing
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-51 High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Antilock Brake Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
What Makes an Airbag
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
i-2 INDEX
Battery and Charging C Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Delay Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15, 5-42
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-25 Electrical Requirements . . . . . .9-52
California
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-21, 7-25 Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Brake Utility Interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Perchlorate Materials
Parking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30 Charging Status Screens . . . . . . 9-47
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-22 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-19
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Check
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Child Restraints
Capacities and
Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . .9-32 Infants and Young
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Carbon Monoxide
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Lower Anchors and
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-41
Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-50
Cargo
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Cleaning
Cautions, Danger, and
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 10-26, 10-27 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-28 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Climate Control Systems
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Charge Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
INDEX i-3
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15, 5-42 Text Telephone (TTY) Door
Compressor Kit, Tire Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Customer Information Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Service Publications Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Customer Satisfaction Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3
Coolant Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Drive Mode Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Drive Unit
Engine Temperature D Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10 Driver Efficiency Gauge . . . . . . . 5-16
Cooling System . . . . . . . .10-14–10-16 Danger, Warnings, and Driver Information
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Courtesy Transportation Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15 Driver Selected Operating
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Daytime Running Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Cover Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Driving
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Delayed Charging Override . . . . 9-46 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-9
Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
i-4 INDEX
Driving (cont.) Electrical System Engine (cont.)

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Engine Compartment Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Instrument Panel Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-34, 10-36 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-27
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Engine Oil
Driving for Better Rear Compartment Fuse Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Energy Efficiency . . . . . . . 1-27, 9-2 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-34 Engine Unavailable
E Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Out of Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Electric Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Energy Efficiency Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Electric Drive Unit Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27, 9-2 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 Energy Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Electric Drive Unit Shift Engine Extended Range Mode . . . . . . . . 9-22
Lock Control Function Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Check and Service Engine Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Electric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-8 F
Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-22 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Filter,
Electrical Equipment, Coolant Temperature Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Electrical Requirements for Cooling System . . . . . . 10-14–10-16 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 Cooling System Messages . . .5-47 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
INDEX i-5
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Fuses General Information

Fluid Engine Compartment Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Instrument Panel Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-34, 10-36 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Front Seats Rear Compartment Fuse GM Mobility Reimbursement
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 G H
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-62 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Filling a Portable Fuel Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62 Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57 Gasoline Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-54 Gauges Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-54 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Driver Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-26 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Daytime Running
Requirements, California . . . . .9-54 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Function Check Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Electric Drive Unit Shift Warning Lights and High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Lock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-27
i-6 INDEX
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Lamps (cont.)

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Instrument Panel Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1 Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
High Voltage Battery Gauge . . . 5-15 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
High Voltage Devices and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 J LATCH System
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Replacing Parts after a
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-9 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 K Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Hood, Door, Hatch Open Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-48 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Keyless Entry Lifting the Vehicle, Tires . . . . . . . 10-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2 Light
How to Wear Safety Belts Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Ready Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
L Vehicle Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
I Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-41 Lighting
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Infants and Young Children, Lamps Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Information Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
INDEX i-7
Lights Locks Messages (cont.)

Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Antilock Brake System Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Electric Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-47
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-22 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-22 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49
Engine Coolant Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-26 Object Detection System . . . . .5-49
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-25 Lower Anchors and Tethers Propulsion Power . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-26 for Children (LATCH Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-52
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 M Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52
Hood, Door, Hatch Open . . . . .5-28 Maintenance Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
Mountain Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Maintenance Modes . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16 Maintenance Schedule Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Recommended Fluids Mirrors
Service Electric Parking and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Automatic Dimming
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-19 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Messages Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Traction Control System Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-51 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
i-8 INDEX
Mode Oil P
Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Park
Extended Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12
Shifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Modes Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Driver Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Parking
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-32
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Monitor System, Tire Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Brake and P (Park)
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 OnStar®
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25
Mountain Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-21
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4
Passenger Airbag Status
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-26
N Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Perchlorate Materials
Navigation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Vehicle Data Recording Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Personalization
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53
Navigation, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Ordering
Phone
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-12
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-21, 7-25
Out of Fuel/Engine
Plug-In Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
O Outlets
Power
Object Detection System Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Overview, Infotainment
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Off-Road Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
INDEX i-9
Power (cont.) Ready Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Replacing Safety Belt

Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-18
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-41 Reporting Safety Defects
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Rearview Mirror Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-14
Pregnancy, Using Safety Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Privacy Recommended Fluids and Requirements
Radio Frequency Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Electrical Battery Charging . . .9-52
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16 Records Restraints
Program Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8 Recreational Vehicle Retained Accessory
Proposition 65 Warning, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Propulsion Power Reimbursement Program, Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-34
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roads
R System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Radio Frequency Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Roadside Assistance
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Radios Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 Running the Vehicle While
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-32 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Replacing LATCH System
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
i-10 INDEX
S Securing Child Signals, Turn and

Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-50 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Security Specifications and
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
How to Wear Safety Belts
Security, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Sport Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Service StabiliTrak
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Accessories and OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Start
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-18
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-6 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-17
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Starting and Stopping the
Safety Defects Reporting
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-14
Maintenance, General Starting the Vehicle
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Status Screens
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Publications Ordering Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Service Electric Parking Storage Areas
Seats
Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Shifting Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Umbrella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
INDEX i-11
Storing the Tire Sealant Tires (cont.) Transportation Program,

and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Sealant and Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Sealant and Compressor Turn and Lane-Change
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
System Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Terminology and U
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-38
Uniform Tire Quality Umbrella Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
T Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Uniform Tire Quality
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Wheel Alignment and Tire Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-15 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-62
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-57 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-65
Tires When It Is Time for New Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Utility Interruption of
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Total Vehicle Range . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Towing
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-58
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-76 V
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-48 Vehicle
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Traction Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Lifting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52 Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-33
Control System (TCS)/ Identification
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-47 StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
i-12 INDEX
Vehicle (cont.) W Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Warning
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-53 Windshield
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53 Winter
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Starting and Stopping . . . . . . . . .9-17 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Total Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-25
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Vehicle Care Wiring, High Voltage
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Storing the Tire Sealant Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-53
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-67
Wheels
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Alignment and Tire
Vehicle Identification
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Service Parts Identification
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Vehicle Ready Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
When It Is Time for New
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-39
Voltage Devices and
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

2012 Chevrolet Volt

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2012 Chevrolet Volt

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Volt Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (1,1)

2012 Chevrolet Volt Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1

2012 Chevrolet Volt Owner Manual M

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart f: Electric Parking Brake * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Initial Drive 7 : Press and release to locate

Remote Start After entering the vehicle during a Door Locks

Hatch Remote Keyless Entry (RKE): Windows

The power window switches are

Remote Window Operation Seat Adjustment Height Adjustment

Move the lever up or down to raise

Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright Heated Seats

Safety Belts Passenger Sensing No other airbag is affected by the

When the rear window defogger is Steering Wheel

Interior Lighting Reading Lamps

Dome Lamps There are front and rear reading

The rear reading lamps are in the

Exterior Lighting For more information, see:

Climate Controls E. Auto (Automatic Operation)

Climate Control Buttons

A. Temperature Control C. Defrost

See Automatic Climate Control

Climate Touch Screen Controls

A. Driver and Passenger Auto F. Climate Modes: Fan Only, ECO,

Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices See Bluetooth (Overview) on

$ / i : Press to silence the Cruise Control SET/− : Move the thumbwheel

Power Outlets Battery and Efficiency If the vehicle is in a crash, the

See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. See Battery on page 10‑23.

2. Open the rear hatch, lift the load

5. Before storing the charge cord, Fueling

6. Place the charge cord, face

4. After refueling, reinstall the fuel Regenerative Braking

Service Performance and Electronic Stability

Climate Setting Use remote start to heat or cool the Maintenance

Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance and OnStar OnStar®

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Vehicle Security

The key that is part of the RKE

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

If locked out of the vehicle, call the

Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keyless Access Operation

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

Programming with a Recognized 5. Remove the transmitter from the

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

To start the vehicle: Replace the transmitter battery as Remote Start

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Automatic Door Locks Lockout Protection Safety Locks

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

Doors WARNING (Continued)

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows